Manuel Movi-C Version Modulaire

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services *23085711_0317*
Product Manual
Application Inverter
MOVIDRIVE® modular
Edition 03/2017 23085711/EN

SEW-EURODRIVE—Driving the world
Table of contents
Table of contents
1 Product description.................................................................................................................. 6
1.1 Device availability ........................................................................................................... 8
1.2 MOVIDRIVE® modular at a glance ................................................................................. 9
1.3 Product overview MOVIDRIVE® modular ..................................................................... 13
1.4 Product overview accessories ...................................................................................... 16
1.5 FCB concept ................................................................................................................. 17
1.6 Control mode ................................................................................................................ 23
1.7 Energy saving functions................................................................................................ 30
1.8 MOVISUITE® engineering software ............................................................................. 31
2 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 34
2.1 Markings ....................................................................................................................... 34
2.2 General technical data .................................................................................................. 35
2.3 Technical data of MDP power supply modules............................................................. 36
2.4 Technical data for MDA and MDD axis modules .......................................................... 38
2.5 Dimension sheets of the modules................................................................................. 43
2.6 Technical data of the option cards ................................................................................ 55
2.7 Technical data of encoder interfaces ............................................................................ 58
2.8 Technical data of braking resistors, filters and chokes ................................................. 59
3 Configuration .......................................................................................................................... 68
3.1 SEW Workbench........................................................................................................... 68
3.2 Schematic workflow for project planning....................................................................... 69
3.3 Drive selection .............................................................................................................. 70
3.4 Recommendations for motor and inverter selection ..................................................... 76
3.5 Motor-inverter assignments .......................................................................................... 80
3.6 Selecting an axis module ............................................................................................ 104
3.7 Power supply module selection .................................................................................. 108
3.8 Braking resistor selection............................................................................................ 113
3.9 Supply system cable and motor cable ........................................................................ 118
3.10 Signal lines.................................................................................................................. 121
3.11 Line components......................................................................................................... 121
3.12 24 V supply voltage selection ..................................................................................... 125
3.13 Arrangement of the modules within the axis system................................................... 131
4 Prefabricated cables ............................................................................................................ 132

4.1 Meaning of the symbols .............................................................................................. 132
4.2 Power cables for CMP.. motors .................................................................................. 133
4.3 Encoder cables for CMP.. motors ............................................................................... 139
4.4 Single-cable technology for CMP.. motors.................................................................. 142
23085711/EN – 03/2017
4.5 Power cables for CFM.. motors .................................................................................. 143

4.6 Encoder cables for CFM.. motors ............................................................................... 148
4.7 Encoder cables for DR.. motors.................................................................................. 151
4.8 System bus and module bus cable ............................................................................. 156
5 General information.............................................................................................................. 160

5.1 About this documentation ........................................................................................... 160
Product Manual – MOVIDRIVE® modular 3

Table of contents
5.2 Structure of the safety notes ....................................................................................... 160

5.3 Rights to claim under limited warranty ........................................................................ 162
5.4 Content of the documentation..................................................................................... 162
5.5 Exclusion of liability..................................................................................................... 162
5.6 Other applicable documentation ................................................................................. 162
5.7 Product names and trademarks.................................................................................. 162
5.8 Copyright notice .......................................................................................................... 162
5.9 Device availability ....................................................................................................... 163
6 Safety notes .......................................................................................................................... 164

6.1 Preliminary information ............................................................................................... 164
6.2 Operator's duties......................................................................................................... 164
6.3 Target group ............................................................................................................... 164
6.4 Designated use ........................................................................................................... 165
6.5 Functional safety technology ...................................................................................... 166
6.6 Transport..................................................................................................................... 166
6.7 Installation/assembly................................................................................................... 167
6.8 Electrical connection ................................................................................................... 168
6.9 Protective separation .................................................................................................. 168
6.10 Startup/operation ........................................................................................................ 169
7 Unit structure, axis system structure ................................................................................. 170

7.1 Connection variants .................................................................................................... 170
7.2 Nameplates................................................................................................................. 172
7.3 Type code ................................................................................................................... 175
7.4 Unit structure of the MDP power supply module......................................................... 176
7.5 Unit structure of the MDA and MDD axis modules ..................................................... 179
7.6 Example of axis system connection............................................................................ 185
7.7 Use of option cards ..................................................................................................... 186
8 Installation............................................................................................................................. 188
8.1 Installation accessories............................................................................................... 188
8.2 Permitted tightening torques ....................................................................................... 191
8.3 Mechanical installation................................................................................................ 192
8.4 Covers......................................................................................................................... 195
8.5 Control cabinet installation.......................................................................................... 200
8.6 Electrical installation ................................................................................................... 209
8.7 Installing options and accessories .............................................................................. 223
8.8 Braking resistors ......................................................................................................... 233
8.9 Line choke................................................................................................................... 245
8.10 Line filter ..................................................................................................................... 245
23085711/EN – 03/2017
8.11 EMC-compliant installation ......................................................................................... 246

8.12 Terminal assignment................................................................................................... 251
8.13 Wiring diagrams .......................................................................................................... 262
8.14 UL-compliant installation............................................................................................. 279
9 Startup ................................................................................................................................... 280

9.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 280
4 Product Manual – MOVIDRIVE® modular

Table of contents
9.2 Setting the EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS ID ............................................................................ 281

9.3 Startup requirements .................................................................................................. 281
9.4 Startup procedure ....................................................................................................... 282
9.5 Connection to the engineering software ..................................................................... 284
10 Operation............................................................................................................................... 285
10.1 General information .................................................................................................... 285
10.2 7-segment display....................................................................................................... 286
10.3 Operating displays ...................................................................................................... 286
10.4 Faults at the power supply module ............................................................................. 289
10.5 Axis module fault......................................................................................................... 293
10.6 Responses to error acknowledgement ....................................................................... 328
10.7 Fault responses .......................................................................................................... 330
11 Service ................................................................................................................................... 333

11.1 Electronics Service by SEW‑EURODRIVE................................................................. 333
11.2 Extended storage........................................................................................................ 333
11.3 Shutdown .................................................................................................................... 334
11.4 Waste disposal............................................................................................................ 334
12 Functional safety .................................................................................................................. 335

12.1 General information .................................................................................................... 335
12.2 Integrated Safety Technology ..................................................................................... 335
12.3 Safety Conditions........................................................................................................ 340
12.4 Connection variants .................................................................................................... 345
12.5 Safety characteristics.................................................................................................. 351
13 Appendix ............................................................................................................................... 352

13.1 Abbreviation key ......................................................................................................... 352
13.2 Declarations of conformity .......................................................................................... 354
Index ...................................................................................................................................... 356
14 Address list ........................................................................................................................... 362

23085711/EN – 03/2017

1 Product description
With its brand MOVI-C®, SEW‑EURODRIVE launches a new generation of drive and
automation technology. MOVI-C® is the modular automation system that allows for the
highest level of system and machine automation.
MOVI-C® comprises drive technology, MotionControl, control technology and visualiz-
ation.
MOVIDRIVE® modular is the modular application inverter for all types of applications,
ranging from open-loop speed control to servo drives with kinematic model.
MOVIDRIVE® modular consists of:
• Supply and regenerative modules.
• Single-axis and double-axis modules.
• Capacitor and buffer modules.
• 24 V switched-mode power supply modules.
• Assembly modules for integrating MOVI-C® CONTROLLERs into the axis system.
• Accessories for EMC-compliant installation.
• Option cards for connecting other I/O or multi-encoders.
• Option cards for functional safety in functionally different versions.
• Accessories for connecting and controlling of motors and brakes, as well as pre-
fabricated motor and encoder cables.
MOVIDRIVE® modular can be supplemented by connecting MOVIDRIVE® system
single-axis units. These possess comparable functionalities as axis modules, but have
their own line connection.
Especially in the upper power range up to 588 A/315 kW, MOVIDRIVE® system com-
plements the modular application inverter. For detailed information, refer to the
MOVIDRIVE® system product manual.
The key features of MOVIDRIVE® modular and MOVIDRIVE® system are:
• A maximum of 15 axis modules at a power supply module, a maximum of 30
drives for double-axis modules.
• Control mode:
– U/f: for simple applications with asynchronous motors.
– VFCPLUS: for precise control of asynchronous motors.
– CFC: for asynchronous and synchronous servomotors.
– ELSM®: for synchronous motors without encoders.
• Multi-encoder input in basic unit.
• Speed control, torque control, position control.
• Expansion slots for I/O, multi-encoder, functional safety.
• Very compact device size, reduced space requirements in the control cabinet.
MOVIDRIVE® modular and system are intended for operation at the MOVI-C®
23085711/EN – 03/2017
CONTROLLER, the controller from SEW‑EURODRIVE.

They offer a powerful clock-synchronous connection via the integrated EtherCAT®/
SBusPLUS communication interface. Other EtherCAT® stations from SEW‑EURODRIVE
or other manufacturers can be controlled and diagnosed by the MOVI-C®
CONTROLLER.

Product description
1
The MOVI‑C® CONTROLLER offers the following functionalities: 1
• Freely programmable sequence control in accordance with IEC 6-1131 for auto-
mating drive and logic tasks.
• Central data storage for all MOVI-C® inverters from SEW‑EURODRIVE at the
EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS.
• Plug-and-play unit replacement through automatic data recovery.
• Central setpoint input for clock-synchronous drives and for auxiliary drives.
• Motion functions: Velocity control, torque specification, position specification,
phase-synchronous operation, cams, application modules, kinematics.
• EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS master for SEW‑EURODRIVE components and for third-party
components.
• Fieldbus device connection to higher-level control systems.
• Diagnostics and visualization of the automation system.
3 x AC 400 V
External PLC
X30 IN
® ®
EtherCAT /SBusPLUS EtherCAT /SBusPLUS
DOP/OPT
®
MOVI-PLC I/O-System C
Power
10 min
®
MOVI-C CONTROLLER
® ®
MOVIDRIVE modular MOVIDRIVE system
16000611083
The new engineering software MOVISUITE® is the central module of the MOVI-
C® modular automation system. MOVISUITE® allows for intuitive operation with mod-
ern operating concepts.
The central functions of MOVISUITE® are:
• Network scan.
• Unit startup and parameterization.
• Data storage and data management.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
• Scope and diagnostics.

• Programming environment for the MOVI-C® CONTROLLER.
• Programming environment for functional safety.
• Parameterization and diagnostics environment for application modules.

Device availability
1.1 Device availability

This documentation lists modules of the application inverter and accessories that are
not yet available at the time of the publication of this document.
The following table lists the available modules of the application inverter. Accessories
required for the inverter operation such as braking resistors, chokes, and filters are
available.
Module Type designation
Power supply modules MDP90A-0100-503-4-000
MDP90A-0100-503-4-C00
MDP90A-0250-503-4-000
MDP90A-0500-503-4-000
MDP90A-0750-503-4-000
MDP90A-1100-503-4-000
Single-axis modules MDA90A-0020-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0040-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0080-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0120-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0160-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0240-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0320-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0480-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0640-503-X-S01
MDA90A-1000-503-X-S00
MDA90A-1400-503-X-S00
Double-axis modules MDD90A-0020-503-X-S00/X
MDD90A-0040-503-X-S00/X
MDD90A-0020-503-X-S00
MDD90A-0040-503-X-S00
MDD90A-0080-503-X-S00
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Product description
MOVIDRIVE modular at a glance 1
1.2 MOVIDRIVE® modular at a glance 1
MOVIDRIVE
modular
a glance at
Power supply module

MDP90A.. Description: (→ 2 13)
Technical data: (→ 2 36)
Dimension drawings: (→ 2 43)
• Performance classes: 10/25/50/75/110 kW

• Voltage range: 3 × 380 – 500 V, 50 – 60 Hz
• Nominal DC link voltage: DC 560 V
• Overload capacity: 250% of the nominal power for 1 s
Axis modules
Single-axis module Description: (→ 2 14)
MDA90A.. Technical data: (→ 2 38)
• Axis sizes: 2 – 180 A

• Overload capacity: 250% of the nominal output current for 1 s
• System bus: EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS
• Control mode with and without encoder feedback
23085711/EN – 03/2017

MOVIDRIVE modular at a glance
Axis modules
Double-axis module Description: (→ 2 15)
MDD90A.. Technical data: (→ 2 39)
• You can operate 2 motors with one module

• Axis sizes: 2 × 2 A – 2 × 8 A
• Overload capacity: 250 % of the nominal output current for 1 s
• System bus: EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS
• Control mode with and without encoder feedback
Option cards
Input/output card Description: (→ 2 16), (→ 2 226)
CIO21A CID21A Technical data: (→ 2 55)
CIO21A
• 4 digital inputs
S50
• 4 digital outputs
• 2 analog inputs
• 2 analog outputs
CID21A
• 4 digital inputs
• 4 digital outputs
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Product description
MOVIDRIVE modular at a glance 1
Option cards 1
CES11A multi-encoder card Description: (→ 2 16), (→ 2 229)
Technical data: (→ 2 57)
The multi-encoder card enables evaluating additional encoders.

For detailed information on the CES11A multi-encoder card, refer to the
manual "CES11A Multi-Encoder Card".
Controller
MOVI-C® CONTROLLER The MOVI-C® CONTROLLER power is characterized by:
power • Intel Core2Duo 2.2 GHz processor.
• Windows® Embedded Standard 7.
• Ethernet interface for engineering tasks or TCP/IP and UDP via
IEC 61131-3.
• 16 MB program memory and 64 MB data memory.
• A maximum of 32 interpolating axes that can be connected.
• Another 32 auxiliary axes that can be connected.
• System bus EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS.
• Optional slave connection via PROFIBUS DPV2.
• Optional device connection via PROFINET.
For further information on the control, refer to the manual "MOVI-C®

CONTROLLER power UHX85A and power eco UHX84A".
23085711/EN – 03/2017

MOVIDRIVE modular at a glance
Controller
MOVI-C® CONTROLLER The MOVI-C® CONTROLLER power eco is characterized by:
power eco • Intel Core2Duo 2.2 GHz processor.
• Windows® Embedded Standard 7.
• Ethernet interface for engineering tasks or TCP/IP and UDP via
IEC 61131-3.
• 16 MB program memory and 64 MB data memory.
• A maximum of 16 interpolating axes that can be connected.
• Another 16 auxiliary axes that can be connected.
• System bus EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS.
• Optional slave connection via PROFIBUS DPV2.
• Optional device connection via PROFINET.
For further information on the control, refer to the manual "MOVI-C®

CONTROLLER power UHX85A and power eco UHX84A".
Accessories
Prefabricated motor and en- Description and technical data: (→ 2 132)
coder cables
Braking resistors Description and technical data: (→ 2 59)
TCB thermal circuit breaker TCB thermal circuit breaker option: (→ 2 64)
Line filter Description and technical data: (→ 2 66)
Line choke Description and technical data: (→ 2 67)
Valid motor encoders (→ 2 74)
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Product description
Product overview MOVIDRIVE® modular 1
1.3 Product overview MOVIDRIVE® modular 1
Product
overview
MOVIDRIVE
® modular
1.3.1 MDP90A.. power supply modules

A power supply module can supply up to 15 axis modules with energy, both single-
axis and double-axis modules. Regenerative energy can be dissipated with a braking
resistor.
Characteristics • Cover a wide range of power ratings with finely graded performance classes:
10/25/50/75/110 kW.
• Universal use due to a wide voltage range for line connection: 3 × AC 380 – 500 V,
50 – 60 Hz.
• Suited for TN/TT and IT voltage supply systems.
• Communication to the axis modules via the module bus.
• Operation without a line contactor is possible for power ratings of 25 kW and
higher.
• High overload capacity to 250% for 1 s.
Device data
Nominal line voltage 3 × AC 380 – 500 V

according to EN 50160
Line frequency 50 – 60 Hz ± 10%
Nominal DC link voltage DC 560 V
Overload capacity for max. 1 s 250%
Type designation Nominal Nominal DC Maximum Nominal Size Technical

power link current DC link line current data
current
kW A A A
MDP90A-0100-503-4-000 10 21 52 16 1
MDP90A-0100-503-4-C00 10 21 52 16 1A
MDP90A-0250-503-4-000 25 51 127 40 2
(→ 2 36)
MDP90A-0500-503-4-000 50 102 255 80 3
MDP90A-0750-503-4-000 75 153 382 120 3
MDP90A-1100-503-4-000 110 224 560 175 4
The MDP90A-...-C00 power supply module (size 1A) has an integrated braking res-
istor and an integrated energy storage device.
Depending on the application, an additional external braking resistor is no longer ne-
cessary due to the integrated braking resistor.
The energy storage device can store energy up to 250 J and release it again if re-
quired.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Product overview MOVIDRIVE® modular
1.3.2 MDA90A..single-axis modules

Characteristics • Finely stepped axes sizes, see the following table.
• High overload capacity of 250% of the nominal output current for a maximum of
1 s.
• Optimized control modes with and without encoder feedback for asynchronous and
synchronous motors.
• An EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS system bus is available for communication.
• Integrated energy-saving function for partial load operation of asynchronous mo-
tors and standby mode.
• Integrated safety function for safe disconnection PLe according to EN 13849, see
chapter "Functional safety" (→ 2 335).
• Easy motor startup for asynchronous and synchronous motors by measuring the
motor parameters.
• Universal operation in user units.
Device data

Output voltage 0 – Vline
Overload capacity for max. 1 s at 250%
PWM = 4 kHz
Type designation Nominal Nominal Nominal Maximum Size Technical

output cur- output cur- output cur- output data
rent rent rent current
PWM = PWM = PWM =
4 kHz 8 kHz 16 kHz
A A A A
MDA90A-0020-503-X-S00 2 1.5 1 5 1
MDA90A-0040-503-X-S00 4 3 2 10 1
MDA90A-0080-503-X-S00 8 6 4 20 1
MDA90A-0120-503-X-S00 12 9 6 30 1
MDA90A-0160-503-X-S00 16 12 8 40 2
MDA90A-0240-503-X-S00 24 18 12 60 2
(→ 2 38)
MDA90A-0320-503-X-S00 32 24 16 80 3
MDA90A-0480-503-X-S00 48 36 21.6 120 3
MDA90A-0640-503-X-S01 64 48 32 160 4
MDA90A-1000-503-X-S00 100 75 50 250 5
MDA90A-1400-503-X-S00 140 105 - 280 6
23085711/EN – 03/2017
MDA90A-1800-503-X-S00 180 125 - 360 6

Product description
Product overview MOVIDRIVE® modular 1
1.3.3 MDD90A.. double-axis modules 1
Characteristics • You can operate 2 motors independently of one another with one module.
• Finely stepped axes sizes, see the following table.
• High overload capacity of 250% of the nominal output current for a maximum of
1 s.
• Optimized control modes with and without encoder feedback for asynchronous and
synchronous motors.
• An EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS system bus is available for communication.
• Integrated energy-saving function for partial load operation of asynchronous mo-
tors and standby mode.
• Integrated safety function for safe disconnection PLe according to EN 13849, see
chapter "Functional safety" (→ 2 335).
• Easy motor startup for asynchronous motors by parameter estimation.
• Universal operation in user units.
Device data

Output voltage 0 – Vline
Overload capacity for max. 1 s at 250%
PWM = 4 kHz
Type designation Nominal out- Nominal out- Maximum Size Technical

put current put current output cur- data
PWM = 4 kHz PWM = 8 kHz rent
A A A
MDD90A-0020-503-X-S00/X 2×2 2 × 1.5 2×5 1
MDD90A-0040-503-X-S00/X 2×4 2×3 2 × 10 1
MDD90A-0020-503-X-S00 2×2 2 × 1.5 2×5 2 (→ 2 39)
MDD90A-0040-503-X-S00 2×4 2×3 2 × 10 2
MDD90A-0080-503-X-S00 2×8 2×6 2 × 20 2
...-S00/X Without option card slot

...-S00 With option card slot
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Product overview accessories
1.4 Product overview accessories

The functionality and flexibility of MOVI-C® application inverters can be supplemented
by many different option cards.
1.4.1 CID21A input/output card

This option card is used to increase the number of digital inputs and outputs of the ba-
sic device.
• 4 digital inputs.
• 4 digital outputs.
1.4.2 CIO21A input/output card

This option card is used to increase the number of digital and analog inputs and out-
puts of the basic device.
• 4 digital inputs.
• 4 digital outputs.
• 2 analog inputs (current/voltage).
• 2 analog outputs (current/voltage).
1.4.3 CES11A multi-encoder card

The CES11A multi-encoder card enables evaluation of additional encoders. The addi-
tional encoder can be used as distance encoder or as motor encoder.
The following encoders are supported:
HTL 12/24 V (differential)

TTL/RS422 (differential)
SIN/COS 1 VSS (differential)
HIPERFACE® with SIN/COS signals 1 VSS
SEW encoder (RS485) with SIN/COS signals 1 VSS, e.g. AS7W, AG7W
EnDat 2.1 with SIN/COS signals 1 VSS
SSI encoder with/without SIN/COS signals 1 VSS
CANopen encoder
Besides the encoders listed above, further encoders that can be used are described in
chapter "Valid motor encoders from SEW‑EURODRIVE".
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Product description
FCB concept 1
1.5 FCB concept 1
FCB = Function Control Block
The term "FCB concept" describes the modular firmware design of MOVI-C® inverters.
This feature ensures that a wide range of drive functions can be selected or deselec-
ted quickly and easily using control words.
All primary functions, i.e. functions that move or control the motors, are designed as
individual FCBs that only have to be selected to perform a specific task, for example
positioning.
You can switch between different FCBs any time. Switching to another FCB is per-
formed with a maximum delay of 0.5 ms.
The FCBs are assigned to different priorities. If a FCB with a higher priority than the
currently active FCB is selected, the FCB with the higher priority is activated.
The FCBs are sorted in descending order of their priority in the following list:
• FCB 01 Output stage inhibit
• FCB 14 Emergency stop
• FCB 13 Stop at application limits
• FCB 18 Rotor position identification
• FCB 25 Motor parameter measurement
• FCB 12 Reference travel
• FCB 04 Manual mode
• FCB 20 Jog mode
• FCB 19 Position hold control
• FCB 21 Brake test
• FCB 10 Interpolated position control
• FCB 09 Position control
• FCB 06 Interpolated speed control
• FCB 05 Speed control
• FCB 08 Interpolated torque control
• FCB 07 Torque control
• FCB 26 Stop at user limits
• FCB 02 Default stop
23085711/EN – 03/2017

FCB concept
1.5.1 Description of the FCBs
FCB 01 Output stage inhibit

Activating FCB 01 stops the connected motor via the motor brake. If no brake is in-
stalled, the motor coasts to a stop.
FCB 02 Default stop

FCB 02 stops the drive with the preset profile value "Maximum deceleration". This
value is limited by the "Application limit – deceleration".
FCB 02 is active (default), when no other FCB is selected.
FCB 04 Manual mode

FCB 04 cannot be selected and activated directly using control words.
During startup using the MOVISUITE® engineering software the function block can be
selected and activated via the function "manual mode". The manual mode is used for
startup or setup mode without higher-level controller.
FCB 05 Speed control

The application inverter can be operated as speed-controlled axis.
The user can specify profile values for acceleration, deceleration, and jerk as the basic
conditions for speed control. The actual speed setpoint for the drive controller is gen-
erated in the controller cycle by a profile generator integrated in the inverter using the
specified limit values.
FCB 06 Interpolated speed control

FCB 06 is used for cyclic preselected speed setpoints of higher-level controllers.
In multi-axis applications, a controller often calculates a track profile for several drive
axes. The axis is only assigned setpoints (position/speed/torque and torque limits/pre-
control values/inertia) that it has to follow. The axis limits the setpoints using the ap-
plication limits. The course of the profile of the path curve is controlled by the control-
ler.
The setpoint cycle of the controller does usually not correspond to the setpoint cycle of
the axis (500 μs). If the axis were to "see" the same setpoint for several cycles, a step-
shaped actual value would result. To prevent this from happening, the axis can inter-
polate intermediate values. To do so, the setpoint cycle of the controller has to be
known.
FCB 07 Torque control

The application inverter can be run as a torque-controlled axis.
The user can specify profile values for speed, deceleration and jerk as the basic con-
ditions for torque control. The actual torque setpoint for the drive controller is gener-
ated in the controller cycle by a profile generator integrated in the inverter using the
23085711/EN – 03/2017
specified limit values.

During torque control the maximum speed is restricted by the speed limits so that the
drive cannot permanently accelerate with the preset setpoint torque while the counter-
torque is too low.
FCB 08 Interpolated torque control

FCB 08 is used for cyclic preselected torque setpoints of higher-level controllers.

Product description
FCB concept 1
This higher-level controller usually calculates a track profile for several drive axes. The 1
axis is then assigned to one setpoint (position, speed, torque, torque limits, precontrol
values, inertia) that it has to follow.
The inverter limits the setpoints using the application limits. The course of the path
curve profile is controlled by the controller.
The cycle in which the controller sends the setpoints to the axis does not usually cor-
respond with the setpoint processing cycle of the inverter. If the inverter were to "see"
the same controller setpoint for several cycles, a step-shaped actual torque value
would result.
To prevent this from happening, the axis can calculate intermediate values (interpol-
ate) if it knows the controller cycle. The application inverter can be set to different
cycle times of higher-level controllers.
FCB 09 Position control

FCB 09 is used to allow travel to the target position by using a position profile para-
meterized by the profile generator during positioning.
In addition, the application inverter has several positioning modes that are described
in the following section:
Absolute positioning:
The position setpoint in user units is interpreted as an absolute target and is converted
and executed in system units.
The travel range in system units is -231 – 231 -1 (2147483647). If the travel range is ex-
ceeded after calculation, the FCB issues a fault
Relative positioning:
The position setpoint in user units is interpreted as the offset for the last setpoint that
was transferred. After it has been converted into system units, it is added to the last
setpoint.
If the time calculated in system units is outside the travel range of -231 – 231 -1
(2147483647), the FCB issues a fault.
Modulo in positive direction with absolute position specification:
The position setpoint in user units is interpreted as the absolute position. It must be
within the modulo range of the active drive:
Lower limit = "Modulo min."
Upper limit = "Modulo max."
If the position setpoint is outside this range, a fault is issued. The drive always turns in
a positive direction to reach the position.
Modulo in negative direction with absolute position specification:
23085711/EN – 03/2017
If the position setpoint is outside this range, a fault is issued. The drive always turns in
a negative direction to reach the position.
Modulo with shortest distance with absolute position specification:

FCB concept

If the position setpoint is outside this range, a fault is issued.
The direction of the drive is determined using the last setpoint position (= current ac-
tual position after activation without an "In position" message) and the current setpoint
position. This value is used to determine the shortest possible route and, therefore,
the direction of rotation for positioning.
FCB 10 Interpolated position control

FCB 10 is used for cyclic preselected position setpoints of higher-level controllers.
In multi-axis applications, a higher-level controller usually calculates a track profile for
several drive axes. The axis is only assigned setpoints (position, speed, torque, torque
limits, precontrol values, inertia) that it has to follow. The axis limits the setpoints using
the application limits. The course of the profile of the path curve is controlled by the
controller.
The setpoint cycle of the controller does usually not correspond to the setpoint cycle of
the axis. If the axis were to "see" the same setpoint for several cycles, a step-shaped
actual value would result. To prevent this from happening, the axis can interpolate in-
termediate values. To do so, the setpoint cycle of the controller has to be known.
FCB 12 Reference travel

To perform positioning operations, a drive has to be referenced to a defined start or
reference position within the permitted travel distance.
From this reference position, positions such as the machine zero can be specified and
approached. With each restart of the inverter, referencing the position encoders is al-
ways necessary if position encoders do not have an absolute position detection. When
using absolute encoders, the absolute position is immediately known upon the start of
the system. An absolute encoder still has to be referenced to match the displayed pos-
ition with the plant's reference system. Several reference travel types are available for
referencing and for finding the reference point.
FCB 13 Stop at application limits

When FCB 13 is activated, the drive stops with speed control using the preset applica-
tion limit deceleration.
FCB 14 Emergency stop

When FCB 14 is activated, the drive stops with the preset emergency stop decelera-
tion.
FCB 18 Rotor position identification

For an optimum operation of synchronous AC motors, the exact position information of
the rotor is required for the control. The inverter can then create the maximum motor
torque with this position information.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
FCB 18 is required for the commutation detection of rotary and linear synchronous
motors with encoder.
The drive must be disconnected from the load, which means also from the gear unit. If
this is not possible, or only with considerable effort, FCB 25 "Motor parameter meas-
urement" has to be used. But FCB 25 does not determine a relative position. Only in
control mode ELSM® can be travelled according to FCB 25 alone.

Product description
FCB concept 1
In case of third-party synchronous motors , SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends to activ- 1
ate FCB 25 before running FCB 18.
FCB 19 Position hold control

When FCB 19 is activated, the drive stops with speed control. After the standstill of the
drive, the position is kept with position control as long as FCB 19 is active.
FCB 20 Jog mode

FCB 20 is used for setup mode when a higher-level controller is used.
FCB 20 allows the user to move an axis in positive and negative direction.
The control takes place via control signals that are specified with control words, via di-
gital inputs of a higher-level controller or via input terminals.
For startup or for setup mode without higher-level controller use the manual operation
of the MOVISUITE® engineering software, see "FCB 04" (→ 2 18).
FCB 21 Brake test

FCB 21 is used to check the braking capability of a brake connected to the motor. A
test torque is applied electrically via the motor when the brake is applied.
Even when the brake has passed the brake test, it does not take on any safety func-
tions as far as machine safety is concerned in combination with the application in-
verter.
The brake is only tested in accordance with the set brake test torque. The actual
breakaway torque of the brake is not measured.
There are 4 test modes:
• A higher-level controller provides the setpoints and monitoring function for the test.
• The application inverter performs a check in both directions compared to the set
limit torques.
• The application inverter performs a check in positive direction compared to the set
limit torques.
• The application inverter performs a check in negative direction compared to the set
limit torques.
The test torque, test time and the direction of rotation of the test can be set. If a test is
not passed, the breakaway torque is documented.
The braking torque is limited by the set "Torque" application limit.
Please note: The application torque must be considered for calculating the test torque,
e.g. hoist test "downward".
FCB 25 Motor parameter measurement

FCB 25 is used for determining the necessary motor values from the electric equival-
ent wiring diagram during startup.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
The nameplate data of the connected motor is required for the motor parameter meas-
urement.
After the motor parameter measurement has been completed, the motor is completely
started up electrically. Values that are not yet final at this stage, such as maximum
speed and maximum torque, are estimated. The values have to be corrected at a later
time to reach the full performance of the motor.

FCB concept
In case of synchronous motors, SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends to activate FCB 25

before running FCB 18.
FCB 26 Stop at user limits

FCB 26 is used for stops at user limits. The user limits are either available as local set-
points or initiate the deceleration ramp set via the fieldbus.
You can choose between a speed-controlled ramp and a position-controlled ramp. In
contrast to other stop FCBs (FCB 13/FCB 14), the FCB 26 has a very low priority.
This allows you to select FCB 26 as standard (e.g. bit in the control word that selects
this FCB is always TRUE). If all other FCBs are deactivated, FCB 26 always becomes
active. This makes it possible to always stop with position control.
FCB 26 has lag fault monitoring in position-controlled mode.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Product description
Control mode 1
1.6 Control mode 1
The following control modes are available for MOVIDRIVE® application inverters:
• V/f
• VFCPLUS
• CFC
• ELSM®
1.6.1 Description of the control modes

The characteristics of the motor connected to the application inverter are influenced by
the control modes used.
V/f
V/f control is intended for easy controlled operation of asynchronous motors without
encoder feedback. The procedure operates an asynchronous machine on a paramet-
erizable voltage/frequency characteristic. To keep the magnetizing current on a con-
stant level, the voltage (U) is adjusted in proportion to the frequency (f).
The actual slip is estimated and can be compensated. The voltage drop at the stator
resistance can be compensated by the I×R compensation and improves the control
behavior in case of load. The Boost parameter allows to increase the voltage over the
V/f characteristic for improving the torque at low speeds.
V/f control is suited for applications with a limited speed setting range, where no dy-
namic step changes in load occur and where there are small requirements regarding
the control characteristics.
V/f control is suited for group drives. A group drive is an electrical parallel connection
of several identical or different motors at one inverter. The motors do not have a rigid
mechanical connection.
Speed control
The V/f mode is an encoder-less mode and calculates the actual speed value. The
calculation is always based on the electrical values of the motors. Therefore, informa-
tion from a potentially existing encoder system is not used.
If an encoder is parameterized in the encoder assignment as "Actual speed source",
the speed measured by this encoder is issued as the actual speed by the inverter.
Otherwise, the model speed calculated by the V/f method based on stator frequency
and slip, is issued as the actual speed.
The V/f mode does not have a higher-level speed controller, speed controller paramet-
erization is therefore not possible. An acceleration and torque precontrol is also not
possible.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Control mode
VFCPLUS
VFCPLUS is a high-performance control mode that is able to operate asynchronous mo-
tors with very high torque dynamics with or without rotary encoder.
The control mode can be operated as speed or torque control.
This control mode calculates all important state variables for controlling the motor by
using a motor model. As a result, optimal magnetic conditions are always achieved for
the motor.
For applications with a large speed setting range (especially for low speeds up to
standstill) and high requirements regarding the control characteristics or for drives with
high dynamic step changes in load, a rotary encoder is absolutely necessary.
For applications with low requirements regarding the control characteristics and the
torque dynamics, an encoder is not necessary. Without a rotary encoder, the electric
rotor frequency is calculated in a model. In this case, stable stationary operation of the
mode at < 0.5 Hz is not possible.
To also achieve enough torque with low currents, it is possible to raise the stator flux
in the stator frequency < slip frequency range with the "Boost" parameter.
Due to the good torque dynamics, the VFCPLUS control mode remains stable in case of
load changes and has a high torque accuracy. Typical applications for the VFCPLUS
control mode are speed-controlled asynchronous machines with high demands on the
speed and torque stability.
Speed control
A higher-level speed control loop that has to be parameterized accordingly is always
used for speed control.
If the control mode is operated without an encoder, the actual speed of the motor is
calculated by the control mode.
If an encoder is used, the angle information of this encoder is used for the control
mode. The actual speed of the motor is calculated from this encoder. The maximum
dynamics of the control loop are reached with a high-resolution encoder.
Torque control
The torque control operating mode can be selected independently of an encoder and
does not need an encoder. With an encoder, however, stable stationary operation at
stator frequency 0 Hz is also possible.
Position control
Position-controlled operation is only possible with an encoder as the actual position is
calculated from the parameterized encoder. This encoder can either be mounted on
the track or on the motor.
The accuracy of the position control can be increased with a motor encoder.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Product description
Control mode 1
CFC 1
The CFC control mode is a current-controlled control mode. The CFC control mode al-
lows to operate asynchronous and synchronous servomotors with maximum torque
dynamics. For this purpose, the current components for the magnetic flux and for the
torque generation are controlled separately.
The control mode requires information about the rotor angle and the motor speed. For
this reason, an encoder feedback (motor encoder) is always necessary.
For asynchronous motors, only the relative rotor angle is necessary. Thus, an incre-
mental encoder is sufficient.
The control mode requires the absolute position for synchronous motors. In case of
encoder types that do not provide an absolute value, a commutation must be per-
formed before the release (FCB 18).
The advantage of the CFC control mode is the very high dynamic that can be
achieved, as a control reserve for reaching the dynamic maximum torque is always
available. For this reason, the CFC control mode is suited for drives with highly dy-
namic motion control.
ELSM®
The ELSM® control mode allows for operation of permanent-field synchronous servo-
motors without encoder.
The main characteristics are:
• Use of servomotors without encoder in horizontal materials handling technology.
• Maximum motor torque 150% M0 in the entire speed range.
• Flying start function for synchronization to the running motor.
• Output current of the inverter ≥ 150% I0 of the motor.
• No permanent operation below 2% of the nominal motor speed.
• Use in hoists and inclining tracks is not permitted.
• Multi-motor operation and group operation are not permitted.
Rotor adjustment/rotor position measurement

When the inverter is enabled in ELSM® control mode, the rotor position of the perman-
ent-field synchronous motors is unknown. For this reason, the rotor position has to be
determined first or the rotor has to be adjusted by turning so that its angular position is
defined.
Measuring the rotor position:
The rotor position of the synchronous motor is measured with test pulses for each en-
able. This occurs at standstill. If a brake is used, this brake remains applied. The
measurement is finished after a maximum of 50 ms. After the measurement is com-
pleted, the synchronous motor accelerates to the setpoint speed. A prerequisite for the
measurement is the one-time determination of the complete motor parameters with
the FCB 25 motor parameter measurement.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends measuring the rotor position.

Adjusting the rotor:
If the complete motor data is not known, the rotor is moved to a defined position at
each enable. A small motor movement depending on the motor pole number takes
place during the adjustment. If a brake is used, this brake is released. The adjustment
is completed after 1 s.

Control mode
Speed control
The speed control operating mode can be activated in the ELSM® control mode. The
control mode has to be distinguished speed-dependent in two different operating
ranges:
• Open-loop control
and
• speed-controlled operation.
Open-loop control takes place when starting from standstill and below a transition
speed. This transition speed is calculated and set depending on the inverter and motor
parameters during motor startup. It is about 2% of the nominal speed.
Above this minimum speed, the speed control without encoder works.
Torque control
The ELSM® control mode enables the "Torque control" operating mode; however, only
above the transition speed.
Practical meaning: The FCB 07 "Torque control" can only be activated when the flying
start function is active and above the transition speed (example: winding drive). If the
speed is too low, the system shuts down with a fault message.
Flying start function

If it cannot be ensured that the motor is at standstill during the start, the flying start
function has to be activated. This way, the ELSM® control mode can also be enabled
for a turning motor.
If the speed can be calculated plausibly, the control mode proceeds to speed-con-
trolled operation. If this is not the case, the drive proceeds to the "rotor adjustment" or
"rotor measurement" function and then to controlled operation.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Product description
Control mode 1
1.6.2 Characteristics of the control modes 1
Overview of the control modes
V/f VFCPLUS CFC ELSM®

Principle Voltage controlled Field-oriented, Field-oriented, cur- Field-oriented, cur-
according to charac- voltage-controlled, rent controller rent controller
teristic curve stator flux controller,
torque controller
Motor ASM/LSPM ASM ASM ASM SM SM
Encoder None None Yes Yes Yes None
Dynamics + +++ ++++ +++++ +++++ ++
Energy efficiency + +++ +++ ++ +++++ ++++
Speed control Yes1) Yes Yes Yes
Torque control No Yes Yes Yes
Positioning No No Yes Yes No
Flying start No2) Yes Yes Yes
Typical applica- Group drive, multi- General materials Packaging techno- Horizontal materials
tions motor drives handling technology, logy, handling tech- handling technology
horizontal drives, nology, highly-dy-
vertical drives, namic positioning
pumps/fans, winding
drives
Mark Maximum robust- Maximum precision Maximum dynamics Maximum energy ef-
ness ficiency
1) Open-loop speed control
2) DC braking
ASM Asynchronous motors

LSPM Motors with LSPM technology (Line Start Permanent Magnet)
SM Synchronous motors
Characteristic values for dynamics

Torque control time – Approx. 2 ms1) Approx. 150 µs Approx. 150 µs
Time constant speed con- – Approx. 3 – 6 ms Approx. 0.5 ms Approx. 6 ms
troller
Speed ripple Is mainly determined by the total mass moment of inertia, the torque ripple and
the mechanical structure. It is therefore not possible to specify a general value.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
1) Valid in voltage control range, in field weakening range < 5 ms.
Characteristic values for setpoint resolution

Torque - 32 bit 32 bit 32 bit
0.001% MNMot 0.001% MNMot 0.001% MNMot

Control mode

Speed 32 bit 32 bit 32 bit 32 bit
0.0001 1/min 0.0001 1/min 0.0001 1/min 0.0001 1/min
Position - 16 bit 16 bit -
(increment/revolution)
Position - 16 bit 16 bit -
(absolute increment)
Characteristic values for accuracy of torque and speed
VFCPLUS without en- VFCPLUS with en- CFC ELSM®

coder coder
Speed accuracy Depending on motor Is mainly determined Is mainly determined by the total mass mo-
parameters, typic- by the encoder res- ment of inertia, the torque ripple and the
ally: 0.2 × fNominal slip olution, approx. 1% mechanical structure. It is therefore not
of n possible to specify a general value.
Torque accuracy < 10% MN < 5 % MN -
for n > 0.2 × nN
Maximum output frequency
PWM V/f VFCPLUS CFC ELSM®

Optimum operation is possible up to an output frequency of:
2.5 kHz 250 Hz 250 Hz 250 Hz 250 Hz
4 kHz 400 Hz 250 Hz 400 Hz 400 Hz
≥ 8 kHz 599 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 500 Hz
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Product description
Control mode 1
FCBs that can be activated for selected control mode 1
FCB no. Designation V/f VFCPLUS CFC ELSM®
01 Output stage inhibit + + + +
02 Default stop + + + +
04 Manual mode + + + +
05 Speed control + + + +
06 Interpolated speed control + + + +
07 Torque control - + + +
08 Interpolated torque control - + + +
12 Reference travel + + + +
13 Stop at application limits + + + +
14 Emergency stop + + + +
26 Stop at user limits + + + +
FCBs requiring a position encoder
09 Position control - + + -
10 Interpolated position control - + + -
19 Position hold control - + + -
20 Jog - + + -
21 Brake test - + + -
18 Rotor position identification - - + +

22 Output stage test + + + +
25 Motor parameter measurement + + + +
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Energy saving functions
1.7 Energy saving functions
1.7.1 Energy-saving function partial magnetization

The energy-saving function partial magnetization reduces the rotor magnetization of
asynchronous motors depending of the required torque in the VFCPLUS control mode.
This allows to reduce the magnetization losses in the rotor in partial torque operation.
The energy-saving function partial magnetization is especially suitable for applications
with little dynamics, such as fans, pumps, escalators, and conveyor systems with con-
stant speed.
The energy-saving function partial magnetization can reduce magnetization losses in
the motor by up to 70%.
1.7.2 Energy-saving function standby operation

The energy-saving function standby operation is designed for pause times in which
the operation is paused. The bus communication is maintained over the entire time.
The significant difference between disconnection of the DC 24 V supply voltage and
standby operation is that switching from standby operation to operation only takes ap-
prox. 500 ms. This allows for reducing the energy consumption even in short pauses.
The following functions are deactivated in standby operation:
• 7-segment display.
• STO function.
• Digital output at the basic device and the option cards.
• Analog outputs at the option card.
• Power section controller.
• Fan of the power heat sink.
• Optional: Switch-off of the encoder supply and the encoder evaluation in the basic
device and the option card.
Standby operation can be activated via a digital input or via a control word bit.
The bus communication is active without restrictions in standby operation.
Energy consumption in standby operation
MOVIDRIVE® modular DC 24 V power consumption in standby opera-

tion
MDA90A-0020 – 0480 4.3 W
MDD90A-0020 – 0080 5.5 W
The energy-saving function "standby operation" can reduce the DC 24 V power con-
sumption by 89%.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Product description
MOVISUITE® engineering software 1
1.8 MOVISUITE® engineering software 1
MOVISUITE
®
engineering
software
MOVISUITE® is the new engineering software from SEW‑EURODRIVE and comprises

the following modules in the full stage of construction:
• MOVISUITE® standard
• MOVISUITE® professional
• MOVISUITE® enterprise
The engineering software excels by a new design of user interface and user guidance.
This new interface concept allows for the users to configure, parameterize and startup
their applications intuitively.
Using the various views, the users can switch to the suitable display mode depending
on their requirements. In the circle view for example, single components can be edited
in a clear structure.
Circle view
19272006795
The tree view provides an overview of the entire network.

Tree view
19272004875
23085711/EN – 03/2017
The view can be selected depending on application and personal preferences, the
functionality is identical in both views.
The interface concept of MOVISUITE® enables visualizing the system structure via
structure nodes that can be freely named. These structure nodes are displayed with a
varying level of detail in the views mentioned above.
The data management has clearly marked transfer directions, and thus is clearly
structured during data transmission.

MOVISUITE® engineering software
The scan function allows for reading connected devices, and for creating these
devices as projects in MOVISUITE®.
The drive train can be built from motor to gear unit using the product catalog. Further-
more, encoders, brakes, control modes, and user units can be selected and paramet-
erized.
A scope function is available for diagnostic purposes. This enables a diagnostics over-
view of connected devices and functions. Long-term data acquisition on the engineer-
ing PC hard disk is also possible.
In case of motors by SEW‑EURODRIVE, an electronic nameplate can be read-in for
simplified startup. MOVISUITE® suggests standard drive trains. Various drive func-
tions are summarized in function control blocks, the so-called FCBs.
Manual operation can also be intuitively used for each application via the new inter-
face.
Startup procedure The following steps illustrate an example of the startup procedure for an application in-
verter.
Drive trains Drive train Configuring drive trains.
Interfaces Built-in interfaces Basic settings of the installed interfaces

• EtherCAT®
• Standard I/O
• Encoder 1
Options Basic settings of the options
• Fieldbus
• I/O card
• Encoder 2
• DriveSafety®
Functions I/O configuration • Standard I/O

• I/O card DI/DO
• I/O card AI/AO
PO configuration • Basic settings
• PO data
• Setpoint buffer
• Fixed setpoints
• Control word 1 – 3
PI configuration • PI data
• Status word 1 – 3
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Drive functions • FCB 05 Speed control

• FCB 09 Positioning

Product description
MOVISUITE® engineering software 1
Advanced drive functions • FCB 01 Output stage inhibit 1
• FCB 20 Jog mode
• FCB 26 Stop at user limit
Event-driven functions • Touchprobe 1
• Touchprobe 2
• Cam switch
Monitoring • Reference signals
• Limit values 1
• Limit values 2
• Monitoring functions 1
• Energy-saving function
User units Converting system units into user units.
Information on the Device data is available via the project nodes.

application inverter
Device data • Device identification
• Main component
• Subcomponent
• Production label
Overview of fault responses • Axis module
• Power supply monitoring
• Functions
Setup • Parameter set selection
• Access rights
• Resetting device parameters.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

2 Technical data
Markings
2 Technical data
2.1 Markings
The MOVIDRIVE® modular application inverter complies with the following directives
and guidelines:
Mark Meaning
CE mark to state compliance with the following European guidelines:
• Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU
• EMC Directive 2014/30/EU
• Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
The MOVIDRIVE® modular unit series fulfills the requirements of the tech-
nical regulations of the Customs Union of Russia, Kazakhstan, and Be-
larus.
The EAC marking on the nameplate certifies the conformity with the safety
requirements of the Custom Union.
UL mark to confirm UL (Underwriters Laboratories) is in preparation.
Also valid for CSA together with the registration number.
RCM logo (Regulatory Compliance Mark).

Confirmation of compliance with technical regulations of the Australian
Communications and Media Authority ACMA is in preparation.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Technical data
General technical data 2
2.2 General technical data
2
The following tables list the technical data for all MOVIDRIVE® modular application in-
verters independent of
• Type
• Design
• Size
• Power
MOVIDRIVE® modular
Interference immunity Meets EN 61800-3; 2. Environment
Interference emission Limit value category C2 to EN 61800‑3
Ambient temperature ϑA 0 °C to +45 °C without derating
Type of cooling Increased air cooling due to installed, speed-controlled fan.
Environmental conditions
• Extended storage:
EN 60721-3-1 class 1K2 temperature -25 °C to +70 °C
• Transportation:
Climatic requirements
EN 60721-3-2 class 2K3 temperature -25 °C to +70 °C
• Operation (fixed installation, weatherproof):
EN 60721-3-3 class 3K3 temperature 0 °C to +45 °C
EN 60721-3-1 class 1C2
• Transportation:
Chemically active substances
EN 60721-3-2 class 2C2
EN 60721-3-3 class 3C2
EN 60721-3-3 class 1S1
• Transportation:
Mechanically active substances
EN 60721-3-3 class 2S1
EN 60721-3-3 class 3S1
• 3M5 according to EN 60721-3-3
Vibration testing
• 5M1 according to EN 60721-3-5
Degree of protection according to EN 60529

Power supply modules IP20
MDP90A-0100-... – MDP90A-0250-...
Axis modules IP20
MDA90A-0020-... – MDA90A-0480-...
MDD90A-0020-... – MDD90A-0080-...
Axis modules IP10, optional IP20
MDA90A-0640-... MDA90A-1800-...
Pollution class 2 according to IEC 60664-1

Overvoltage category III according to IEC 60664-1
Up to h ≤ 1000 m without restrictions.
The following restrictions apply to heights ≥ 1000 m:
• From 1000 m to max. 3800 m: IN reduction by 1% per 100 m
Installation altitude
• From 2000 m to max. 3800 m: To maintain protective separation and the air gaps and
creepage distances according to EN 61800‑5‑1, you have to connect an overvoltage pro-
tection device in order to reduce the overvoltages from category III to category II.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

2 Technical data
Technical data of MDP power supply modules
2.3 Technical data of MDP power supply modules
2.3.1 Performance data

MOVIDRIVE® modular Unit MDP90A-...-503-4-...
Type 0100 0100 0250 0500 0750 1100
Size 1 1A 2 3 4
Nominal power PN kW 10 10 25 50 75 110
Input
Nominal line voltage (to EN 50160) AC V 3 × 380 – 500 V
Vline
Nominal line current AC Iline A 16 16 40 82 120 175
Line frequency fline Hz 50 – 60 Hz ± 10%
Controlled rectifier No Yes
Plug connector M6 bolt M10 screw M10 screw
- 1 core: 0.25 – 4 mm2 max. 16 mm2 max. 70 mm2 max. 120
X1 connection contacts
- 2 cores: 0.25 – 2.5 mm2 mm2
(Twin-AEH)1)
Output (DC link)
Nominal DC link voltage VNDCL V DC 560
Nominal DC link current INDCL A 21 21 51 102 153 224
Max. DC link current DC IDCL max A 52 52 127 255 382 560
Additional capacitance µF – 1000 – – – –
Overload capacity 250% × PN: 1 s for cycle duration 10 s
CU bars
Cross section and contacts 3 × 20 mm2,
3 × 14 mm2, M6 screw fitting M8 screw fit-
ting
Brake chopper and braking resistor
Minimum braking resistance RBRmin Ω 26 10 4.7 3.6 2.3
Brake chopper power kW 250% × PN
Mean regenerative dissipatable power kW 25% × PN
Peff of the integrated braking resistance kW - 0.2 - - - -
Pmax of the integrated braking resistance kW - 25 - - - -
Plug connector M6 bolt M6 bolt M10 screw
- 1 core: 0.25 – 4 mm2 max. 10 mm2 max. 35 mm2 max. 70 mm2
Connection contacts X3
- 2 cores: 0.25 – 2.5 mm2
(Twin-AEH)1)
General
Nominal power loss 24 V W 15 15 15 20 20 30
Nominal power loss power section W 40 90 190 290 420
Permitted number of times power may min-1 <1
be switched on/off
Minimum switch-off time for power off s 10 10 10 10 10 10
Weight kg 4 7.9 5.2 13 13 21
Dimensions
Width mm 60 120 60 150 210
Height mm 324 424
Depth mm 250
1) AEH: Conductor end sleeve
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Technical data
Technical data of MDP power supply modules 2
2.3.2 Electronics data – signal terminals
MOVIDRIVE® modular Terminal General electronics data
2
DC 24 V voltage supply X5 DC 24 V -10%, +20% according to EN 61131
Cross section and contacts X5 CU bars 2 × 5 mm2, M4 screw fitting
X7.1 DC 24 V auxiliary voltage output to supply X7:2
X7.2 Sensor input for temperature monitoring of the braking resistor.
• Signal contact closes: No overtemperature.
Evaluation of temperature sensor at braking resistor
• Signal contact open: Overtemperature.
Connect isolated signal contacts only.
X7.3/4 Reserved
Plug connector
Connection contacts
- 1 core: 0.25 – 0.5 mm2
23085711/EN – 03/2017

2 Technical data
Technical data for MDA and MDD axis modules
2.4 Technical data for MDA and MDD axis modules
2.4.1 MDA performance data

MOVIDRIVE® modular Unit MDA90A-...-503-X-...
Type 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480 0640 1000 1400 1800
Size 1 2 3 5 6
Nominal output current IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48 64 100 140 180
PWM = 4 kHz
Input
Nominal DC link voltage VNDCL DC 560 V
Nominal DC link current INZK 1)
A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48 64 100 140 180
CU bars
Cross section and contacts 3 × 20 mm2,
3 × 14 mm2, M6 screw fitting M8 screw fit-
ting
Motor output
Output voltage VO V 0 – max. Vline
Motor power ASM PMot kW 0.6 1.5 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 45 75 90
Nominal output current IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48 64 100 140 180
PWM = 4 kHz
Max. output current at A 125% × IN: 1 s at PWM = 4 kHz
f = 0 Hz
Overload capacity 250%: 1 s with PWM 4 kHz 200%: 3 s with
PWM 4 kHz
Apparent output power SN2) kVA 1.4 2.8 5.5 8.5 11 17 22 33 44 69
PWM frequency fPWM kHz 4, 8, 16 (adjustable) 2.5, 4, 8 (ad-
justable)
V/f: 599 Hz
VFCPLUS: 250 Hz
Max. output frequency fmax
CFC: 500 Hz
ELSM®: 500 Hz
Plug connector Plug con- M6 M10 M10
- 1 core: 0.25 – 4 mm2 nector max. 16 mm2 max. 70 mm2 max. 120 mm2
- 2 cores: 0.25 – 2.5 mm2 - 1 core: or
X2 connection contacts (Twin-AEH)3) 0.5 – 16 mm2 2 × 25 mm2
- 2 cores:
0.25 – 6 mm2
(Twin-AEH)2)
Brake output
Nominal voltage brake VBR DC 24 V, the tolerance depends on the DC 24 V supply
(DB00)
Plug connector
X10 connection contacts - 1 core: 0.25 – 2.5 mm2
- 2 cores: 0.5 – 1 mm2 (Twin-AEH)2)
General
Nominal power loss 24 V W 20 22 25 30 75 115
Nominal power loss power sec- W 15 35 65 90 110 185 240 360 430 670 980 1250
tion
Weight kg 4 4.1 5.3 7.1 14 18
Dimensions
Width mm 60 90 150 210 300
Height mm 328 428
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Depth mm 265
1) The nominal DC link current is defined for cosφ = 0.82
2) In relation to PWM = 4 kHz

Technical data
Technical data for MDA and MDD axis modules 2
2.4.2 MDD performance data
MOVIDRIVE® modular Unit MDD90A-...-503-X-... MDD90A-...-503-X-...
With option card slot 2
Type 0020 0040 0020 0040 0080
Size 1 2
Nominal output current IN PWM = 4 kHz A 2×2 2×4 2×2 2×4 2×8
Input
Nominal DC link voltage VNDCL DC 560 V
Nominal DC link current INZK1) A 4 8 4 8 16
Cross section and contacts CU bars 3 × 14 mm , M6 screw fitting
2
Motor output
Output voltage VO V 0 – max. Vline
Motor power ASM PMot kW 2 × 0.55 2 × 1.5 2 × 0.55 2 × 1.5 2×4
Nominal output current IN PWM = 4 kHz A 2×2 2×4 2×2 2×4 2×8
Max. output current at f = 0 Hz A 125% × IN: 1 s at PWM = 4 kHz
Overload capacity 250%: 1 s at PWM = 4 kHz
Apparent output power SN2) kVA 2 × 1.4 2 × 2.8 2 × 1.4 2 × 2.8 2 × 5.5
PWM frequency fPWM kHz 4, 8 (adjustable)
V/f: 599 Hz
VFCPLUS: 250 Hz
Max. output frequency fmax
CFC: 500 Hz
ELSM®: 500 Hz
Plug connector
X2 connection contacts - 1 core: 0.25 – 4 mm2
- 2 cores: 0.25 – 2.5 mm2 (Twin-AEH)3)
Brake output
Nominal voltage brake VBR (DB00) DC 24 V, the tolerance depends on the DC 24 V supply
Plug connector
X10 connection contacts - 1 core: 0.25 – 2.5 mm2
- 2 cores: 0.5 – 1 mm2 (Twin-AEH)2)
General
Nominal power loss 24 V W 20 25
Nominal power loss power section W 2 × 15 2 × 35 2 × 15 2 × 35 2 × 65
Weight kg 4 4.85
Dimensions
Width mm 60 90
Height mm 328
Depth mm 265
1) The nominal DC link current is defined for cosφ = 0.82
2) In relation to PWM = 4 kHz
23085711/EN – 03/2017

2 Technical data
2.4.3 Electronics data – signal terminals

Terminal designation Specification
Single-axis Double-axis module
module
General
Design According to IEC 61131-2
Supply voltage
Connection X5 External power supply 24 V -10% +20% according to EN 61131
Connection contacts X5 CU bars 2 × 5 mm2, M4 screw fitting
Digital inputs
Cycle time I/O 1 ms
Quantity 6
Response time 100 μs plus cycle time
X20: 1 – 6 X20_1: 1 – 6 DI00: "Output stage enable" fixedly assigned.
X20_2: 1 – 6 DI01 – DI05: Selection option, see parameter menu.
All 6 inputs are suitable for touch probe function.
Latency period < 100 µs, max. 2 simultaneously.
DI04, DI05: Connection HTL low-resolution encoder (only MDA).
Assignment DI04: Primary frequency input (only MDA).
X20: 7 X20_1: 7 GND
X20_2: 7
X20: 8 X20_1: 8 24 V supply voltage
X20_2: 8 Maximum output current = 50 mA
Plug connector
- 1 core: 0.25 – 2.5 mm2
Connection contacts
- 2 cores: 0.5 – 1.5 mm2 (Twin-AEH)1)
Shield terminals for control cables available.
Digital outputs
Cycle time I/O 1 ms
• MDA: 1 × 4
Quantity
• MDD: 2 × 4
Output current Imax = 50 mA
Short-circuit protection Yes
X21: 1 – 4 X21_1: 1 – 4 DO00 – DO03: Selection option, see parameter menu.
X21_2: 1 – 4
Assignment
X21: 5 X21_1: 5 GND
X21_2: 5
Plug connector
- 1 core: 0.25 – 2.5 mm2
Connection contacts
- 2 cores: 0.5 – 1.5 mm2 (Twin-AEH)1)
Brake control
X10:DB0 X10_1:DB0 DB00:
X10_2:DB0 – Direct control DC 24 V BK brake: CMP40 63
– Direct control DC 24 V BP brake: CMP71
Assignment - Control brake switchgear
X10:GND X10_1:GND GND
X10_2:GND
Plug connector
- One core: 0.25 – 2.5 mm2
Connection contacts
- Two cores: 0.5 – 1 mm2 (Twin-AEH)1)
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Encoder input
X15:13 X15:13_1 X15:13 DC 24 V, Imax = 500 mA
X15:13_2
X15:15 X15:15_1 X15:15 DC 12 V, Imax = 500 mA
X15:15_2

Technical data
Technical data for MDA and MDD axis modules 2
INFORMATION
Freewheeling diode application 2
If inductive loads are connected to the digital outputs, you must install an external
protective element (freewheeling diode).
23085711/EN – 03/2017

2 Technical data
2.4.4 Electronics data – safety functions

The table below shows the technical data of the application inverter relating to the in-
tegrated safety technology.
The safety-related digital inputs comply with type 3 according to IEC 61131‑2.
Reference potential for the STO_P1 and STO_P2 is STO_M (contact at terminal X6:2)
Terminal desig- General electronics data
nation
Safety contact STO X6
Electrical data inputs STO_P1, STO_P2 Minimum Typical Maximum
Input voltage range X6:1 and X6:3 DC -3 V DC 24 V DC 30 V
Input capacitance 1 nF 10 nF
Power consumption at DC 24 V 200 mW 300 mW
Input voltage for ON status (STO) DC 11 V DC 30 V
Input voltage for OFF status (STO) DC -3 V DC 5 V
Permitted leakage current of the external safety con- 1 mA
troller
Technical data
Time from disconnecting the safety voltage until the 1.5 ms 10 ms
deactivation of the rotating field
Time from connecting the safety voltage until the ac- 110 ms
tivation of the rotating field
Plug connector
Connection contacts - 1 core: 0.25 – 1.5 mm2
- 2 cores: 0.25 – 0.5 mm2 (Twin-AEH)1)
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Technical data
Dimension sheets of the modules 2
2.5 Dimension sheets of the modules
2
2.5.1 Dimension sheets of the power supply modules
MDP90A-0100-..
(size 1)
60
29
34
383
324
445
250
15958547723
23085711/EN – 03/2017

2 Technical data
Dimension sheets of the modules
MDP90A-0100-..-
C00 (size 1A) 120
29
34
383
324
446
250
15958550155
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Technical data
MDP90A-0250-..
(size 2)
60 2
29
34
483
424
555
250
9007215213293579
23085711/EN – 03/2017

2 Technical data
MDP90A-0500 –
0750-.. (size 3) 150
30
34
483
424
590
250
18062454283
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Technical data
MDP90A-1100-..
(size 4) 210
2
30
34
483
424
630
286
19044413451
23085711/EN – 03/2017

2 Technical data
2.5.2 Dimension sheets of the axis modules

MDA90A-0020 –
0120-.. (size 1)
60
29
30
383
328
445
265
15958074763
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Technical data
MDA90A-0160 –
0240-.. (size 2)
90 2
29
30
383
328
445
265
15958077195
23085711/EN – 03/2017

2 Technical data
MDA90A- 0320 –
0480-.. (size 3)
90
29
90
30
483
428
555
265
9007215213281419
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Technical data
MDA90A-0640 –
1000.. (size 5)
150 2
30
30
483
430
582
265
18062451851
23085711/EN – 03/2017

2 Technical data
MDA90A-1400 –
1800-.. (size 6) 210
28
30
483
428
630
298
19044415883
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Technical data
MDD90A-0020 –
0040-.. (size 1)
60 2
29
30
383
328
445
265
15958542859
23085711/EN – 03/2017

2 Technical data
MDD90A-0020 –
0080-.. (size 2)
90
29
30
383
328
445
265
15958545291
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Technical data
Technical data of the option cards 2
2.6 Technical data of the option cards
2
2.6.1 CIO21A and CID21A input/output cards
The CIO21A input/output card provides digital/analog inputs and outputs; the CID21A
cards provide digital inputs and outputs.
Terminal designation/ Specification
specification
CIO21A CID21A
Part number 28229495 28229487
General
Design According to IEC 61131‑2 (type 3 for digital inputs)
Cycle time 1 ms
Power consumption 1.2 W 0.4 W Base load plus total load at outputs.
Plug connector
Connection contacts - 1 core: 0.25 – 0.5 mm2
Digital inputs
Quantity 4
X52: 1 – 4 DI10 – DI13: Selection option, see parameter menu.
Assignment
X52: 5 GND
Digital outputs
Quantity 4
Output current I ≤ 50 mA
Capacitive load ≤ 300 nF
Inductive load Not permitted
Protection device Short-circuit-proof, protected against external voltage DC 0 – 30 V
X52: 6 – 9 DO10 – DO13: Selection option, see parameter menu.
Assignment
X52: 10 GND
Analog inputs
Quantity 2
Type Differential
Switchable to current input
0 to +10 V, -10 V to +10 V
Output value
0(4) – 20 mA
X50:2
Analog input AI21/AI22
X50:3
X50:4
Assignment GND
X50:7
X50:5
Analog input AI31/AI32
X50:6
Voltage input
Resolution 0 to +10 V (11 Bits), -10 V to +10 V (12 Bits)
Tolerance ± 0.5%
Overvoltage immunity DC -20 V to DC +20 V
Input resistance ≥ 10 kΩ
Current input
Resolution 0(4) – 20 mA (11 Bit)
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Tolerance ±2%
Load impedance (internal) 250 Ω
Overvoltage immunity DC -10 V to DC +10 V
Analog outputs
Quantity 2

2 Technical data
Technical data of the option cards
Terminal designation/ Specification

specification
CIO21A CID21A
X51:1
Analog voltage output AOV2/AOV3
X51:4
Assignment X51:2
Analog current output AOC2/AOC3
X51:5
X51: 3, 6 GND
Voltage output
Tolerance ±5%
Inductive load < 500 μH
Load resistance ≥ 1 kΩ
Resolution 12 bit
Reset state 0V
Output value -10 V to +10 V, ≤ 10 mA
Current output
Tolerance ±3%
Inductive load None
Load resistance ≤ 500 Ω
Resolution 11 bit
Reset state 0 mA
Measuring range 0(4) – 20 mA
Reference voltage output
Output voltage DC -10 V, DC +10 V
Tolerance ±0.5%
Noise ≤ 10 mA
Output current ≤ 3 mA
X50: 1 REF1 (DC +10 V)
Assignment
X50: 8 REF2 (DC -10 V)
INFORMATION
Freewheeling diode application
If inductive loads are connected to the digital outputs, you must install an external
protective element (freewheeling diode).
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Technical data
Technical data of the option cards 2
Voltage supply 2
The multi-encoder card is supplied by the basic device.
Technical data of encoder supply

Part number 28229479
Power consumption
Nominal power loss 24 V (option card) 0.8 W
Maximum power consumption 24 V (option card in- 12.8 W
cluding encoder supply)
Encoder supply
12 V X17:15 DC 12 V ± 10%
24 V X17:13 DC 24 V -10%, +20% according to EN 61131
Nominal output current 12 V or 24 V 500 mA
Peak output current Imax for 150 μs 1000 mA
Capacitive load < 220 μF
Short-circuit protection of 12 V supply Yes, but a permanent short circuit is not permitted.
Evaluable temperature sensor TF / TH / KTY84-130 / PT1000
Encoder connection
Encoder connection Specification
Connection on encoder card end 15-pin socket
Maximum encoder cable length - HTL encoder ES7C and EG7C: 300 m
- Standard HTL encoder: 200 m
- Other encoders: 100 m
23085711/EN – 03/2017

2 Technical data
Technical data of encoder interfaces
2.7 Technical data of encoder interfaces
2.7.1 Basic device

Supported encoders
Resolver
Encoder interface X15:1 – 15 SIN/COS
TTL/HTL
HIPERFACE®
Connection contacts 15-pin socket
Encoder supply
Nominal output voltage VS24VG DC 24 V -10%, +20% according to EN 61131
Nominal output voltage VS12VG DC 12 V ± 10%
Imax 500 mA
Ipeak for 150 μs 1000 mA

Supported encoders
SIN/COS
TTL/HTL
Encoder interface X17:1 – 15 HIPERFACE®
EnDat2.1
SSI
CANopen
Connection contacts 15-pin socket
Encoder supply
Nominal output voltage VS24VG DC 24 V -10%, +20% according to EN 61131
Nominal output voltage VS12VG DC 12 V ± 10%
Imax 500 mA
Ipeak for 150 μs 1000 mA
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Technical data
Technical data of braking resistors, filters and chokes 2
2.8 Technical data of braking resistors, filters and chokes
2
2.8.1 Braking resistors type BW.../BW...-T
General
The BW... / BW...-T braking resistors are adapted to the technical characteristics of
the application inverter.
There are braking resistors with different continuous and peak braking power avail-
able.
The braking resistors can be protected against overload and overtemperature by the
customer by using a thermal overload relay. The tripping current is set to the value IF,
see the following tables (→ 2 60).
The braking resistors of the series BW...-T are equipped with an integrated temperat-
ure switch that monitors the temperature. If the nominal operating temperature is ex-
ceeded, the temperature switch triggers a signal contact. The temperature switch does
not switch off the braking resistor. This is why the temperature switch must be evalu-
ated to avoid thermal overload of the braking resistor.
Another possibility to protect the braking resistor is the TCB thermal circuit breaker.
The TCB thermal circuit breaker protects the braking resistor against continuous over-
load and power peaks over short periods.
INFORMATION
Use of protection devices
Only use the protection devices listed in the following section:
• TCB thermal circuit breaker
• Internal temperature switch -T
• External bimetallic relay
→ See also chapter "Protection against thermal overload of the braking
resistor" (→ 2 236).
UL and cUL approval

The listed braking resistors have cRUus approvals independent of the application in-
verter.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

2 Technical data
Technical data of braking resistors, filters and chokes
Technical data and assignment to an inverter

Technical data
Braking resistor Unit BW047-002 BW047-010-T BW027-016-T BW027-024-T
Part number 08281661 17983207 17983215 17983231
Nominal power PN kW 0.2 1 1.6 2.4
Resistance value RBW Ω 47 ± 10% 47 ± 10% 27 ± 10%
Tripping current IF A 1.6 4.6 7.7 9.4
Design Flat design Wire resistor
Power connections - 0.75 – 10 mm2
Tightening torque Nm - 1.5 – 1.8
PE connection - M6 stud
Tightening torque PE Nm - 1.8
Degree of protection IP65 IP20
Ambient temperature ϑA -20 °C – +40 °C
Weight kg 0.6 4 5.8 8
Assignment to an inverter
Braking resistor Unit BW047-002 BW047-010-T BW027-016-T BW027-024-T
Assignment to MDP90A. 0100 – 1100
Technical data
Braking resistor Unit BW012-016 BW012-024 BW012-050-T
Part number 18213243 17983894 18201407
Nominal power PN kW 1.6 2.4 5
Resistance value RBW Ω 12 ± 10%
Tripping current IF A 11.5 14.1 20.4
Design Wire resistor Grid resistor
Power connections 0.75 – 10 mm2 M8 stud
Tightening torque Nm 1.5 – 1.8 6
PE connection M6 stud M6 stud
Tightening torque PE Nm 1.8 Nm 3
Degree of protection IP20
Weight kg 5.8 8 12
Braking resistor Unit BW012-016 BW012-024 BW012-050-T
Assignment to MDP90A. 0250 – 1100
Technical data
Braking resistor Unit BW106-T BW206-T BW005-070 BW004-050-01 BW002-070 BW003-420-T
Part number 18200834 18204120 17983282 18200133 17983304 13302345
Nominal power PN kW 13.5 18 7 5 7 42
Resistance value RBW Ω 6 ± 10% 4.7 ± 10% 3.6 ± 10% 2.3 ± 10% 2.5 ± 10%
Tripping current IF A 47.4 54.7 38.6 37.3 55.2 135.1
Design Grid resistor
Power connections M8 stud M8 stud M12 stud
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Tightening torque Nm 6 6 15.5

PE connection M6 stud M6 stud M10 stud
Tightening torque PE Nm 3 3 10
Degree of protection IP20
Weight kg 30 40 13 12 33 93

Technical data
Braking resistor Unit BW106-T BW206-T BW005-070 BW004-050-01 BW003-420-T BW002-070
2
Assignment to MDP90A. 0500 – 1100 0750 – 1100 1100
Technical data BW..-T signal contact

Specifications for BW..-T signal contact Design
Connection contacts 0.75 – 2.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.6 Nm
Switching capacity DC 2 A / DC 24 V (DC11)
AC 2 A / AC 230 V (AC11)
Switch contact (NC contact) According to EN 61800-5-1
23085711/EN – 03/2017

2 Technical data
Dimension drawings and dimensions
Wire resistor
M../PG..
[1]
C
d
b x a M../PG..
B A
18874863883
[1] Cable entry is possible from both sides.
Braking resistor Main dimensions in mm Mounting dimensions in mm Cable gland

A B C a b d x
BW47-010-T 749 92 125 630 80 6.5 8 M25+M12
BW027-016-T 649 185 125 530 150 6.5 8 M25+M12
BW027-024-T 649 275 125 530 240 6.5 8 M25+M12
BW012-016 649 185 120 530 150 6.5 8 M25
BW012-024 649 275 125 530 240 6.5 9 M25
Grid resistor
C
d a
b A
B
18874868747
A B C a b d x
BW012-050-T 395 490 260 370 380 10.5 - -
BW106-T 795 490 270 770 380 10.5 - -
BW206-T 995 490 270 970 380 10.5 - -
BW005-070 395 490 260 370 380 10.5 - -
BW004-050-01 395 490 260 370 380 10.5 - -
BW002-070 395 490 260 370 380 10.5 - -
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Technical data
Grid resistor
2
C
d a
b
A
B
18874876043
A B C a b d x
BW003-420-T 995 490 710 970 380 10.5 - -
Flat type resistor

C
12
M4
b
B
a
A
18874878475
A B C a b d x
BW047-002 110 80 15 98 60 - - -
23085711/EN – 03/2017

2 Technical data
2.8.2 TCB thermal circuit breaker option
General
The TCB thermal circuit breaker protects the braking resistor from constant overload
and protects it in case of a short circuit in the cable or the braking resistor.
In the event of a fault, the thermal circuit breaker disconnects the braking resistor and
signals this fault via isolated NO and NC contacts.
After fault elimination, the thermal circuit breaker can be reset manually. For this pur-
pose, there is a lever at the front, similar to the design of a miniature circuit breaker.
The setting range of the thermal circuit breaker has to be selected in such a way that it
corresponds to the tripping current IF of the braking resistor.
The switch reacts to the following events:
• Thermal overload.
• Short circuit.
• Exceeded nominal current.
In the event of a fault, the thermal circuit breaker switches off the braking resistor. The
present fault is signaled via isolated NO and NC contacts.
After fault elimination, the thermal circuit breaker can be reconnected like a normal
miniature circuit breaker.
Technical data
Circuit breaker type Unit TCB0040 TCB0063 TCB0100
Part number 19170424 19170432 19170440
Setting range A 2.5 – 4 4 – 6.3 6.3 – 10
Connection cross section main contact mm2 1.5 – 16
Tightening torque Nm 2.5
Signal contact connection cross section mm2 0.5 – 1.5
Mechanical service life 20000 switching cycles
Circuit breaker type Unit TCB0160 TCB0200 TCB0250 TCB0320 TCB0400

Part number 19170459 19148658 19170467 19170475 19170483
Setting range A 10 – 16 16 – 20 20 – 25 25 – 32 32 – 40
Connection cross section main contact mm2 2.5 – 16 4 – 16 6 – 16 10 – 16
Signal contact connection cross section mm2 0.5 – 1.5
Mechanical service life 20000 switching cycles
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Technical data
Dimension drawing
2
17195255435
23085711/EN – 03/2017

2 Technical data
2.8.3 Line filter

Line filters are used to suppress interference emission on the line side of inverters.
UL and cUL approval

The listed line filters have cRUus approvals independent of the application inverter.
Technical data
Line filter NF0420-513 NF0420-523
Part number 17983789 17983797
Nominal line voltage VN Maximum 3 × AC 500 V, 50/60 Hz
Nominal current IN 42 A
Nominal power loss 30 W 37 W
Ambient temperature ϑA 0 °C – 45 °C
Terminal contacts L1/L2/L3 - L1'/L2'/L3' 2.5 – 16 mm2
Tightening torque L1/L2/L3 - L1'/L2'/L3' 2 - 4 Nm 2 - 2.3 Nm
PE terminal contact M6
Tightening torque PE 6 Nm
Degree of protection IP20 according to EN 60529
Weight 3 kg 4.5 kg
Assignment to MDP90A- 0100, 0250

E
C
d
b
B
PE a
A
9007218145873675
Line filter Main dimensions in mm Mounting dimensions in mm
A B C E a b d PE
23085711/EN – 03/2017
NF0420-513 250 88 97 255 235 60 5.5 M6

NF0420-523 330 83 187 340 314 55 6.5 M6

Technical data
2.8.4 Line choke
Using line chokes is optional: 2
• To support overvoltage protection.
• To smoothen the line current, to reduce harmonics.
• For protection in the event of distorted line voltage.
• For limiting the inrush current.
UL and cUL approval

The listed line chokes have cRUus approvals independent of the application inverter.
Technical data
Line choke ND0300-503 ND0420-503
Part number 17983800 17983819
Nominal line voltage VN Maximum 3 × AC 230 V - 500 V, 50/60 Hz
Nominal current IN 30 A 42 A
Nominal inductance 0.1 mH 0.045 mH
Terminal contacts L1/L2/L3 - L1'/L2'/L3' 0.2 – 10 mm2 2.5 – 16 mm2
Tightening torque L1/L2/L3 - L1'/L2'/L3' 1.2 – 2 Nm 2.5 Nm
Degree of protection IPXXB to EN 60529
Weight 1.95 kg 1.82 kg
Assignment to MDP90A- 0100 0250

E
C
a d b
A B
18891130251
Line choke Main dimensions in mm Mounting dimensions in mm
23085711/EN – 03/2017
A B C E a b d PE
ND0300-503 121 86 145 86 105 70 4.8 M5
ND0420-503 121 86 150 90 105 70 4.8 M5

3 Configuration
SEW Workbench
3 Configuration
3.1 SEW Workbench

The SEW Workbench is the central configuration software for inverters by
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
All necessary configurations can be processed, from entering the application to gear
unit, motor and inverter calculations. Other features are optimization of the various
axis cycles including the selection of accessories and a fault check of the entire drive
system configuration.
Of course, the workbench can also be used to select and dimension all other products
from SEW‑EURODRIVE (such as decentralized drives and gearmotors). This means
the SEW Workbench allows for specifying drive solutions from the entire range of
products from SEW‑EURODRIVE. The straightforward operation saves a lot of time
and minimizes complexity.
The key features of the SEW Workbench are:
• Application selection.
• Calculation of gear unit and motor.
• Price-optimized project planning.
• Comparison of different solutions.
• Inverter calculation.
• Multi-axis optimization.
• Parameterization of cable and accessories selection.
• Dimensioning faults check.
• Parts list generation.
• Electronic catalog with all products.
The SEW Workbench is made available to customers by the responsible
SEW‑EURODRIVE sales representative.
To use SEW Workbench, all you need to do is to register via the Online Support once
you have received the data DVD. An Internet update service ensures that products
and functions are always up-to-date.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
Schematic workflow for project planning 3
3.2 Schematic workflow for project planning
The following flow diagram illustrates the drive selection procedure for a positioning
drive. The drive consists of a gearmotor that is controlled by an application inverter. 3
Necessary information regarding the machine to be driven
• Technical data and ambient conditions.
• Positioning accuracy.
• Speed setting range.
• Travel cycle calculation.
↓
Calculation of the relevant application data
• Travel diagram.
• Speeds.
• Static, dynamic torques.
• Regenerative power.
↓
Gear unit selection
• Determining gear unit design, gear unit size, gear unit ratio.
• Checking the positioning accuracy.
• Checking the gear unit load.
• Checking the input speed.
↓
Motor selection
• Maximum torque.
• With dynamic drives: effective torque at medium speed.
• Maximum speed.
• Observe dynamic and thermal torque curves.
• Motor equipment (brake, plug connector, thermal motor protection, etc.).
↓
Axis module selection (perform procedure for every axis module)
• Determining the control mode.
• Motor/inverter assignment.
• Checking if the axis modules fulfill the duration and overload requirements.
↓
Power supply module selection
• Checking if the power supply module fulfills the duration and overload requirements.
• Checking the regenerative continuous power.
• Checking the power supply module - axis module combination.
↓
Braking resistor selection
• Checking if the braking resistor fulfills the duration and overload requirements.
• Checking the power supply module - braking resistor combination.
↓
Selection of other system components
• Option cards.
• Motor and power supply cables.
• Signal and encoder cables.
• EMC measures.
↓
24 V voltage supply selection
• Determining the current demand of the 24 V voltage supply.
• Observing the requirements for the voltage tolerance.
• Checking if a one- or two-sided supply is necessary.
↓
Arrangement of the modules within the axis system
23085711/EN – 03/2017
• IMDA1 ≥ IMDA2 ≥ IMDA3 ≥ IMDA4 ≥ ..... ≥ IMDA15

↓
Make sure that all requirements have been met.

3 Configuration
Drive selection
3.3 Drive selection

For drive selection, in addition to the travel diagram that describes the exact travel
cycle, a large number of additional specifications must be made about the operating
and ambient conditions.
It is first necessary to have data for the machine to be driven such as mass, setting
range, speed, information about the mechanical design and so on in order to select
the drive correctly. The appropriate drive can be determined with the calculated
torques and speeds of the drive while taking other mechanical requirements such as
environmental and operating conditions into account.
For selecting the drive, a decision is to be taken if an asynchronous motor or a syn-
chronous motor is to be used. The extensive product range of SEW‑EURODRIVE is
available for this purpose.
3.3.1 General requirements for motors

SEW‑EURODRIVE's AC motors are suitable for use with an inverter due to the high-
quality windings. For operation of third-party motors at SEW‑EURODRIVE's applica-
tion inverters, their suitability has to be checked.
Motors that can be connected

• Asynchronous motors with squirrel-cage rotor.
• Permanent-field synchronous motors.
When third-party motors are operated with MOVIDRIVE® modular/system,
SEW‑EURODRIVE cannot ensure that the specified performance data is reached.
Dielectric strength of the motor

The operation of an AC motor with a frequency inverter places a much greater load on
the motor winding than in the case of operation on the supply system. All AC motors
by SEW‑EURODRIVE have the required voltage endurance.
At a line voltage of AC 3 x 400 V, the nominal DC link voltage is DC 560 V. In regener-
ative operation, the DC link voltage can rise to 970 V.
Requirements on third-party motors

The connected third-party motor has to be designed for these DC link voltages.
The inverters pulse the DC voltage of the DC link UDC to the supply cables to the mo-
tor. At SEW‑EURODRIVE, the pulsed voltage supply is available with 2.5 kHz, 4 kHz,
8 kHz or 16 kHz. As a result, the motor is loaded with voltage peaks, high amplitude
and very short rise times.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
Drive selection 3
Thermal motor protection
Thermal motor protection prevents the motor from overheating and consequently from
being damaged. For this purpose, temperature sensors detect the winding temperat-
ure. As standard, the MOVIDRIVE® modular/system frequency inverters can evaluate 3
the following temperature sensors:
• PTC (SEW-EURODRIVE designation: TF)
• Bimetallic switch (SEW-EURODRIVE designation: TH)
• KTY84 - 130 (SEW-EURODRIVE designation: KY/KTY)
• PT1000 (SEW-EURODRIVE designation: PK)
23085711/EN – 03/2017

3 Configuration
Drive selection
3.3.2 Group drive and multi-motor drive
Group drive of asynchronous motors

A group drive is a group of asynchronous motors of any power rating. The motors do
not have a rigid mechanical connection or only a connection that is subject to slip and
are connected to an inverter electrically parallel.
After a suitable startup, operation in V/f control mode is possible.
If motors with different power ratings are operated at the inverter in parallel, the motor
with the largest power rating has to be set up.
• The total of the motor currents must not exceed the nominal output current of the
inverter.
• Note the permitted length of all motor leads connected in parallel:
ltot = lmax/n
ltot = Total length of the motor leads connected in parallel
lmax = Permitted motor lead length
n = Number of motors connected in parallel
Multi-motor drive of asynchronous motors

Multi-motor drive means the electrical parallel connection of several identical asyn-
chronous motors at 1 inverter, that are rigidly and mechanically coupled and drive a
load.
Parallel operation of several identical asynchronous motors is possible provided the
strict compliance with the following conditions.
• Only use gearmotors of the same type and with the same winding data.
• The rotor position of the individual motors must not differ in more than the following
mechanical angle:
Zp × Δφmech_max < 20°
Zp = Number of motor pole pairs
Δφmech_max = maximum used angle of the shaft connection in regard of the motor
shaft
This must be ensured by the mechanics even for maximally different torque loads
of the motor shafts. The motor has to be equipped with an encoder for the encoder
feedback.
• Note the permitted length of all motor leads connected in parallel:
ltot = lmax/n
ltot = Total length of the motor leads connected in parallel
lmax = Permitted motor lead length
n = Number of motors connected in parallel
• Make sure the speed sensor is installed on the gearmotor which has the greatest
clearance or elasticity with respect to the load inertia.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
3.3.3 Connecting explosion-proof AC motors

Observe the following instructions when connecting explosion-proof AC motors to ap-
plication inverter:
• The inverter must be installed outside of the potentially explosive atmosphere.

Configuration
Drive selection 3
• Observe industry and country-specific regulations.
• Observe the regulations and information of the motor manufacturer with regard to
operation on a frequency inverter, e.g. mandatory sine filter.
3
• All operating resources used in potentially explosive atmospheres must adhere to
the relevant standards, such as Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX 100a) or IEC 60079.
• The sensor input of the motor's temperature monitoring must not be used in poten-
tially-explosive areas. For thermal monitoring use a monitoring device approved for
potentially explosive atmospheres.
• In case of motors with speed feedback the speed sensor must also be approved
for potentially explosive atmospheres. The speed sensor can be directly connected
to the inverter.
INFORMATION
For more information on the operation of explosion-proof AC motors, refer to the "Ex-
plosion-Proof AC Motors, Asynchronous Servomotors" operating instructions. You
can order the operating instructions from SEW‑EURODRIVE.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

3 Configuration
Drive selection
3.3.4 General requirements for encoders
Valid motor encoders from SEW‑EURODRIVE

The following overview shows the motor encoders that are valid for use with
MOVIDRIVE® modular. For information on the respective encoder cables, refer to
chapter "Prefabricated cables" (→ 2 132).
A.7Y
MDA MDD
E.7S, E.7R, E.7C
A.7W
X31
X31
X20_1
X20_2
X20
X17
X21_1
X21_2
X21
RH.M S1 S1
S2 S2
RH.L RUN ERR RUN ERR
X15_1
X15_2
X15 X15
X15
24V
X5
GND
+ UZ
+UZ
+UZ +UZ
X4 X4
- UZ
-UZ
-UZ -UZ
AK0H, EK0H
AK1H, EK1H
AS1H, ES1H
AV1H
15545345675
3.3.5 General requirements for the brake control

Refer to the motor catalogs for extensive information and technical data regarding the
brakes.
Brake control
Brakes and brake control units may only be controlled via the digital input X10:1 DB00
at the axis module. It is not permitted to control them via other electronic devices or
via controllers.
Three-wire brake with accelerator coil (BE, BM, BMG)

The three-wire brake with accelerator coil can be used for DR.., CMPZ, and CFM
brakemotors. With this brake type, the brakes are controlled using brake control units.
24 V holding brake (BP, BK)

The 24 V holding brake can be used for CMP motors.
In every application, a holding brake can be controlled via a customer relay with varis-
tor overvoltage protection or via the BMV brake control unit from SEW‑EURODRIVE.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Direct brake control (BP, BK)

If the system complies with the following specifications for direct brake control, a BK or
BP brake (holding brake) can also be controlled directly via the brake output of an ap-
plication inverter.

Configuration
Drive selection 3
Specifications for direct brake control:
• Only the BK brakes of the CMP40 – 63 motor and the BP brake of the CMP71 mo-
tor are permitted.
3
• Expressly excluded are brakes of the motor types CMP80 and greater, CMPZ mo-
tors, and all non-SEW brakes.
• Only prefabricated brakemotor cables from SEW‑EURODRIVE must be used.
• The brakemotor cable must be shorter than 25 m.
• The shielding of the brake cable must be connected to the shielding plate.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

3 Configuration
Recommendations for motor and inverter selection
3.4 Recommendations for motor and inverter selection

The basis for motor selection are the limit characteristic curves of the motors in in-
verter operation. The limit characteristic curve states the torque characteristic of the
motor depending on the speed.
The dynamic and thermal limits must be observed when selecting the motor.
3.4.1 Thermal limit characteristic curve

The mean motor speed and the effective torque are calculated during drive selection
to determine the thermal utilization of the motor. The operating point of the motor must
lie below the thermal limit characteristic curve of the motor; otherwise the motor will be
thermally overloaded.
3.4.2 Dynamic limit characteristic curve

The dynamic limit characteristic curve depicts the maximum torque the motor can gen-
erate at a certain speed. Note that the inverter must supply sufficient current for the
motor to reach its maximum torque.
The base speed is especially important for project planning. The base speed is the
available speed up to the maximum motor torque. In inverter operation, field weaken-
ing begins at the rated speed. The motor torque is limited by the voltage limit charac-
teristic curve in the field-weakening range, and decreases with increasing speed.
MN is determined by the motor. Mmax and nbase depend on the motor/inverter combina-
tion. For the values for Mmax and nbase in control modes VFCPLUS, CFC, ELSM®, refer to
the motor selection tables in chapter "Motor/inverter assignment" (→ 2 80).
Typical characteristic curve of asynchronous motors
M
3
Mmax
2
MN
0
0 nbase 1.4×nbase n
1476913547
[1] S1 operation with self-cooling

[2] S1 operation with external cooling
[3] Mechanical limit for gearmotors
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
Recommendations for motor and inverter selection 3
Typical characteristic curve of synchronous motors
500 %
3
400 %
[2]
300 %
M / Mn
200 %
100 % [1]
0%
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500
-1
min
9007217201768843
[1] Thermal limit characteristic curve S1 operation

[2] Dynamic limit torque
3.4.3 Motor selection for asynchronous motors

The mechanical resistance of the motor against the overload, which might exceed the
permitted limit values, must be strictly checked.
Mpk and nbase depend on the motor/inverter combination, as well as on the used control
mode.
Asynchronous motors are mainly operated in control mode VFCPLUS. The control mode
efficiently adjusts the motor magnetization to the respective operating point. Simultan-
eously it allows for dynamic responses to load shocks at the drive train.
3.4.4 Asynchronous motors in control mode VFCPLUS

The control mode VFCPLUS without encoder allows dynamic use of the entire speed
range of the drive. Reversing and moving through the speed 0 are also possible.
INFORMATION
Lifting application with encoder
The control must be designed in such a way that the direction of rotation of the drive
can only be reversed when it is at a standstill (with the brake applied).
If the direction of rotation should be changed without standstill, a motor encoder must
be used.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
But continuous operation of asynchronous motors without encoder at low speeds is

not possible. The minimum speeds that must not be permanently undercut during op-
eration without encoder are:
• Motor mode: 1% of the asynchronous motor nominal speed.
• Regenerative: 10% of the asynchronous motor nominal speed.

3 Configuration
Recommendations for motor and inverter selection
The described restrictions do not apply in control mode VFCPLUS with encoder. In com-
parison to operation without encoder, higher dynamic properties can be achieved with
an encoder.
When determining the maximum speed, observe that the nominal torque MN reciproc-
ally decreases in the field weakening range, but the breakdown torque MK is reduced
in an quadratic relationship. Thus, the breakdown torque is smaller than the nominal
torque from a certain speed on.
3.4.5 Asynchronous motors in control mode CFC

Either standard asynchronous motors (e.g. DRN.. motors) or asynchronous servomo-
tors (e.g. DRL.. motors) can be used in control mode CFC. SEW‑EURODRIVE recom-
mends using asynchronous servomotors to achieve optimum benefit from the advant-
ages of the control mode CFC.
Standard asynchronous motors in control mode CFC

In comparison to control mode VFCPLUS, higher dynamic properties can be achieved
using CFC. The full motor magnetization is maintained in each operating state, so that
the highest requirements on dynamics are met. Due to the voltage reserves required
for this, standard asynchronous motors are operated with a lower base speed in this
operating mode than in operating mode VFCPLUS. Power yield and energy efficiency
are thus lower.
Sped/torque characteristic for VFCPLUS and CFC in comparison.
VFC
[1] CFC
[2]
[3]
0 nN 2 x nN n
19531895051
[1] Torque
[2] Current
23085711/EN – 03/2017
[3] Power
Asynchronous servomotors in control mode CFC

The high-quality mechanic design of the DRL.. series asynchronous AC servomotors
allows for dynamic overload values that exceed the values of the standard asynchron-
ous motors in line or inverter operation. Due to these characteristics the values of a
synchronous servomotor are almost reached.

Configuration
Recommendations for motor and inverter selection 3
SEW‑EURODRIVE offers DRL.. motors in 2 dynamics packages:
Package Overload capacity in relation to the nominal torque

Dynamics 1 (D1) 190% – 220% 3
Dynamics 2 (D2) 300% – 350%
To obtain an optimal adjustment of the motor speed to the required controller output
limit of the application, SEW‑EURODRIVE offers DRL.. servomotors with the following
4 rated speeds:
• 1200 min-1
• 1700 min-1
• 2100 min-1
• 3000 min-1
In inverter operation, field weakening begins at the rated speed. Compared to stand-
ard asynchronous motors, the inverter has higher voltage reserves for dynamic pro-
cesses at equal line voltage. In inverter operation, field weakening begins at the rated
speed.
3.4.6 Synchronous servomotors in control mode CFC

In general, synchronous servomotors and the corresponding inverters are designed
for a high short-time overload capacity. Values of up to 400% of the nominal torque
are permitted in this case.
When using the following CMP.. motors in the higher speed ranges, it is recommen-
ded to only set the PWM frequencies 8 kHz or 16 kHz.
• CMP40 – 63 for speed class 6000 min-1,
• CMP 71 – 100 for speed classes 4500 min-1 and 6000 min-1.
3.4.7 Synchronous servomotors in control mode ELSM®

The control mode ELSM® allows dynamic use of the entire speed range of the drive.
Reversing and moving through the speed 0 are also possible. The speed must not
permanently drop below the minimum speed of 2% of the nominal motor speed.
When the control mode ELSM® is operated without encoder, the maximum motor
torque is 150% M0 of the connected motor.
The nominal output current of the inverter must not be lower than 1.5 × I0 of the con-
nected motor.
The maximum speed must not be dimensioned higher than the rated speed of the mo-
tor.
The control mode ELSM® may only be used when the motors are equipped with the
following temperature sensors.
• KTY84 - 130 (SEW-EURODRIVE designation: KY/KTY)
• PT1000 (SEW-EURODRIVE designation: PK)
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Using the ELSM® control mode for hoists and inclining tracks is not permitted.

3 Configuration
Motor-inverter assignments
3.5 Motor-inverter assignments
3.5.1 Technical data DRN.. motors
Key
PN Rated power
MN Rated torque
nN Rated speed
IN Rated current
cosφ Power factor
IE Short for "International Efficiency" (international efficiency classes IE1 –
IE4)
η50% Efficiency at 50% of the rated power
IA/IN Starting current ratio
MA/MN Starting torque ratio
MH/MN Ramp-up torque ratio
MK/MN Breakdown torque ratio
m Mass of the motor
JMot Mass moment of inertia of the motor
BE.. Brake used
Z0 BG Starting frequency for operation with BG brake control
Z0 BGE Starting frequency for operation with BGE brake control
MB Braking torque
mB Mass of the brakemotor
JMOT_BE Mass moment of inertia of the brakemotor
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
Motor-inverter assignments 3
IE3 DRN.. motors, 400 V, 50 Hz, 4-pole
Information on motors
Motor PN MN nN IN
400 V
cosφ η50% η75% η100% IA/IN MA/MN
MH/MN
MK/MN 3
kW Nm min -1
A % % %
3.1
DRN 80M 4 0.75 4.95 1440 1.75 0.74 80.7 82.9 82.9 6.7 3.4
2.7
2.7
DRN 90S 4 1.1 7.2 1455 2.55 0.73 83.5 85.0 84.5 6.9 3.3
2.1
2.7
DRN 90L 4 1.5 9.8 1461 3.4 0.74 84.6 86.1 85.6 7.5 3.3
2.0
2.9
DRN 100LS 4 2.2 14.5 1450 4.75 0.76 86.4 87.5 86.9 7.1 3.3
2.2
3.4
DRN 100L 4 3 19.7 1456 6.4 0.76 87.3 88.3 87.8 8.2 3.7
2.3
2.4
DRN 112M 4 4 26 1464 7.9 0.81 88.6 89.4 88.7 8.2 3.6
1.6
2.8
DRN 132S 4 5.5 36 1461 10.5 0.84 90.6 90.6 89.6 8.3 3.5
2.2
3.1
DRN 132M 4 7.5 49 1468 15.2 0.78 90.8 91.1 90.4 7.8 3.3
2.4
3.7
DRN 132L 4 9.2 60 1470 18.7 0.77 90.8 91.6 91.0 8.4 3.7
1.8
2.6
DRN 160M 4 11 71 1473 21 0.81 91.1 91.7 91.4 7.3 3.0
2.2
3.0
DRN 160L 4 15 97 1474 29 0.80 91.9 92.5 92.1 8.0 3.4
2.0
3.6
DRN 180M 4 18.5 120 1478 33.5 0.85 92.8 93.1 92.6 9.5 3.6
2.9
3.5
DRN 180L 4 22 142 1477 38.5 0.87 93.4 93.6 93.0 9.6 3.4
2.1
2.9
DRN 200L 4 30 194 1480 56 0.82 93.3 93.9 93.6 8.2 3.3
2.5
3.0
DRN 225S 4 37 240 1482 64 0.88 94.3 94.4 93.9 8.4 2.7
2.3
3.0
DRN 225M 4 45 290 1482 81 0.85 94.1 94.5 94.2 8.8 2.7
2.2
4.0
DRN 250M 4 55 355 1482 104 0.80 94.4 94.8 94.6 8.2 2.9
2.5
3.7
DRN 280S 4 75 485 1482 143 0.79 94.9 95.3 95.0 7.6 2.9
2.6
3.6
DRN 280M 4 90 580 1481 161 0.84 95.4 95.6 95.2 7.7 2.7
2.0
2.9
DRN 315S 4 110 710 1488 189 0.87 95.4 95.7 95.5 6.7 3.1
2.1
2.7
DRN 315M 4 132 850 1487 230 0.87 95.6 95.9 95.6 6.5 2.9
2.0
2.7
DRN 315L 4 160 1030 1486 275 0.87 95.9 96.1 95.9 6.5 2.8
2.0
3.7
DRN 315H 4 200 1280 1489 355 0.84 95.4 96.0 96.0 8.1 3.8
2.8
23085711/EN – 03/2017

3 Configuration
Further information on motors and brakemotors

Motor PN MN nN mMot JMot BE.. Z0 MB mBMot JBMot
BG
BGE
kW Nm min-1 kg 10-4 kgm2 h-1 Nm kg 10-4 kgm2
3200
DRN 80M 4 0.75 4.95 1440 14 24.7 BE1 10 18 26.2
8200
2300
DRN 90S 4 1.1 7.2 1455 20 54 BE2 14 24 58.7
6000
2200
DRN 90L 4 1.5 9.8 1461 23 67.2 BE2 20 27 71.9
5800
-
DRN 100LS 4 2.2 14.5 1450 27 81.4 BE5 28 33 87.4
6100
-
DRN 100L 4 3 19.7 1456 34 112 BE5 40 40 118
3700
-
DRN 112M 4 4 26 1464 45 178 BE5 55 52 183
2900
-
DRN 132S 4 5.5 36 1461 56 241 BE11 80 71 251
420
-
DRN 132M 4 7.5 49 1468 73 381 BE11 110 91 403
1100
-
DRN 132L 4 9.2 60 1470 81 439 BE20 150 110 490
980
-
DRN 160M 4 11 71 1473 115 817 BE20 150 145 877
900
-
DRN 160L 4 15 97 1474 130 1040 BE20 200 165 1100
800
-
DRN 180M 4 18.5 120 1478 155 1630 BE30 300 195 1770
510
-
DRN 180L 4 22 142 1477 170 1950 BE30 300 210 2090
470
-
DRN 200L 4 30 194 1480 280 2660 BE32 400 335 2890
500
-
DRN 225S 4 37 240 1482 310 4350 BE32 500 365 4580
230
-
DRN 225M 4 45 290 1482 310 4350 BE32 600 365 4580
200
-
DRN 250M 4 55 355 1482 460 7360 BE62 800 550 7960
180
-
DRN 280S 4 75 485 1482 520 8940 BE62 1000 600 9530
150
-
DRN 280M 4 90 580 1481 630 12000 BE62 1200 720 12600
79
-
DRN 315S 4 110 710 1488 870 23400 BE122 1600 1000 24400
53
-
DRN 315M 4 132 850 1487 890 24800 BE122 2000 1020 25800
46
-
DRN 315L 4 160 1030 1486 1020 28600 BE122 2000 1150 29600
34
-
DRN 315H 4 200 1280 1489 1140 35200 BE122 2000 1270 36200
23
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
3.5.2 Motor-inverter assignments DRN.. motors, PWM 4 kHz
Key
IN Nominal output current of the inverter

3
Imax Maximum output current of inverter
Mpk Peak torque of the motor
nbase Base speed of the motor
MOVIDRIVE® modular - 400 V, 50 Hz, VFCPLUS

Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120
Motor Value Unit
DRN80M4 Mpk Nm 16.9
750 W nbase min-1 1034
Imax % 250
DRN90S4 Mpk Nm 17.4 23.8
1.1 kW nbase min-1 1210 1132
Imax % 250 169
DRN90L4 Mpk Nm 32.4
1.5 kW nbase min-1 1179
Imax % 232
DRN100LS4 Mpk Nm 35.6 47.8
2.2 kW nbase min-1 1202 1130
Imax % 250 166
DRN100L4 Mpk Nm 69.7
3 kW nbase min-1 1124
Imax % 235
DRN112M4 Mpk Nm 74.4 81.4
4 kW nbase min-1 1211 1189
Imax % 250 182
DRN132M4 Mpk Nm 107 122
7.5 kW nbase min-1 1288 1268
Imax % 250 213
DRN132L4 Mpk Nm 139 143
9.2 kW nbase min-1 1289 1284
Imax % 250 171
DRN160M4 Mpk Nm 147 197
11 kW nbase min-1 1317 1280
Imax % 250 222
DRN160L4 Mpk Nm 220 273
15 kW nbase min-1 1315 1288
Imax % 250 232
DRN180M4 Mpk Nm 224 297 311
23085711/EN – 03/2017
18.5 kW nbase min-1 1331 1299 1293

Imax % 250 250 175
DRN180L4 Mpk Nm 303 357
22 kW nbase min-1 1314 1294
Imax % 250 197
DRN200L4 Mpk Nm 439
Imax % 250

3 Configuration
Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120
Motor Value Unit
DRN225S4 Mpk Nm 455
Imax % 250
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
3.5.3 Technical data of DRL.. motors
Key to the technical data for asynchronous DRL.. servomotors

The following table lists the short symbols used in the "Technical data" tables. 3
nN Rated speed
MN Rated torque
IN Rated current
JMot Mass moment of inertia of the motor
Mpk D1 Maximum limit torque (dynamics package 1)
Mpk D2 Maximum limit torque (dynamics package 2)
m Mass of the motor
BE.. Brake used
mB Mass of the brake motor
JMOT_BE Mass moment of inertia of the brake motor
MB D1 Braking torque (dynamics package 1)
MB D2 Braking torque (dynamics package 2)
Asynchronous DRL.. servomotors

4-pole DRL.. servomotors for 400 V, 50 Hz
nN Motor type MN IN Iq_n Id_n cT Mpk Mpk m Jmot
D1 D2
Nm A A A Nm/A Nm Nm kg 10-4 kgm2
1200 DRL71S4 2.7 1.18 1.02 0.62 2.66 5 8.5 8.6 4.9
DRL71M4 4 1.6 1.36 0.80 2.93 7 14 10 7.1
DRL80S4 6.5 2.15 1.95 0.88 3.33 10 25 11.5 14.9
DRL80M4 9.5 2.9 2.64 1.10 3.60 14 30 15.2 21.5
DRL90L4 15 4.8 4.14 2.21 3.63 25 46 22.5 43.5
DRL100L4 26 8.5 8.05 2.68 3.23 40 85 30 68
DRL132S4 42 12.6 11.9 4.07 3.52 80 150 45.5 190
DRL132MC4 56 17.6 15.4 7.50 3.63 130 200 65 340
DRL160M4 85 25.5 24.2 8.05 3.51 165 280 93 450
DRL160MC4 90 28 25.1 10.9 3.58 185 320 95 590
DRL180S4 120 34.5 33.2 10.8 3.62 210 380 122 900
DRL180M4 135 38 36.1 11.3 3.74 250 430 143 1110
DRL180L4 165 47 44.9 14.8 3.67 320 520 154 1300
DRL180LC4 175 52 46.8 17.1 3.74 420 600 163 1680
DRL200L4 200 58.5 56.0 17.8 3.57 475 680 260 2360
DRL225S4 250 72 68.1 23.4 3.67 520 770 295 2930
DRL225MC4 290 89 78.6 29.2 3.69 770 1100 330 4330
23085711/EN – 03/2017

3 Configuration
nN Motor type MN IN Iq_n Id_n cT Mpk Mpk m Jmot

D1 D2
Nm A A A Nm/A Nm Nm kg 10-4 kgm2
1700 DRL71S4 2.7 1.63 1.40 0.86 1.92 5 8.5 8.6 4.9
DRL71M4 4 2.2 1.90 1.11 2.11 7 14 10 7.1
DRL80S4 6.5 2.96 2.71 1.22 2.40 10 25 11.5 14.9
DRL80M4 9.5 4 3.65 1.52 2.60 14 30 15.2 21.5
DRL90L4 15 6.6 5.67 3.02 2.65 25 46 22.5 43.5
DRL100L4 26 11.4 11.00 3.66 2.36 40 85 30 68
DRL132S4 42 17.8 16.9 5.75 2.49 80 150 45.5 190
DRL132MC4 56 24.9 21.9 10.6 2.56 130 200 65 340
DRL160M4 85 35 33.5 11.1 2.54 165 280 93 450
DRL160MC4 90 36 32.3 14.0 2.78 185 320 95 590
DRL180S4 120 47.5 45.6 14.8 2.63 210 380 122 900
DRL180M4 135 52 50.1 15.7 2.70 250 430 143 1110
DRL180L4 165 63 61.3 20.2 2.69 320 520 154 1300
DRL180LC4 175 72 65.7 24.1 2.66 420 600 163 1680
DRL200L4 200 80.6 78.4 25.0 2.55 475 680 260 2360
DRL225S4 245 97 92 32.2 2.66 520 770 295 2930
DRL225MC4 280 130 114 43.9 2.45 770 1100 330 4330
2100 DRL71S4 2.6 2 1.70 1.08 1.53 5 8.5 8.6 4.9
DRL71M4 3.8 2.7 2.25 1.39 1.69 7 14 10 7.1
DRL80S4 6.2 3.59 3.22 1.52 1.92 10 25 11.5 14.9
DRL80M4 9.5 5 4.60 1.91 2.07 14 30 15.2 21.5
DRL90L4 15 8.4 7.21 3.84 2.08 25 46 22.5 43.5
DRL100L4 25 14 13.4 4.63 1.87 40 85 30 68
DRL132S4 41 21.4 20.3 7.07 2.02 80 150 45.5 190
DRL132MC4 52 28.8 25.0 13.0 2.08 130 200 65 340
DRL160M4 85 44 42.1 14.0 2.02 165 280 93 450
DRL160MC4 88 48 42.8 18.9 2.06 185 320 95 590
DRL180S4 110 55.3 52.7 18.7 2.09 210 380 122 900
DRL180M4 130 64 60.4 19.6 2.15 250 430 143 1110
DRL180L4 160 78 75.8 25.8 2.11 320 520 154 1300
DRL180LC4 170 87 79.1 29.8 2.15 420 600 163 1680
DRL200L4 195 99 94.6 30.9 2.06 475 680 260 2360
DRL225S4 235 119 111 40.6 2.11 520 770 295 2930
DRL225MC4 265 142 125 50.8 2.12 770 1100 330 4330
3000 DRL71S4 2.5 2.68 2.26 1.49 1.11 5 8.5 8.6 4.9
DRL71M4 3.6 3.55 2.96 1.93 1.21 7 14 10 7.1
DRL80S4 6 4.82 4.32 2.10 1.39 10 25 11.5 14.9
DRL80M4 8.8 6.5 5.86 2.63 1.50 14 30 15.2 21.5
DRL90L4 14 11 9.19 5.25 1.52 25 46 22.5 43.5
DRL100L4 21 16.6 15.4 6.35 1.36 40 85 30 68
DRL132S4 35 25.5 24.4 10.0 1.43 80 150 45.5 190
DRL132MC4 42 34.8 28.4 18.4 1.48 130 200 65 340
DRL160M4 79 57 53.9 19.3 1.47 165 280 93 450
DRL160MC4 83 59 51.8 24.3 1.60 185 320 95 590
DRL180S4 100 70.1 65.9 25.7 1.52 210 380 122 900
23085711/EN – 03/2017
DRL180M4 105 73 67.6 27.2 1.55 250 430 143 1110

DRL180L4 130 90 83.8 35.0 1.55 320 520 154 1300
DRL180LC4 140 105 91 41.8 1.53 420 600 163 1680
DRL200L4 165 118 112 43.3 1.47 475 680 260 2360
DRL225S4 195 139 127 56.0 1.53 520 770 295 2930
DRL225MC4 220 188 156 76 1.41 770 1100 330 4330

Configuration
4-pole DRL.. servomotors/brakemotors for 400 V, 50 Hz
nN Motor type MN IN BE.. MB MB mB JMot_BE
D1 D2
Nm A Nm Nm kg1) 10-4 kgm2 3
1200 DRL71S4 2.7 1.18 BE05 5 5 11 6.2
DRL71M4 4 1.6 BE1 7 10 12.6 8.4
DRL80S4 6.5 2.15 BE2 10 20 15.2 19.4
DRL80M4 9.5 2.9 BE2 14 20 18.9 26
DRL90L4 15 4.8 BE5 20 40 28.5 49.5
DRL100L4 26 8.5 BE5 40 55 36 74
DRL132S4 42 12.6 BE11 80 110 60 200
DRL132MC4 56 17.6 BE11 110 110 79 355
DRL160M4 85 25.5 BE20 150 200 120 500
DRL160MC4 90 28 BE20 150 200 122 640
DRL180S4 120 34.5 BE30 200 300 162 1030
DRL180M4 135 38 BE30 200 300 183 1250
DRL180L4 165 47 BE30 300 300 194 1440
DRL180LC4 175 52 BE32 400 400 210 1910
DRL200L4 200 58.5 BE32 400 600 315 2590
DRL225S4 250 72 BE32 500 500 350 3160
DRL225MC4 290 89 BE32 600 600 385 4560
1700 DRL71S4 2.7 1.63 BE05 5 5 11 6.2
DRL71M4 4 2.2 BE1 7 10 12.6 8.4
DRL80S4 6.5 2.96 BE2 10 20 15.2 19.4
DRL80M4 9.5 4 BE2 14 20 18.9 26
DRL90L4 15 6.6 BE5 20 40 28.5 49.5
DRL100L4 26 11.4 BE5 40 55 36 74
DRL132S4 42 17.8 BE11 80 110 60 200
DRL132MC4 56 24.9 BE11 110 110 79 355
DRL160M4 85 35 BE20 150 200 120 500
DRL160MC4 90 36 BE20 150 200 122 640
DRL180S4 120 47.5 BE30 200 300 162 1030
DRL180M4 135 52 BE30 200 300 183 1250
DRL180L4 165 63 BE30 300 300 194 1440
DRL180LC4 175 72 BE32 400 400 210 1910
DRL200L4 200 80.6 BE32 400 600 315 2590
DRL225S4 245 97 BE32 500 500 350 3160
DRL225MC4 280 130 BE32 600 600 385 4560
2100 DRL71S4 2.6 2 BE05 5 5 11 6.2
DRL71M4 3.8 2.7 BE1 7 10 12.6 8.4
DRL80S4 6.2 3.59 BE2 10 20 15.2 19.4
DRL80M4 9.5 5 BE2 14 20 18.9 26
DRL90L4 15 8.4 BE5 20 40 28.5 49.5
DRL100L4 25 14 BE5 40 55 36 74
DRL132S4 41 21.4 BE11 80 110 60 200
DRL132MC4 52 28.8 BE11 110 110 79 355
DRL160M4 85 44 BE20 150 200 120 500
23085711/EN – 03/2017
DRL160MC4 88 48 BE20 150 200 122 640

DRL180S4 110 55.3 BE30 200 300 162 1030
DRL180M4 130 64 BE30 200 300 183 1250
DRL180L4 160 78 BE30 300 300 194 1440
DRL180LC4 170 87 BE32 400 400 210 1910
DRL200L4 195 99 BE32 400 600 315 2590
DRL225S4 235 119 BE32 500 500 350 3160
DRL225MC4 265 142 BE32 600 600 385 4560

3 Configuration
nN Motor type MN IN BE.. MB MB mB JMot_BE

D1 D2
Nm A Nm Nm kg1) 10-4 kgm2
3000 DRL71S4 2.5 2.68 BE05 5 5 11 6.2
DRL71M4 3.6 3.55 BE1 7 10 12.6 8.4
DRL80S4 6 4.82 BE2 10 20 15.2 19.4
DRL80M4 8.8 6.5 BE2 14 20 18.9 26
DRL90L4 14 11 BE5 20 40 28.5 49.5
DRL100L4 21 16.6 BE5 40 55 36 74
DRL132S4 35 25.5 BE11 80 110 60 200
DRL132MC4 42 34.8 BE11 110 110 79 355
DRL160M4 79 57 BE20 150 200 120 500
DRL160MC4 83 59 BE20 150 200 122 640
DRL180S4 100 70.1 BE30 200 300 162 1030
DRL180M4 105 73 BE30 200 300 183 1250
DRL180L4 130 90 BE30 300 300 194 1440
DRL180LC4 140 105 BE32 400 400 210 1910
DRL200L4 165 118 BE32 400 600 315 2590
DRL225S4 195 139 BE32 500 500 350 3160
DRL225MC4 220 188 BE32 600 600 385 4560
1) Applies for foot-mounted motor with brake (DRL...BE../Fl..)
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
3.5.4 Motor-inverter assignments DRL.. motors, PWM 4 kHz
Key

3
MOVIDRIVE® modular - rated motor speed 1200 min-1, dynamics package 1, CFC
Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120
Motor Value Unit
DRL71S4 Mpk Nm 5
nbase min-1 774
Imax % 104
DRL71M4 Mpk Nm 7
nbase min-1 907
Imax % 138
DRL80S4 Mpk Nm 10
nbase min-1 867
Imax % 171
DRL80M4 Mpk Nm 14
nbase min-1 983
Imax % 250
DRL90L4 Mpk Nm 25
nbase min-1 1155
Imax % 250
DRL100L4 Mpk Nm 40
nbase min-1 1378
Imax % 244
DRL132S4 Mpk Nm 80
nbase min-1 1163
Imax % 250
DRL132MC4 Mpk Nm 95.2 130
nbase min-1 1233 1143
Imax % 250 250
DRL160M4 Mpk Nm 165
nbase min-1 1262
Imax % 250
DRL160MC4 Mpk Nm 185
nbase min-1 1216
Imax % 250
DRL180S4 Mpk Nm 210
23085711/EN – 03/2017
nbase min-1 1117

Imax % 250
DRL180M4 Mpk Nm 250
nbase min-1 1255
Imax % 250
DRL180L4 Mpk Nm 297 320
nbase min-1 1110 1324
Imax % 250 250

3 Configuration
Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120
Motor Value Unit
DRL180LC4 Mpk Nm 420
nbase min-1 1125
Imax % 250
DRL200L4 Mpk Nm 452
nbase min-1 1062
Imax % 250
DRL225S4 Mpk Nm 437
nbase min-1 1164
Imax % 250
Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120
Motor Value Unit
DRL71S4 Mpk Nm 5
nbase min-1 1389
Imax % 159
DRL71M4 Mpk Nm 7
nbase min-1 1547
Imax % 210
DRL80S4 Mpk Nm 10
nbase min-1 1499
Imax % 134
DRL80M4 Mpk Nm 14
nbase min-1 1661
Imax % 200
DRL90L4 Mpk Nm 25
nbase min-1 1856
Imax % 195
DRL100L4 Mpk Nm 40
nbase min-1 1859
Imax % 250
DRL132S4 Mpk Nm 73.2 80
nbase min-1 1556 1764
Imax % 250 250
nbase min-1 1805
Imax % 250
DRL160M4 Mpk Nm 149 165
nbase min-1 1603 1823
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Imax % 250 250

DRL160MC4 Mpk Nm 151 185
nbase min-1 1594 1667
Imax % 250 250
DRL180S4 Mpk Nm 208 210
nbase min-1 1568 1906
Imax % 250 247

Configuration
Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120 3
Motor Value Unit
DRL180M4 Mpk Nm 250
nbase min-1 1901
Imax % 250
DRL180L4 Mpk Nm 320
nbase min-1 1587
Imax % 250
nbase min-1 1691
Imax % 250
Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120
Motor Value Unit
DRL71S4 Mpk Nm 5
nbase min-1 2027
Imax % 220
DRL71M4 Mpk Nm 7
nbase min-1 2078
Imax % 250
DRL80S4 Mpk Nm 10
nbase min-1 2097
Imax % 178
DRL80M4 Mpk Nm 14
nbase min-1 2306
Imax % 250
DRL90L4 Mpk Nm 25
nbase min-1 2554
Imax % 250
DRL100L4 Mpk Nm 40
nbase min-1 2785
Imax % 250
DRL132S4 Mpk Nm 80
nbase min-1 1932
Imax % 250
nbase min-1 2172 2417
Imax % 250 250
DRL160M4 Mpk Nm 160 165
nbase min-1 1999 2586
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Imax % 250 250

nbase min-1 2210 2496
Imax % 250 250
DRL180S4 Mpk Nm 210
nbase min-1 2287
Imax % 250

3 Configuration
Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120
Motor Value Unit
DRL180M4 Mpk Nm 250
nbase min-1 2077
Imax % 250
Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120
Motor Value Unit
DRL71S4 Mpk Nm 4.94 5
nbase min-1 2877 3323
Imax % 250 171
DRL71M4 Mpk Nm 7
nbase min-1 3393
Imax % 209
DRL80S4 Mpk Nm 10
nbase min-1 3270
Imax % 250
DRL80M4 Mpk Nm 14
nbase min-1 3651
Imax % 202
DRL90L4 Mpk Nm 25
nbase min-1 3144
Imax % 250
DRL100L4 Mpk Nm 40
nbase min-1 3115
Imax % 250
DRL132S4 Mpk Nm 80
nbase min-1 3002
Imax % 250
DRL132MC4 Mpk Nm 74.4 105 130
nbase min-1 3483 3180 3690
Imax % 250 250 250
DRL160M4 Mpk Nm 165
nbase min-1 3014
Imax % 250
nbase min-1 2774
Imax % 250
DRL180S4 Mpk Nm 175
nbase min-1 2985
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Imax % 250

Configuration
Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48 3
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120
Motor Value Unit
DRL71S4 Mpk Nm 8.5
nbase min-1 319
Imax % 162
DRL71M4 Mpk Nm 14
nbase min-1 359
Imax % 240
nbase min -1
423 113
Imax % 250 171
DRL80M4 Mpk Nm 16.9 30
nbase min-1 822 434
Imax % 250 193
DRL90L4 Mpk Nm 32.6 46
nbase min-1 904 705
Imax % 250 172
DRL100L4 Mpk Nm 74.3 85
nbase min-1 763 730
Imax % 250 214
DRL132S4 Mpk Nm 107 145 150
nbase min-1 890 753 776
Imax % 250 250 188
DRL132MC4 Mpk Nm 95.2 133 200
nbase min-1 1233 1106 990
Imax % 250 250 250
DRL160M4 Mpk Nm 217 280
nbase min-1 969 919
Imax % 250 250
DRL160MC4 Mpk Nm 201 275 320
nbase min-1 1110 995 1082
Imax % 250 250 248
DRL180S4 Mpk Nm 216 301 380
nbase min-1 1083 942 909
Imax % 250 250 239
DRL180M4 Mpk Nm 314 430
nbase min -1
1004 984
Imax % 250 250
DRL180L4 Mpk Nm 297 481
nbase min-1 1110 933
Imax % 250 250
nbase min-1 1048
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Imax % 250
DRL200L4 Mpk Nm 452
nbase min-1 1062
Imax % 250
DRL225S4 Mpk Nm 437
nbase min-1 1164
Imax % 250

3 Configuration
Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120
Motor Value Unit
DRL71S4 Mpk Nm 8.5
nbase min-1 836
Imax % 227
nbase min-1 1162 866
Imax % 250 167
DRL80S4 Mpk Nm 25
nbase min -1
547
Imax % 243
nbase min-1 963 881
Imax % 250 139
DRL90L4 Mpk Nm 46
nbase min-1 1211
Imax % 250
DRL100L4 Mpk Nm 49.7 83.1 85
nbase min-1 1479 1151 1309
Imax % 250 250 250
DRL132S4 Mpk Nm 73.2 101 150
nbase min-1 1556 1419 1270
Imax % 250 250 250
DRL132MC4 Mpk Nm 142 194 200
nbase min-1 1634 1477 1842
Imax % 250 250 248
DRL160M4 Mpk Nm 149 208 280
nbase min-1 1603 1444 1474
Imax % 250 250 250
DRL160MC4 Mpk Nm 151 209 320
nbase min-1 1594 1462 1314
Imax % 250 250 250
DRL180S4 Mpk Nm 208 332
nbase min-1 1568 1330
Imax % 250 250
DRL180M4 Mpk Nm 345
nbase min -1
1409
Imax % 250
DRL180L4 Mpk Nm 333
nbase min-1 1488
Imax % 250
nbase min-1 1691
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Imax % 250

Configuration
Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48 3
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120
Motor Value Unit
DRL71S4 Mpk Nm 7.28 8.5
nbase min-1 1491 1347
Imax % 250 150
nbase min-1 1926 1335
Imax % 250 217
nbase min -1
1209 948
Imax % 250 150
nbase min-1 1656 1335
Imax % 250 189
DRL90L4 Mpk Nm 38.7 46
nbase min-1 1738 1774
Imax % 250 238
DRL100L4 Mpk Nm 62 85
nbase min-1 1796 1621
Imax % 250 250
DRL132S4 Mpk Nm 80.4 125 150
nbase min-1 1918 1703 1757
Imax % 250 250 250
DRL132MC4 Mpk Nm 113 156 200
nbase min-1 2172 1996 2175
Imax % 250 250 250
DRL160M4 Mpk Nm 160 254
nbase min-1 1999 1761
Imax % 250 250
nbase min-1 2210 1973
Imax % 250 250
DRL180S4 Mpk Nm 255
nbase min-1 1893
Imax % 250
DRL180M4 Mpk Nm 264
nbase min -1
1946
Imax % 250
Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120
Motor Value Unit
DRL71S4 Mpk Nm 4.94 8.5
nbase min -1
2877 2392
Imax % 250 231
nbase min-1 2384 2309
Imax % 250 163

3 Configuration
Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120
Motor Value Unit
nbase min-1 2548 1735
Imax % 250 218
DRL80M4 Mpk Nm 30
nbase min-1 2147
Imax % 250
DRL90L4 Mpk Nm 26.4 43.3 46
nbase min-1 2971 2454 2753
Imax % 250 250 250
DRL100L4 Mpk Nm 40.9 60 85
nbase min-1 3041 2642 2624
Imax % 250 250 250
DRL132S4 Mpk Nm 86 117 150
nbase min-1 2769 2583 2805
Imax % 250 250 250
DRL132MC4 Mpk Nm 74.4 105 166
nbase min-1 3483 3180 2867
Imax % 250 250 250
DRL160M4 Mpk Nm 177
nbase min-1 2783
Imax % 250
nbase min-1 2774
Imax % 250
DRL180S4 Mpk Nm 175
nbase min-1 2985
Imax % 250
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
3.5.5 Technical data of CMP.. motors
Key to the technical data
nN Rated speed
3
M0 Standstill torque (thermal continuous torque at low speeds)
I0 Standstill current
Mpk Dynamic limit torque
Imax Maximum permitted motor current
M0VR Standstill torque with forced cooling fan
I0VR Standstill current with forced cooling fan
Jmot Mass moment of inertia of the motor
Jbmot Mass moment of inertia of the brakemotor
M1 m,100 °C Maximum dynamic braking torque in case of emergency off
M1max Minimal averaged dynamic braking torque in case of emergency off at
100 °C
M2, 20 °C Nominal torque for slipping brake disk (relative speed between brake disk
and friction surface: 1 m/s) at 20 °C
M4,100 °C Minimum holding torque at 120 °C
Wmax1 Maximum permitted braking work per braking operation
Wmax2 Maximum permitted braking work per braking operation with optional
braking torque
L1 Inductance between connection phase and star point
R1 Resistance between connection phase and star point
Vp0 cold Internal voltage at 1000 min-1
mmot Mass of the motor
mbmot Mass of the brakemotor
CMP40 – CMP112, 400 V system voltage

nN Motor M0 I0 Mpk Imax M0VR I0VR m Jmot
min -1
Nm A Nm A Nm A kg 10 kgm2
-4
2000 CMP71S 6.4 3.4 19.2 17 8.7 4.6 7 3.04

CMP71M 9.4 5 30.8 26 13.7 7.3 8.4 4.08
CMP71L 13.1 6.3 46.9 39 21 10.1 11.4 6.18
CMP80S 13.4 6.9 42.1 33 18.7 9.5 12.8 8.78
CMP80M 18.7 9.3 62.6 48 27 13.4 16.5 11.9
CMP80L 27.5 12.5 107 72 44 20 21.4 18.1
CMP100S 25.5 13.3 68.3 49 36 18.8 19.8 19.59
CMP100M 31 14.7 108 69 47 22.3 24.8 26.49
23085711/EN – 03/2017
CMP100L 47 21.8 178.8 113 70 32.5 34.6 40.24

CMP112S 30 14.3 88 51 43 21 38.4 74
CMP112M 45 21 136 74 68 32 46.2 103
CMP112L 69 33 225 124 109 52 62.56 163
CMP112H 83 38 270 148 123 57 70.43 193
CMP112E 95 44.5 320 175 150 71 78.2 222

3 Configuration

min-1 Nm A Nm A Nm A kg 10-4 kgm2
3000 CMP40S 0.5 1.2 1.9 6.1 – – 1.3 0.1
CMP40M 0.8 0.95 3.8 6.0 – – 1.6 0.15
CMP50S 1.3 0.96 5.2 5.1 1.7 1.25 2.3 0.42
CMP50M 2.4 1.68 10.3 9.6 3.5 2.45 3.3 0.67
CMP50L 3.3 2.2 15.4 13.6 4.8 3.2 4.1 0.92
CMP63S 2.9 2.15 11.1 12.9 4 3 4.0 1.15
CMP63M 5.3 3.6 21.4 21.6 7.5 5.1 5.7 1.92
CMP63L 7.1 4.95 30.4 29.7 10.3 7.2 7.5 2.69
CMP71S 6.4 4.9 19.2 25 8.7 6.7 7 3.04
CMP71M 9.4 7.5 30.8 39 13.7 10.9 8.4 4.08
CMP71L 13.1 9.4 46.9 58 21 15.1 11.4 6.18
CMP80S 13.4 10 42.1 47 18.5 13.8 12.8 8.78
CMP80M 18.7 13.4 62.6 69 27 19.3 16.5 11.9
CMP80L 27.5 18.7 107 107 44 30 21.4 18.1
CMP100S 25.5 19.6 68.3 73 36 27.5 19.8 19.59
CMP100M 31 21.8 108 102 47 33 24.8 26.49
CMP100L 47 32.3 178.8 167 70 48 34.6 40.24
CMP112S 30 21 88 74 43 30.5 38.4 74
CMP112M 45 32 136 113 68 49 46.2 103
CMP112L 69 49 225 183 105 77 62.56 163
CMP112H 83 57 270 220 123 84 70.43 193
CMP112E 95 65 320 255 150 104 78.2 222
4500 CMP40S 0.5 1.2 1.9 6.1 – – 1.3 0.1
CMP40M 0.8 0.95 3.8 6.0 – – 1.6 0.15
CMP50S 1.3 1.32 5.2 7.0 1.7 1.7 2.3 0.42
CMP50M 2.4 2.3 10.3 13.1 3.5 3.35 3.3 0.67
CMP50L 3.3 3.15 15.4 19.5 4.8 4.6 4.1 0.92
CMP63S 2.9 3.05 11.1 18.3 4 4.2 4.0 1.15
CMP63M 5.3 5.4 21.4 32.4 7.5 7.6 5.7 1.92
CMP63L 7.1 6.9 30.4 41.4 10.3 10 7.5 2.69
CMP71S 6.4 7.3 19.2 38 8.7 9.9 7 3.04
CMP71M 9.4 10.9 30.8 57 13.7 15.9 8.4 4.08
CMP71L 13.1 14.1 46.9 87 21 22.5 11.4 6.18
CMP80S 13.4 15.3 42.1 73 18.5 21 12.8 8.78
CMP80M 18.7 20.1 62.6 103 27 29 16.5 11.9
CMP80L 27.5 27.8 107 159 44 44.5 21.4 18.1
CMP100S 25.5 30 68.3 111 36 42.5 19.8 19.59
CMP100M 31 33.1 108 154 47 50 24.8 26.49
CMP100L 47 48.4 178.8 251 70 72 34.6 40.24
CMP112S 30 31.5 88 112 43 45.5 38.4 74
CMP112M 45 47 136 168 68 72 46.2 103
CMP112L 69 73 225 275 107 114 62.56 163
CMP112H 83 86 270 335 123 128 70.43 193
CMP112E 95 98 320 385 150 156 78.2 222
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
min-1 Nm A Nm A Nm A kg 10-4 kgm2
6000 CMP40S 0.5 1.2 1.9 6.1 – – 1.3 0.1
CMP40M 0.8 1.1 3.8 6.9 – – 1.6 0.15 3
CMP50S 1.3 1.7 5.2 9.0 1.7 2.2 2.3 0.42
CMP50M 2.4 3 10.3 17.1 3.5 4.4 3.3 0.67
CMP50L 3.3 4.2 15.4 26 4.8 6.1 4.1 0.92
CMP63S 2.9 3.9 11.1 23.4 4 5.4 4.0 1.15
CMP63M 5.3 6.9 21.4 41.4 7.5 9.8 5.7 1.92
CMP63L 7.1 9.3 30.4 55.8 10.3 13.5 7.5 2.69
CMP71S 6.4 9.6 19.2 50 8.7 13.1 7 3.04
CMP71M 9.4 14.7 30.8 76 13.7 21.5 8.4 4.08
CMP71L 13.1 18.8 46.9 115 21 30 11.4 6.18
CMP80S 13.4 20 42.1 95 18.5 27.5 12.8 8.78
CMP80M 18.7 26.4 62.6 135 27 38 16.5 11.9
CMP80L 27.5 37.6 107 215 44 60 21.4 18.1
23085711/EN – 03/2017

3 Configuration
3.5.6 Motor-inverter assignments CMP.. motors, PWM 4 kHz
Key

MOVIDRIVE® modular - rated speed 2000 1/min

Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120
Motor Value Unit
CMP71S Mpk Nm 9.34 15.7 19.2
nbase 1/min 2000 2000 2000
Imax % 250 250 214
CMP71M Mpk Nm 17.6 27.4 30.8
nbase 1/min 2000 2000 2000
Imax % 250 250 219
CMP71L Mpk Nm 20.2 36.1 43.9 46.9
nbase 1/min 2000 2000 2000 2000
Imax % 250 250 250 242
CMP80S Mpk Nm 34 40.5 42.1
nbase 1/min 2000 2000 2000
Imax % 250 250 204
CMP80M Mpk Nm 38.2 51.1 58.7 62.6
nbase 1/min 2000 2000 2000 2000
Imax % 250 250 250 197
CMP80L Mpk Nm 42.6 61.3 77 98.7 107
nbase 1/min 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
Imax % 250 250 250 250 225
CMP100S Mpk Nm 37.6 52.2 62.2 68.3
nbase 1/min 2000 2000 2000 2000
Imax % 250 250 250 206
CMP100M Mpk Nm 61.4 78 101 108
nbase 1/min 2000 2000 2000 2000
Imax % 250 250 250 215
CMP100L Mpk Nm 85.1 121 148 179
nbase 1/min 2000 2000 2000 2000
Imax % 250 250 250 235
CMP112S Mpk Nm 60.3 75.5 88
nbase 1/min 2000 2000 2000
Imax % 250 250 211
CMP112M Mpk Nm 65.9 85.2 118 136
23085711/EN – 03/2017
nbase 1/min 2000 2000 2000 2000

Imax % 250 250 250 231
CMP112L Mpk Nm 126 161 219
nbase 1/min 2000 2000 2000
Imax % 250 250 250
CMP112H Mpk Nm 129 168 234
nbase 1/min 2000 2000 2000
Imax % 250 250 250

Configuration
Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120 3
Motor Value Unit
CMP112E Mpk Nm 170 241
nbase 1/min 2000 2000
Imax % 250 250

Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120
Motor Value Unit
CMP40S Mpk Nm 1.7 1.9
nbase 1/min 3000 3000
Imax % 250 151
CMP40M Mpk Nm 3.44 3.8
nbase 1/min 3000 3000
Imax % 250 149
nbase 1/min 3000 3000
Imax % 250 128
CMP50M Mpk Nm 6.54 10.3
nbase 1/min 3000 3000
Imax % 250 239
CMP50L Mpk Nm 7.25 12.8 15.4
nbase 1/min 3000 3000 3000
Imax % 250 250 169
CMP63S Mpk Nm 6.17 9.83 11.1
nbase 1/min 3000 3000 3000
Imax % 250 250 161
CMP63M Mpk Nm 13.3 20.7 21.4
nbase 1/min 3000 3000 3000
Imax % 250 250 180
CMP63L Mpk Nm 13.9 24.1 30.4
nbase 1/min 3000 3000 3000
Imax % 250 250 247
CMP71S Mpk Nm 12.1 18.1 19.2
nbase 1/min 3000 3000 3000
Imax % 250 250 208
CMP71M Mpk Nm 22 27.5 30.8
nbase 1/min 3000 3000 3000
Imax % 250 250 244
CMP71L Mpk Nm 26.5 36.3 42.3 46.9
nbase 1/min 3000 3000 3000 3000
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Imax % 250 250 250 240

CMP80S Mpk Nm 25.8 34.6 39.2 42.1
nbase 1/min 3000 3000 3000 3000
Imax % 250 250 250 198
CMP80M Mpk Nm 39.4 48.7 59.5 62.6
nbase 1/min 3000 3000 3000 3000
Imax % 250 250 250 214

3 Configuration
Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120
Motor Value Unit
CMP80L Mpk Nm 42.6 55.4 77 92.8 107
nbase 1/min 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
Imax % 250 250 250 250 225
CMP100S Mpk Nm 38.2 48.5 62.7 68.3
nbase 1/min 3000 3000 3000 3000
Imax % 250 250 250 228
CMP100M Mpk Nm 56 78.9 95.6 108
nbase 1/min 3000 3000 3000 3000
Imax % 250 250 250 212
CMP100L Mpk Nm 86 111 149
nbase 1/min 3000 3000 3000
Imax % 250 250 250
CMP112S Mpk Nm 55.7 76.8 88
nbase 1/min 3000 3000 3000
Imax % 250 250 231
CMP112M Mpk Nm 83.8 106 136
nbase 1/min 3000 3000 3000
Imax % 250 250 235
CMP112L Mpk Nm 115 163
nbase 1/min 3000 3000
Imax % 250 250
CMP112H Mpk Nm 169
nbase 1/min 3000
Imax % 250
CMP112E Mpk Nm 173
nbase 1/min 3000
Imax % 250

Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120
Motor Value Unit
nbase 1/min 4500 4500
Imax % 250 151
CMP40M Mpk Nm 3.44 3.8
nbase 1/min 4500 4500
Imax % 250 149
nbase 1/min 4500 4500
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Imax % 250 177

CMP50M Mpk Nm 5.03 8.75 10.3
nbase 1/min 4500 4500 4500
Imax % 250 250 163
CMP50L Mpk Nm 5.17 9.61 15.4
nbase 1/min 4500 4500 4500
Imax % 250 250 244

Configuration
Inverter MD_90A-.. 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480
Value Unit
IN A 2 4 8 12 16 24 32 48
Imax A 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 120 3
Motor Value Unit
CMP63S Mpk Nm 4.66 7.96 11.1
nbase 1/min 4500 4500 4500
Imax % 250 250 228
CMP63M Mpk Nm 9.57 16.4 20.7 21.4
nbase 1/min 4500 4500 4500 4500
Imax % 250 250 250 201
CMP63L Mpk Nm 10.2 18.7 25.2 29.8 30.4
nbase 1/min 4500 4500 4500 4500 4500
Imax % 250 250 250 250 173
CMP112S Mpk Nm 55.5 70.3 88
nbase 1/min 4500 4500 4500
Imax % 250 250 233
CMP112M Mpk Nm 76.5 107
nbase 1/min 4500 4500
Imax % 250 250
CMP112L Mpk Nm 115
nbase 1/min 4500
Imax % 250
23085711/EN – 03/2017

3 Configuration
Selecting an axis module
3.6 Selecting an axis module
INFORMATION
Always use the SEW Workbench for selecting MOVIDRIVE® modular components.
The following explanations are not exhaustive and are only intended for conveying a
basic understanding.
The selection of the axis module is made over the course of the output current over
time. The required current has to be determined from the required torque character-
istic of the connected motor.
• The axis modules are dimensioned for a nominal output current of 100% IN.
• In many applications, there is a demand for short-time overload operation. For this
purpose, the axis modules can be operated with up to 250% IN for a short period of
time.
For overload operation, make sure that the axis module is not thermally overloaded.
For protecting the power components, the axis modules have several monitoring
mechanisms such as dynamic utilization, thermal utilization, electromechanical utiliza-
tion (I2t utilization).
Due to the complexity of the utilization curves, the calculation can only be performed
using software. The SEW Workbench software offers supports for dimensioning an
axis module.
For a rough selection of the axis module without using software, characteristic load
cycles are given in the following section. For other load cycles, the device utilization
can only be determined using software.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
Selecting an axis module 3
3.6.1 Overload capacity
Load cycle with base load current – typical for the selection of asynchronous and servomotors
The characteristic load cycle consists of a load and a load relief period. In the load re- 3
lief period, the output current must not exceed the specified value. After this load relief
period, overload is possible again.
% IN
I out1
t1 t2
I out2
t
9007216727432971
Examples of permitted current profiles
Overload capacity at PWM = 4 kHz, fout ≥ 3 Hz
Overload current Iout 1 in Overload time t1 Base load current Iout 2 in % Base load time t2
% IN for the duration t1 IN for the duration t2
250 % 1s 50 % 9s
200 % 3s 50 % 17 s
150 % 30 s 50 % 90 s
23085711/EN – 03/2017

3 Configuration
Selecting an axis module
3.6.2 Derating
Due to the following operating and ambient conditions, a reduction of the output cur-
rent may be necessary.
Derating due to the rotary field frequency

The specified nominal output current IN of the application inverter is the rms value. The
increased load on the power semiconductors has to be considered especially for slow
rotating fields and rotating fields at standstill. In case of a rotating field at standstill, dir-
ect current that can correspond to the peak value of the sine current depending on the
phase position is flowing.
This consideration is particularly important for output frequencies fA < 3 Hz (e.g. for
small speeds or standstill).
% IN
300
250
200
[2]
150
[1]
100
50
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 fA Hz
17414495371
[1] Continuous output current with PWM = 4 kHz

[2] Temporary overload current
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
Selecting an axis module 3
Derating due to the installation altitude
SEW‑EURODRIVE frequency inverters are designed for overvoltage category III and
for altitudes up to 2000 m according to EN 61800-5-1. The air pressure and the air
density decrease depending on the installation altitude. This leads to a reduced cool- 3
ing capacity and to a reduced electrical isolation effect of the air.
Installation altitude Restrictions

Up to 1000 m None
1001 to 3800 m Nominal output current IN reduction by 1% per 100 m.
Additionally: To maintain protective separation and the air gaps and
2000 to 3800 m creepage distances according to EN 61800‑5‑1, you have to
connect an overvoltage protection device in order to reduce
the overvoltages from category III to category II.
Derating due to the line voltage

Switching losses in the power semiconductors rise with increasing line voltage and in-
creasing PWM. Observe the following derating characteristic values:
Line voltage Vline PWM Continuous current Icontinuous

400 V 4 kHz 100 %
8 kHz 75 %
16 kHz 50 %
45 % for MDA90A-0480-..
500 V 4 kHz 92 %
8 kHz 65 %
16 kHz 43 %
39 % for MDA90A-0480-..
23085711/EN – 03/2017

3 Configuration
3.7 Power supply module selection
INFORMATION
Always use the SEW Workbench for selecting MOVIDRIVE® modular components.
The following explanations are not exhaustive and are only intended for conveying a
basic understanding.
The selection of the power supply module is made over the power curve of the DC link
over time. The power curve results from the overlaying travel profiles of all connected
axis modules.
• The power supply modules are dimensioned for a nominal power of 100% PN.
• In many applications, there is a demand for short-time overload operation. For this
purpose, the power supply modules can be operated with up to 250% PN for a
short period of time.
For overload operation, make sure that the power supply module is not thermally over-
loaded.
3.7.1 Power curve of the DC link

• The total power (DC link power) is the result of the overlapping cycles of the indi-
vidual axis modules.
• Changing the assignment of cycles with respect to time strongly influences the mo-
tor and regenerative load of the power supply module.
• If no time reference can be made, it is necessary to take a worst-case scenario
into account.
M M M
n n n
MDA1
MDA2
MDA3
t t t
P P P
MDA1
MDA2
MDA3
t t t
P
MDP
23085711/EN – 03/2017
9007216728037387
Due to the complexity of the utilization curves, the calculation can only be performed
using software. The SEW Workbench software offers supports for dimensioning a
power supply module.

Configuration
Power supply module selection 3
For a rough selection of the power supply module without using software, character-
istic load cycles are given in the following section. For other load cycles, the device
utilization can only be determined using software.
3
3.7.2 Overload capacity
Load cycle with base load

The characteristic load cycle consists of a load and a load relief period. In the load re-
lief period, the DC link power must not exceed the specified value. After this load relief
period, overload is possible again.
% PN
Pout1
t1 t2
Pout2
t/T
17473216011
Examples of permitted power profiles:
Overload Pout1 in Overload time t1 Base load Pout2 in Base load t1

% PN for the dura- % PN for the dura-
tion t1 tion t2
250% 1s 50% 9s
200% 3s 50% 17 s
150% 30 s 50% 90 s
3.7.3 Current-carrying capacity of the brake chopper

The ohmic resistance of the braking resistor must not be smaller than the minimum
permitted braking resistor according to the technical data of the power supply module.
This ensures that the brake chopper is not damaged.
The continuous braking power must not exceed 25% of the nominal power of the
3.7.4 Sum of the nominal DC link current of the connected axis modules
The power supply module has to provide the charging current of the DC link capacities
23085711/EN – 03/2017
of the connected axis modules.

To limit the inrush current, a line choke has to be used for a certain number of axis
modules and a combination of axis and power supply module.
The total sum of all nominal DC link currents of the axis modules must not exceed
three times the nominal DC link current (300% INDC) of the supply module.

3 Configuration
INFORMATION
If the supply system conditions are uncertain, e.g. in case of high harmonic content,
SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends using a line choke.
MDP90A-010-4-503 (10 kW)

Depending on whether a line choke is used or not, only a certain number of points
may be connected to the 10 kW power supply module, according to a points system.
Line choke Sum of the nominal DC link Maximum permitted

currents of the axis modules points
No 300 % 8
Yes 300 % -
Operation without Depending on the output current, a certain number of points is assigned to the MDA
line choke and MDD axis modules. The following table shows the assigned number of points per
drive inverter.
Axis module Point(s)

MDA90A-0020, 0040, 0080, 0120, 0160 1
MDA90A-0240, 0320, 0480 2
MDD90A-0020, 0040 1
MDD90A0020, 0040, 0080 1
Example calculation for operation without line choke.
• 4 × MDA 2 A (size 1) • 4×2A • 4 × 1 = 4 points

• 4 × MDA 8 A (size 1) • 4×8A • 4 × 1 = 4 points
Total: 40 A 8 points
Maximum permitted: 300 % IDC link MDP 10 kW = 63 A MDP 10 kW = 8 points
The sum of the nominal DC link current of the connected axis modules does not ex-
ceed 300% of the nominal DC link current of the power supply module. The maximum
number of evaluation points is not exceeded; the combination is permitted.
Operation with line If a line choke is used, the points system must not be observed.
choke
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
Power supply module selection 3
MDP90A-025-4-503 (25 kW)
Irrespective of whether a line choke is used or not, project planning on three times the
DC link current is carried out.
3
The points system must not be observed for the 25 kW power supply module.
Line choke Sum of the nominal DC link Maximum permitted

currents of the axis modules points
No 300 % -
Yes 300 % -
3.7.5 Assignment of the maximum axis size to the power supply module
The assignment of the maximum axis module size to the power supply modules is as
follows:
• MDP90A-0010-… (10 kW): MDA90A-0240 (24 A)
• MDP90A-0025-… (25 kW): MDA90A-0640 (64 A)
3.7.6 Maximum number of axis modules and total cable length

The maximum number of axis modules and the total motor cable length in the axis
block to the assigned filters is:
Power supply Line filter Maximum number Total cable length

module
Axis Axes (out- Cable from Cable from other
module put stages) SEW‑EURODRIVE manufacturers
(MDA/MDD)
MDP90A-0100-... NF0420-513 15 16 600 m 400 m
MDP90A-0250-...
MDP90A-0100-... NF0420-523 15 30 800 m 400 m
MDP90A-0250-...
23085711/EN – 03/2017

3 Configuration
3.7.7 Current-carrying capacity of the integrated braking resistor for MDP90-..-C00

The MDP90A-...-C00 power supply module (size 1A) has an integrated braking res-
istor and is capable of converting an effective regenerative power of 220 W. The con-
tinuously processed regenerative peak energies depend on 2 operating conditions.
During dimensioning observe the following operating conditions.
Operating condition 1 – Operation under constant load
The internal braking resistor can absorb peak energy pulses of 11 kWs. There are no
restrictions in terms of delay or wait times after power on or off.
Operating condition 2 – Operation under maximum load
After the DC 24 V supply is switched on (also after the device is switched on after an
operating pause) a general waiting time of 2 minutes applies. After this time peak en-
ergy pulses of 25 kW can be absorbed. In case the DC 24 V supply is interrupted dur-
ing the 2 minutes, the waiting time of 2 minutes after switch-on applies again.
The connection frequency regulations apply to the restart sequence of the DC 24 V
supply.
The following diagram explains the 2 operating conditions.
30
[2]
25
20
E [kWs]
15
[1]
10
0
0 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5
t [min]
18062929803
[1] Operating condition 1: Load to braking resistor directly after switch-on.

[2] Operating condition 2: Load to braking resistor after 2 minutes waiting time.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
Braking resistor selection 3
3.8 Braking resistor selection
3.8.1 General Information

3
It is not permitted to operate a power supply module without a braking resistor. A brak-
ing resistor must also be connected to applications without regenerative parts.
3.8.2 Table of braking resistors

The following braking resistors are intended for use with MOVIDRIVE® modular. The
technical data is valid in the temperature range -20 °C to +40 °C.
For ambient temperatures of more than +40 °C, the continuous power must be re-
duced by 4% for every 10 K. The tripping current must be reduced by 2% for every
10 K. Do not exceed a maximum ambient temperature of 80 °C.
Braking resistor Part number Resistance Continuous Peak power Tripping cur-
power rent
Ω kW kW A
BW047-002 08281661 47 0.2 1.6
BW047-010-T 17983207 47 1 14 4.6
BW027-016-T 17983215 27 1.6 25 7.7
BW027-024-T 17983231 27 2.4 25 9.4
BW012-016 18213243 12 1.6 56 12
BW012-024 17983894 12 2.4 56 14.1
BW012-050-T 18201407 12 5 56 20
BW106-T 18200834 6 13.5 112 47
BW206-T 18204120 6 18 112 55
BW005-070 17983282 4.7 7 143 39
BW004-050-01 18200133 3.6 5 187 33
BW003-420-T 13302345 2.5 42 269 135
BW002-070 17983304 2.3 7 292 55
3.8.3 Selection criteria

The selection of the braking resistor takes place via the SEW Workbench. The neces-
sary selection parameters for the braking resistor are calculated during the project
planning procedure. Depending on these selection parameters, a braking resistor is
selected from the table.
The following selection parameters are the basis for selecting the braking resistor.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

3 Configuration
3.8.4 Continuous braking power

The continuous braking power is specified by the mechanical structure of the braking
resistor.
The continuous braking power required by the application must be lower than the con-
tinuous braking power of the braking resistor according to the technical data.
3.8.5 Peak braking power

The permitted peak braking power is specified by the resistor and the DC link voltage.
The peak braking power required by the application results from the maximum of indi-
vidual regenerative parts within a cycle.
The peak braking power required by the application must be lower than the permitted
peak braking power of the braking resistor.
The permitted peak braking power of the braking resistor is calculated as follows:
2
UZK max
Pmax =
R × 1 .4
Pmax Maximum peak braking power that the braking resistor can absorb
UDC max Maximum DC link voltage for MOVIDRIVE® modular: DC 970 V
R Braking resistance value
The peak braking power for each braking resistor is listed in the table.
3.8.6 Current-carrying capacity of the brake chopper

The ohmic resistance of the braking resistor must not be smaller than the minimum
permitted braking resistor according to the technical data of the power supply module.
This ensures that the brake chopper is not damaged.
The continuous braking power must not exceed 25% of the nominal power of the
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
3.8.7 Permitted installation of braking resistors
The surfaces of the resistors get very hot if loaded with nominal power. Make sure that
you select an installation site that will accommodate these high temperatures. Braking
resistors are therefore usually mounted on the control cabinet roof. 3
NOTICE
Braking resistors can overheat.
Non-permissible installation might lead to an accumulation of heat in the braking res-
istor due to reduced convection. A tripping temperature contact or an overheated
braking resistor can lead to a system standstill.
ü Adhere to the following minimum clearances:
• About 200 mm to adjacent components and walls.
• About 300 mm to above components/ceilings.
Observe the following permitted mounting positions when installing the resistors:
• Grid resistor
BW003-420-T
1 4
4
3
5
18512460171
The arrow marks the connection side.

23085711/EN – 03/2017

3 Configuration
• Wire resistor
4
3
5
18512455307
• Flat type resistor
4
3
5
18512457739
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
3.8.8 Supply cable for braking resistor
Use only shielded cables.
The cable cross section depends on the tripping current IF. 3
The rated voltage of the cable must amount to at least V0/V = 300 V / 500 V.
The maximum permitted cable length between application inverter and braking resistor
is 100 m.
3.8.9 Protection against thermal overload of the braking resistor

To avoid thermal damage of the braking resistor as well as subsequent damage, the
braking resistor has to be thermally monitored. SEW‑EURODRIVE suggests the fol-
lowing options:
• TCB thermal circuit breaker
The TCB thermal circuit breaker is installed in the control cabinet, connected to the
supply cable to the braking resistor and set to the tripping current of the braking
resistor. If the measured mean current exceeds the tripping current, an NC contact
switches and reports overload of the braking resistor. Simultaneously the connec-
tion of braking resistor and inverter is separated, thus ending the generator mode.
• Integrated temperature switch –T
Braking resistors with the label –T are equipped with an integrated temperature
switch. The temperature switch is thermally coupled to the braking resistor and
switches an NC contact in case of overtemperature of the braking resistor. The
braking resistor-inverter connection is not interrupted. In case of thermal overload,
the regenerative operation has to be terminated. SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends
to shield the connection cable of the temperature switch.
• Thermal overload relay
A thermal overload relay is installed in the control cabinet, connected to the supply
cable to the braking resistor and set to the tripping current of the braking resistor. If
the measured mean current exceeds the tripping current, an NC contact switches
and reports overload of the braking resistor. The braking resistor-inverter connec-
tion is not interrupted. In case of thermal overload, the regenerative operation has
to be terminated.
Wiring diagrams regarding the matters described above are available in chapter
"Protection against thermal overload of the braking resistor" (→ 2 236).
23085711/EN – 03/2017

3 Configuration
Supply system cable and motor cable
3.9 Supply system cable and motor cable
3.9.1 Supply system cable

Dimensioning of the supply system cable generally takes place plant-specific and de-
pends on the design of the line connection. Observe the country-specific and plant-
specific regulations when selecting the cross section of the supply system cable.
Recommended cross section for nominal operation

The cross section of the supply system cable has to be dimensioned based on the
nominal line current IN of the power supply module MDP at nominal load PN.
SEW‑EURODRIVE suggests the cable cross sections listed in the table. The sugges-
tions are valid under the following conditions:
• The single-core cables are made of copper with PVC insulation.
• The cables are routed according to IEC 60204-1 installation type C at 40 °C ambi-
ent temperature.
Power supply module 0100 0250 0500 0750 1100

MDP90A-…-503
Nominal power PN 10 kW 25 kW 50 kW 75 kW 110 kW
Nominal line current AC Iline 16 A 40 A 80 A 120 A 175 A
Supply system cable L1/L2/L3 2.5 mm 2
10 mm 2
35 mm 2
70 mm 2
95 mm2
Fuse/miniature circuit breaker 20 A 50 A 100 A 160 A 200 A
INFORMATION
Observe the notes in the "UL-compliant installation" chapter.
INFORMATION
Secure the supply system cable with appropriate safety elements.

When selecting the supply system cable, make sure that the selected cross section is
in the range of the connectable cross section of the terminals. 23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
Supply system cable and motor cable 3
3.9.2 Motor cable
Cable length
The motor cable length and the total length of all motor cables must not exceed a 3
maximum length for the MOVIDRIVE® modular application inverter.
The following project planning guidelines must be observed:
• Use of shielded motor cables with a capacitance conductor/shield according to the
following table:
Cable cross section in mm2 Capacitance in pF/m

1.5 235
2.5 245
4 260
6 280
10 320
16 380
25 470
35 570
50 720
70 920
90 1120
• Irrespective of the PWM frequency, the permitted length of a motor cable in the
axis system is:
– Maximum 100 m.
– Direct brake control: maximum 25 m.
• The total sum of the motor cable length in the axis block to the assigned filters is:
Power supply Line filter Maximum number Total cable length

module
Axis Axes (out- Cable from Cable from other
module put stages) SEW‑EURODRIVE manufacturers
(MDA/MDD)
MDP90A-0100-... NF0420-513 15 16 600 m 400 m
MDP90A-0250-...
MDP90A-0100-... NF0420-523 15 30 800 m 400 m
MDP90A-0250-...
INFORMATION
A double-axis module is rated as 2 single-axis modules.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Folgen
Observe the notes in chapter "Power supply module selection" (→ 2 108).

3 Configuration
Supply system cable and motor cable
Recommended cross section for nominal operation

SEW‑EURODRIVE suggests the cable cross sections listed in the table. The sugges-
tions are valid under the following conditions:
• The single-core cables are made of copper with PVC insulation.
• The cables are routed according to IEC 60204-1 installation type C at 40 °C ambi-
ent temperature.
Axis module 0020 0040 0080 0120 0160 0240 0320 0480 0640
MDA90A-…-503
MDD90A-...-503
Nominal output current 2A 4A 8A 12 A 16 A 24 A 32 A 48 A 64 A
IN
Motor cable U/V/W 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 4 mm2 6 mm2 10 mm2 16 mm2
INFORMATION
The values in the table are only recommendations. They are no substitute for the de-
tailed project planning of the cables depending on the concrete application consider-
ing the applicable regulations. Observe the voltage drop that occurs along the cable
in particular with the DC 24 V brake coil when dimensioning the cross sections for the
brake cable. Observe the project planning notes in the motor catalog and the require-
ments in chapter "24 V supply voltage selection" (→ 2 125).
Voltage drop
Select the cable cross section of the motor cable in a way that a maximum of 5%
voltage drop occurs at nominal current of the motor. Read the information in the relev-
ant motor catalogs. An excessively high voltage drop means that the full motor torque
is not achieved.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
Signal lines 3
3.10 Signal lines
3.10.1 Encoder cables

3
Connection/Encoder Cable length
HTL encoder ES7C and EG7C 300 m
Standard HTL encoder 200 m
Other encoders 100 m
3.11 Line components
3.11.1 Line fuses and miniature circuit breakers

Line fuses and miniature circuit breakers are used for protecting the supply system
cables of the axis block. In case of a fault, these components protect the power supply
module against short circuit. For fusing, use fuses and miniature circuit breakers with
the following properties:
Type class Requirement

Line protection types in opera- Fusing voltage ≥ nominal line voltage
tion classes gL, gG
Miniature circuit breaker of Nominal miniature circuit breaker voltage ≥ nominal
characteristics D line voltage
Adhere to the country and system specific regulations when carrying out the fusing. If
required, observe the notes in chapter UL-compliant installation.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

3 Configuration
Line components
3.11.2 Line contactor

A line contactor is used for galvanic separation of the axis system and the supply sys-
tem. The separation from the supply system is necessary for electrical work on the
axis system or due to an overtemperature of the braking resistor, for example.
Note the following requirements:
• Only use line contactors in utilization category AC-3 (IEC 158-1) or better.
• The line contactor must be installed before the line filter and the line choke.
• Do not use the line contactor for jog mode.
• Observe a minimum switch-off time of 10 s for the line contactor.
MDP power supply Operation of the MDP power supply module with 10 kW is only permitted with a line
module 10 kW contactor. Observe the permitted connection types in chapter "Protection against
thermal overload of the braking resistor" (→ 2 117).
MDP power supply Operation of the MDP power supply module ≥ 25 kW is possible without a line con-
module ≥ 25 kW tactor. In case of a defective braking transistor, the supply system rectifier is locked in-
ternally and the energy flow to the braking resistor is interrupted. Observe the permit-
ted connection types in chapter "Protection against thermal overload of the braking
resistor" (→ 2 117).
INFORMATION
The integrated lock of the supply system rectifier for MDP power supply modules ≥
25 kW does not galvanically separate the axis block from the supply system and
therefore does not de-energize it. If it is necessary to de-energize the axis block, e.g.
for electrical work, you have to switch it off with a main switch, for example. The
switch-off design is always done system-specific depending on the specific applica-
tion considering the applicable regulations.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
Line components 3
3.11.3 NF line filter
A line filter reduces interference emission via the supply system cable, which is gener-
ated by the application inverter. The line filter mainly serves to meet interference
voltage limit requirements in the frequency range from 150 kHz to 30 MHz at the line 3
connection. In addition, a line filter dampens the interference from the supply system
affecting the application inverter. The selection of the line filter depends on the nom-
inal line current and the line voltage of the frequency inverter.
To achieve interference emission category C2 according to EN 61800‑1, a line filter
must be installed.
Do not switch between the NF... line filter and inverter.
For more information line filter section, refer to the chapter "Maximum number of axis
modules and total cable length" (→ 2 111).
The line filter has to be selected according to the following table.
Technical data
Part number 17983789 17983797
Nominal line voltage VN Maximum 3 × AC 500 V, 50/60 Hz
Nominal current IN 42 A
Terminal contacts L1/L2/L3 - L1'/L2'/L3' 2.5 – 16 mm2
Tightening torque L1/L2/L3 - L1'/L2'/L3' 2 - 4 Nm 2 - 2.3 Nm
Degree of protection IP20 according to EN 60529
Weight 3 kg 4.5 kg
Assignment to MDP90A- 0100, 0250
23085711/EN – 03/2017

3 Configuration
Line components
3.11.4 ND line choke

The main reason for using line chokes is the reduction of grid disturbances that may
occur due to harmonic currents. In addition, line chokes improve the overvoltage pro-
tection.
The line choke has to be selected according to the following table.
Technical data
Part number 17983800 17983819
Nominal line voltage VN Maximum 3 × AC 230 V - 500 V, 50/60 Hz
Nominal current IN 30 A 42 A
Nominal inductance 0.1 mH 0.045 mH
Terminal contacts L1/L2/L3 - L1'/L2'/L3' 0.2 – 10 mm2 2.5 – 16 mm2
Tightening torque L1/L2/L3 - L1'/L2'/L3' 1.2 – 2 Nm 2.5 Nm
Degree of protection IPXXB to EN 60529
Weight 1.95 kg 1.82 kg
Assignment to MDP90A- 0100 0250
3.11.5 Residual current device
WARNING
No protection against electric shock if an incorrect type of residual current device is
used.
Severe or fatal injuries.
• Use only universal current sensitive residual current devices of type B for invert-
ers.
• Inverters generate a DC current component in the leakage current and can signi-
ficantly reduce the sensitivity of a residual current device of type A. A type A resid-
ual current device is thus not permitted as protection device.
• If the use of a residual current device is not mandatory according to the standards,
SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends not to use a residual current device.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
24 V supply voltage selection 3
3.12 24 V supply voltage selection
The modules of the axis system require an external 24 V voltage supply for the elec-
tronics and the brake supply. 3
The 24 V voltage supply takes place via the integrated DC 24 V connection. The sup-
ply of the 24 V voltage supply takes place via the X5 connection.
24V
X5
24V [1]
X5
GND GND [2]
+ UZ
+UZ
+UZ
+UZ +UZ +UZ
X4 X4 X4
-UZ
- UZ
-UZ
-UZ -UZ -UZ
[1] X5: Connection DC 24 V supply voltage

[2] X5: GND connection
INFORMATION
The current carrying capacity of the integrated DC 24 V connection (X5) is max. 40 A.
INFORMATION
SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends using safety measures for the 24 V supply accord-

ing to applicable installation specifications.
3.12.1 Project planning for 24 V supply power

For dimensioning the 24 V supply voltage, it is necessary to know the power con-
sumption of the entire axis system. The 24 V voltage supply must provide the sum of
all power ratings of the supplied units in the axis system.
INFORMATION
The power peaks during switch-on (caused by internal capacitances present in the
devices) must not be taken into consideration as those capacitances are very small.
Commercially available switched-mode power supplies can reliably switch on the
maximally occurring capacities in the axis system.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

3 Configuration
24 V supply voltage selection
3.12.2 Supply of the 24 V supply voltage

Depending on the determined current demand, one- or two-sided supply is required.
• For currents ≤ 40 A one-sided supply applies.
• For currents > 40 A two-sided supply applies.
The current demand is calculated via the total power consumption of the modules in
the axis system (on 24 V level).
I = Ptotal/Uexternal
For the calculation of the total power consumption, see chapter "Power consumption
of the 24 V supply" (→ 2 128).
One-sided supply
X31
X31
X20_1
X20_2
X20
X21_1
X21_2
X21
S1 S1
S2 S2
RUN ERR RUN ERR
[1]
X15_1
X15_2
X15
[2]
24V
X5
24V
X5
+
GND GND –
+ UZ
+UZ
+UZ
+UZ +UZ +UZ
X4 X4 X4
-UZ
- UZ
-UZ
-UZ -UZ -UZ
9007214899800459
23085711/EN – 03/2017
[1] External DC 24 V voltage supply

[2] DC 24 V fuse

Configuration
Two-sided supply
X31
X31
X31
X20_1
X20_2
X20_1
X20_2
X20
X21_1
X21_2
X21_1
X21_2
X21 S1 S1 S1
S2 S2 S2
RUN ERR RUN ERR RUN ERR
X15_1
X15_2
X15_1
X15_2
X15
[1]
[2]
24V
X5
24V
X5
24V
X5
+
GND GND GND –
[2]
+
–
+ UZ
+UZ
+ UZ
+UZ
+UZ +UZ +UZ +UZ
X4 X4 X4 X4
-UZ
- UZ
- UZ
-UZ
-UZ -UZ -UZ -UZ
9007214899809291

[2] DC 24 V fuse
The breakpoint of the electronics supply with two-sided supply must be arranged so
that the current loads of the two segments are split evenly.
If you use 2 separate power supply units, make sure that both power supply outputs
have the same potential.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

3 Configuration
3.12.3 Power consumption of the 24 V supply

Tables for the typical power consumption of the 24 V supply depending on the used
modules and the installed options.
Power consump- Module Power consumption
tion of the modules (without I/O, motor encoder, motor
brake)
W
Axis modules
MDA90A-0020, 0040, 0080, 0120 20
MDA90A-0160 22
MDA90A-0240 25
MDA90A-0320, 0480 30
MDA90A-0640, 1000 75
MDA90A-1400, 1800 115
MDD90A-0020, 0040
20
MDD90A-0020, 00401)
MDD90A-0080 1)
25
Power supply modules
MDP90A-0100, 0250 15
MDP90A-0500, 0750 20
MDP90A-1100 30
1) MDD not option-capable
Power consump- Option card Power consumption

tion of the option W
cards CIO21A 1.2
CID21A 0.4
CES11A 0.8
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Configuration
3.12.4 Power consumption of the directly connected 24 V brakes
Brake type: BP1 BS2 BK01 BK02 BK03 BK04 BK07
CMP motor assign- CMP71S/M/L CMP40S/M CMP50S/M CMP63S CMP50L CMP63M/L
ment 3
CMSB motor as- CMSB71 S/M/L CMS71L – – CMSB50S/M/L CMSB63S/M
signment
CMSMB motor as- CMSMB71 with CMSMB50 CMSMB63 with CMSMB50 with CMSMB63
signment CMP71S/M/L with CMP50S/ CMP63S CMP50L with CMP63M/
M L
Power consumption 20 17 9 7 14 14 15
in W
It is not necessary to consider a DC 24 V power reserve for releasing the brake.
3.12.5 Requirements on the tolerance of the 24 V voltage supply

Three cases have to be distinguished when configuring the 24 V voltage supply.
1. The control of the BP and BK holding brake takes place directly via the brake out-
put of the axis module.
The following servo brakemotors are connected or there is a mixed mode with the
motors mentioned in case 2. The brake cable length is < 25 m:
• CMP40 / 50 / 63 / 71 and CMS / CMSB50 – 71
2. The brake output is used as control output (e.g. brake control via a BMK, BME
brake rectifier).
3. No motor with brake connected.
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3

Voltage supply 24 V - 0%, +10% 24 V -10%, +20% 24 V -10%, +20%
For detailed information about direct 24 V brake supply, refer to chapter "Direct control
DC 24 V brake" (→ 2 271).
23085711/EN – 03/2017

3 Configuration
3.12.6 Project planning example

The following example shows the configuration of the 24 V voltage supply of an axis
system.
MDP 10 kW MDD 8 A MDD 8 A MDD 4 A MDA 4 A MDA 2 A

G1
G2
[2] [1]
+ 24V 24V 24V 24V
+
- 24V 24V 24V 24V –
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8
9007218098780299
[1] 24 V voltage supply

[2] DC 24 V fuse
Modules and devices used in the axis system:
• 8 brakemotors – 4 × CMP63S with BK03, 4 × CMP50M with BK02
• 8 motor encoders in the basic device
• 2 external encoders with CES11A option
• 8 × 4 digital outputs in the axis modules
• MDP power supply module 10 kW
• 2 MDD double-axis modules 8 A
• 1 MDD double-axis module 4 A
• 1 MDA single-axis module 4 A
• 1 MDA single-axis module 2 A
The total power consumption is calculated from the total power consumption of all
used modules, option cards and externally connected devices.
• 4 BK03 brakes: 4 × 14 W = 56 W
• 4 BK02 brakes: 4 × 7 W = 28 W
• 8 motor encoders: 8 × 5 W = 40 W
• 2 external encoders: 2 × 12 W = 24 W
• 2 CES11A option cards: 2 × 0.8 W = 1.6 W
• 8 × 4 digital outputs in the axis modules 8 × 4 × 1.2 W = 38.4 W
• 1 MDP power supply module 10 kW: 15 W
• 2 MDD double-axis modules 8 A: 2 × 22 W = 44 W
23085711/EN – 03/2017
• 1 MDD double-axis module 4 A: 20 W

• 1 MDA single-axis module 4 A: 20 W
• 1 MDA single-axis module 2 A: 20 W
The external 24 V supply must be selected to ensure that the sum of the individual
power levels is 307 W, and the resulting current is 12.8 A.
Check of one or two-sided supply: 12.8 A < 40 A → one-sided supply.

Arrangement of the modules within the axis system
Configuration
3
3.13 Arrangement of the modules within the axis system
INFORMATION 3
Observe that an axis system consists of a supply module and a maximum of 15 axis
modules (single-axis modules or double-axis modules).
3.13.1 Arrangement of the axis modules within the axis system

When arranging the axis system, observe that the nominal output current IN of the axis
modules must decrease from left to right. The axis module with the highest nominal
output current must be on the right side of the power supply module. All remaining
axis modules are installed in descending order regarding their nominal output current.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
1
5
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
1
5
2
3
4
5
27021611768386187
[1] Power supply module

23085711/EN – 03/2017
[2] Example: MDA90A-0120... single-axis module: IN = 12 A

[3] Example: MDD90A-0040... double-axis module: IN = 2 × 4 A = 8 A
In one axis system, up to 15 axis modules can be used, both as single-axis modules
and double-axis modules.

4 Prefabricated cables
Meaning of the symbols
4.1 Meaning of the symbols

Icon Meaning
Connection cables: Connector → connector for fixed installation
Connection cable extension: Connector → connector for fixed in-
stallation
Connection cables: Connector → encoder connection cover for
fixed installation
Connection cables: Connector → encoder connection cover for
cable carrier installation
Connection cables: Connector → connector for cable carrier install-
ation
Connection cable extension: Connector → connector for cable car-
rier installation
Connection cables: Connector → open end for fixed installation
Connection cables: Connector → open end for cable carrier install-
ation
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Prefabricated cables
Power cables for CMP.. motors 4
4.2 Power cables for CMP.. motors
4.2.1 Overview
CMP(Z)../SM.. 4
--> [2]
--> [2]
--> [1]
--> [1]
X31
X31
X20_1
X20_2
X20
X21_1
X21_2
X21
S1 S1
S2 S2
RUN ERR RUN ERR
X2
X15_1
X15_2
X15
24V
X5
GND
+ UZ
+UZ
+UZ +UZ
X4 X4
- UZ
-UZ
-UZ -UZ
--> [3]
--> [5]
--> [3]
--> [5]
--> [4]
--> [4]
--> [4]
--> [4]
CMP../SB.. /BK.. CMP(Z)../SB.. /BY..

CMP../SB.. /BP..
9007214010255627
23085711/EN – 03/2017
[1] Motor cable ../SM.. (→ 2 134) [4] Brakemotor extension cable ../SB.. for /BK, /BP
and /BY brake (→ 2 138)
[2] Motor extension cable ../SM.. (→ 2 135) [5] Brakemotor cable ../SB.. for brake /BY (→ 2 137)
[3] Brakemotor cable ../SB.. for brake /BK
and /BP (→ 2 136)

Power cables for CMP.. motors
4.2.2 Motor cable with connector on motor end
Motor cable illustration
4818831115
Types of CMP.. motor cables
Plug connector Number of cores and cable cross Part number Installation type
section
SM11 4 × 1.5 mm2 05904544 Fixed installation
SM11 4 × 1.5 mm2 05906245 Cable carrier installation
SM12 4 × 2.5 mm 2
05904552 Fixed installation
SM14 4 × 4 mm2
SM14 4 × 4 mm2 05904803 Cable carrier installation
SMB6 4 × 6 mm2
SMB6 4 × 6 mm2 13350293 Cable carrier installation
SMB10 4 × 10 mm2 13350277 Fixed installation
SMB10 4 × 10 mm 2
13350307 Cable carrier installation
SMB16 4 × 16 mm2 13350285 Fixed installation
SMB16 4 × 16 mm 2
SMC16 4 × 16 mm2 18148476 Fixed installation
SMC16 4 × 16 mm 2
SMC25 4 × 25 mm2 18148581 Cable carrier installation
SMC35 4 × 35 mm 2
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Illustration of motor extension cable
X Y
4818839179 4
Types of CMP.. motor extension cables
section
SM14 4 × 4 mm 2
SMB10 4 × 10 mm 2
SMC16 4 × 16 mm 2
SMC25 4 x 25 mm 2
SMC35 4 x 35 mm2 18156835 Cable carrier installation
23085711/EN – 03/2017

4.2.3 Brakemotor cables for BP/BK brake with connector at motor end
Figure of CMP.. brakemotor cables

[5]
[1]
[2] [6]
500 ±5
[3]
[4]
4818640779
Types of CMP.. brakemotor cables
section
SB11 4 × 1.5 mm2 + 3 × 1 mm2 13354345 Fixed installation
SB11 4 × 1.5 mm + 3 × 1 mm
2 2
SB12 4 × 2.5 mm + 3 × 1 mm
2 2
SB12 4 × 2.5 mm2 + 3 × 1 mm2 13354396 Cable carrier installation
SB14 4 × 4 mm + 3 × 1 mm
2 2
SB14 4 × 4 mm2 + 3 × 1 mm2 13421603 Cable carrier installation
SBB6 4 × 6 mm + 3 × 1.5 mm
2 2
SBB6 4 × 6 mm2 + 3 × 1.5 mm2 13350234 Cable carrier installation
SBB10 4 × 10 mm + 3 × 1.5 mm
2 2
SBB16 4 × 16 mm + 3 × 1.5 mm
2 2
SBB16 4 × 16 mm + 3 × 1.5 mm
2 2
INFORMATION
As for the power cables for brakemotors with BP/BK brake only two signal cables are
required, the third signal core is cut off during cable assembly.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

4.2.4 Brakemotor cables for BY brake with connector at motor end
Figure of CMP.. brakemotor cables
4
X
5 0 0 ±5
14824163467
Types of CMP.. brakemotor cables
section
SB11 4 × 1.5 mm2 + 3 × 1 mm2 13354272 Fixed installation
SB12 4 × 2.5 mm + 3 × 1 mm
2 2
SB14 4 × 4 mm + 3 × 1 mm
2 2
SB14 4 × 4 mm2 + 3 × 1 mm2 13354329 Cable carrier installation
SBB6 4 × 6 mm + 3 × 1.5 mm
2 2
SBB10 4 × 10 mm2 + 3 × 1.5 mm2 13350137 Fixed installation
SBB10 4 × 10 mm + 3 × 1.5 mm
2 2
SBB16 4 × 16 mm2 + 3 × 1.5 mm2 13350145 Fixed installation
SBB16 4 × 16 mm + 3 × 1.5 mm
2 2
SBC16 4 × 16 mm2 + 3 × 1.5 mm2 18148514 Fixed installation
SBC16 4 × 16 mm + 3 × 1.5 mm
2 2
23085711/EN – 03/2017

4.2.5 Extension cables BP/BK and BY brakes
Illustration of brakemotor extension cable
X Y
4818839179
Types of CMP.. brakemotor extension cables
section
SB14 4 × 4 mm + 3 × 1 mm
2 2
SBB10 4 × 10 mm + 3 × 1.5 mm
2 2
SBC16 4 × 16 mm + 3 × 1.5 mm
2 2
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Encoder cables for CMP.. motors 4
4.3 Encoder cables for CMP.. motors
4.3.1 Overview
CMP(Z).. /SM.. 4
CMP(Z).. /SB..
CMP(Z).. /KKS
CMP(Z).. /KK /RH1M
/RH1M
/KK
01995421
/KKS
01995413
13356356 13327429
13356364 13327437
X31
X31
X20_1
X20_2
X20
X15
X21_1
X21_2
X21
S1 S1
S2 S2
X17
RUN ERR RUN ERR
X15_1
X15_2
X15
24V
X5
GND
+ UZ
+UZ
+UZ +UZ
X4 X4
- UZ
-UZ
-UZ -UZ
13324535
13356291
13324551
13356305
/KK
01995391
01995405
CMP(Z).. /KK
/AK0H /KKS
/EK1H
/AK1H CMP(Z).. /SM..
CMP(Z).. /SB..
23085711/EN – 03/2017
CMP(Z).. /KKS
/AK0H
/EK1H
/AK1H
9007214015841035

Encoder cables for CMP.. motors
4.3.2 Resolver
Illustration of RH1M resolver cable
X
Y
4819185931
Types of RH1M resolver cables
Number of cores and cable cross section Part number Installation type
5 × 2 × 0.25 mm 2
5 × 2 × 0.25 mm2 13327437 Cable carrier installation
Illustration of RH1M extension cable
X Y
4819192715
Types of RH1M extension cables
5 × 2 × 0.25 mm 2
Illustration of RH1M resolver cable for terminal box
4838463371
RH1M resolver cables for terminal box
5 × 2 × 0.25 mm 2
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Encoder cables for CMP.. motors 4
4.3.3 HIPERFACE® encoders
Illustration of HIPERFACE® encoder cable
X 4
Y
4819185931
Types of HIPERFACE® encoder cables
4 × 2 × 0.25 mm + 2 × 0.5 mm
2 2
4 × 2 × 0.25 mm2 + 2 × 0.5 mm2 13324551 Cable carrier installation
Illustration of HIPERFACE® encoder extension cable
X Y
4819207051
Types of HIPERFACE® encoder extension cables
6 × 2 × 0.25 mm2
Illustration of HIPERFACE® encoder cable for terminal box
4838486411
Types of HIPERFACE® encoder cables for terminal box
6 × 2 × 0.25 mm 2
6 × 2 × 0.25 mm 2
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Single-cable technology for CMP.. motors
4.4 Single-cable technology for CMP.. motors
4.4.1 Overview
CMP(Z)../SH..
--> [2]
X31
X31
X20_1
X20_2
X20
X21_1
X21_2
X21
--> [1] S1
S2
RUN ERR
S1
S2
RUN ERR
X2
X15_1
X15_2
X15
24V
X5
GND
+ UZ
+UZ
+UZ +UZ
X4 X4
- UZ
-UZ
-UZ -UZ
--> [1]
CMP../SH.. /BK..
CMP../SH.. /BP..
CMP(Z)../SH.. /BY..
--> [2]
9007215244070283
[1] Motor/brakemotor cable [2] Extension cable
4.4.2 Types of motor/brakemotor cable
Plug connector Number of cores and cable cross section Part number Installation type
SH11 4 × 1.5 mm2 + 3 × 1 mm2 + 4 × 0.34 mm2 18177018
SH12 4 × 2.5 mm + 3 × 1 mm + 4 × 0.34 mm
2 2 2
18177026
Cable carrier installa-
SH14 4 × 4 mm2 + 3 × 1 mm2 + 4 × 0.34 mm2 18177034
tion
SHB6 4 × 6 mm2 + 3 × 1.5 mm2 + 4 × 0.34 mm2 18177042
SHB10 4 × 10 mm2 + 3 × 1.5 mm2 + 4 × 0.34 mm2 18177050
4.4.3 Types of extension cables
Plug connector Number of cores and cable cross section Part number Installation type
23085711/EN – 03/2017
SH11 4 × 1.5 mm2 + 3 × 1 mm2 + 4 × 0.34 mm2 18177069

SH12 4 × 2.5 mm + 3 × 1 mm + 4 × 0.34 mm
2 2 2
18177077
Cable carrier installa-
SH14 4 × 4 mm + 3 × 1 mm + 4 × 0.34 mm
2 2 2
18177085
tion
SHB6 4 × 6 mm2 + 3 × 1.5 mm2 + 4 × 0.34 mm2 18177093
SHB10 4 × 10 mm + 3 × 1.5 mm + 4 × 0.34 mm
2 2 2
18177107

Power cables for CFM.. motors 4
4.5 Power cables for CFM.. motors
4.5.1 Overview
CFM.. /SM.. 4
--> [2]
--> [2]
--> [1]
--> [1] X31
X31
X20_1
X20_2
X20
X21_1
X21_2
X21
S1 S1
S2 S2
RUN ERR RUN ERR
X2
X15_1
X15_2
X15
24V
X5
GND
+ UZ
+UZ
+UZ +UZ
X4 X4
- UZ
-UZ
-UZ -UZ
--> [3]
--> [3]
--> [4]
--> [4]
23085711/EN – 03/2017
CFM.. /SB.. /BR..

9007214064524299
[1] Motor cable ../SM.. (→ 2 144) [3] Brakemotor cable ../SB.. /BR (→ 2 146)
[2] Motor extension cable ../ [4] Brakemotor extension cable ../SB.. /BR (→ 2 147)
SM.. (→ 2 145)

Power cables for CFM.. motors
4.5.2 Motor cable
Motor cable illustration
4836649099
Motor cable types

The cables are equipped with a connector for motor connection and conductor end
sleeves for inverter connection.
section
SM51/SM61 4 × 1.5 mm2 01991795 Fixed installation
SM51/SM61 4 × 1.5 mm2 13331140 Cable carrier installation
SM52/SM62 4 × 2.5 mm 2
SM52/SM62 4 × 2.5 mm2 13331159 Cable carrier installation
SM54/SM64 4 × 4 mm2 01991833 Fixed installation
SM54/SM64 4 × 4 mm2
SM56/SM66 4 × 6 mm2 0199185X Fixed installation
SM56/SM66 4 × 6 mm2
SM59/SM69 4 × 10 mm 2
23085711/EN – 03/2017

4.5.3 Motor extension cable
Illustration of motor extension cable
X Y
4838345099
Types of motor extension cables

The cables are equipped with a connector and adapter for extending the CFM motor
cable.
section
SM51/SM61 4 × 1.5 mm 2
SM52/SM62 4 × 2.5 mm 2
SM54/SM64 4 × 4 mm 2
SM56/SM66 4 × 6 mm 2
SM59/SM69 4 × 10 mm2 0199557X Fixed installation
SM59/SM69 4 × 10 mm 2
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Power cables for CFM.. motors
4.5.4 Brakemotor cable
Illustration of brakemotor cable
500 ±5
4838352907
Types of brakemotor cables
section
SB51/SB61 4 × 1.5 mm2 + 3 × 1.0 mm2 01991892 Fixed installation
SB51/SB61 4 × 1.5 mm2 + 3 × 1.0 mm2 13331167 Cable carrier installation
SB52/SB62 4 × 2.5 mm + 3 × 1.0 mm
2 2
SB52/SB62 4 × 2.5 mm2 + 3 × 1.0 mm2 13331175 Cable carrier installation
SB54/SB64 4 × 4 mm + 3 × 1.0 mm
2 2
SB54/SB64 4 × 4 mm2 + 3 × 1.0 mm2 01991949 Cable carrier installation
SB56/SB66 4 × 6 mm + 3 × 1.5 mm
2 2
SB56/SB66 4 × 6 mm2 + 3 × 1.5 mm2 01991965 Cable carrier installation
SB59/SB69 4 × 10 mm2 + 3 × 1.5 mm2 01991973 Fixed installation
SB59/SB69 4 × 10 mm + 3 × 1.5 mm
2 2
23085711/EN – 03/2017

4.5.5 Brakemotor extension cables
Illustration of brakemotor extension cable
X Y
4838345099
Types of brakemotor extension cables
section
SK51/SK61 4 × 1.5 mm2 + 3 × 1.0 mm2 0199199X Fixed installation
SK51/SK61 4 × 1.5 mm2 + 3 × 1.0 mm2 13331205 Cable carrier installation
SK52/SK62 4 × 2.5 mm + 3 × 1.0 mm
2 2
SK52/SK62 4 × 2.5 mm2 + 3 × 1.0 mm2 13331213 Cable carrier installation
SK54/SK64 4 × 4 mm2 + 3 × 1.0 mm2 01992031 Fixed installation
SK54/SK64 4 × 4 mm + 3 × 1.0 mm
2 2
0199204X Cable carrier installation
SK56/SK66 4 × 6 mm + 3 × 1.5 mm
2 2
SK59/SK69 4 × 10 mm + 3 × 1.5 mm
2 2
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Encoder cables for CFM.. motors
4.6 Encoder cables for CFM.. motors
4.6.1 Overview
CFM.. /SM..
CFM.. /KK CFM.. /SB..
/RH1M CFM.. /KK5
/RH1L CFM.. /KK6
/RH1M
/KK /RH1L
01995421
01995413
01995898 13327429
13327437
X31
X31
01995901
X20_1
X20_2
X20
X21_1
X21_2
X21
X15 S1
S2
RUN ERR
S1
S2
RUN ERR
X15_1
X15_2
X15
24V
X5
X17
GND
+ UZ
+UZ
+UZ +UZ
X4 X4
- UZ
-UZ
-UZ -UZ
13322535
13324578
13324551
13324543
01995391
/KK
01995405
CFM.. /SM..
CFM.. /KK CFM.. /SB..
/ES1H CFM.. /KK5
/AS1H CFM.. /KK6
/EK1H /ES1H
/AK1H /AS1H
/EV1H /EK1H
/AV1H /AK1H
23085711/EN – 03/2017
/EV1H
/AV1H
9007214064533131

Encoder cables for CFM.. motors 4
4.6.2 Resolver
Illustration of RH1M/RH1L resolver cable
X 4
Y
4819185931
Types of RH1M/RH1L resolver cables
5 × 2 × 0.25 mm2
Illustration of RH1M/RH1L extension cable
X Y
4819192715
Types of RH1M/RH1L extension cables
5 × 2 × 0.25 mm 2
Illustration of RH1M/RH1L resolver cable for terminal box
4838463371
Types of RH1M/RH1L resolver cables for terminal box
5 × 2 × 0.25 mm 2
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Encoder cables for CFM.. motors
4.6.3 HIPERFACE® encoders
Illustration of HIPERFACE® encoder cable
X
Y
4819185931
Types of HIPERFACE® encoder cables
Number of cores and cable cross section Part number Routing

6 × 2 × 0.25 mm2
Illustration of HIPERFACE® encoder extension cable
X Y
4819207051
Types of HIPERFACE® encoder extension cables

6 × 2 × 0.25 mm 2
Illustration of HIPERFACE® encoder cable for terminal box
4838486411
Types of HIPERFACE® encoder cables for terminal box

5 × 2 × 0.25 mm 2
5 × 2 × 0.25 mm 2
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Encoder cables for DR.. motors 4
4.7 Encoder cables for DR.. motors
4.7.1 Overview
DR..315 4
/EH7S
13602659
13623206
X31
X31
X20_1
X20_2
X20
X21_1
X21_2
X21
S1 S1
S2 S2
RUN ERR RUN ERR
X15
X15_1
X15_2
X15
X17 24V
X5
GND
+ UZ
+UZ
+UZ +UZ
X4 X4
- UZ
-UZ
-UZ -UZ
13621998
13623192 13617621 13622021
13621971 13617648 13622048
13621963
DR..71 – 132 DR..160 – 225 DR..71 – 132 DR..160 – 225 DR..315

/ES7S /ESGS 13623184 /ES7S /ESGS /AH7Y
/ES7R /ESGR /ES7R /ESGR
/ES7C /EG7C /ES7C /EG7C
/AS7W /AG7W /AS7W /AG7W
/AS7Y /AG7Y /AS7Y /AG7Y
9007214071050635
23085711/EN – 03/2017
SSI encoders can only be evaluated with the CES11A (X17) multi-encoder card.

Encoder cables for DR.. motors
4.7.2 Encoder cable with connection cover and D-sub
Illustration of encoder cable
14818281099
Types of encoder cables and encoders
6 × 2 × 0.25 mm2 13617621 Fixed installation
6 × 2 × 0.25 mm 2
Encoder types DR.71 – 132 DR.160 – 280

Sine encoder ES7S EG7S
TTL ES7R EG7R
RS485 AS7W AG7W
23085711/EN – 03/2017

4.7.3 Encoder cable with conductor end sleeves and D-sub
14818291467
Types of encoder cables and encoders
6 × 2 × 0.25 mm2 Fixed installation
6 × 2 × 0.25 mm2 Cable carrier installation

TTL ES7R EG7R
RS485 AS7W AG7W
4.7.4 Encoder cable with M23 and D-sub
14818370059
Types of encoder cables
5 × 2 × 0.25 mm 2
Encoder types DR.315

23085711/EN – 03/2017
Sine encoder EH7S

Encoder cables for DR.. motors
4.7.5 Encoder extension cable with connection cover and M23
Illustration of encoder extension cable
14818380043
Types of encoder extension cables
6 × 2 × 0.25 mm2

TTL ES7R EG7R
RS485 AS7W AG7W
4.7.6 Encoder extension cable with conductor end sleeves and M23
14818388875

TTL ES7R EG7R
RS485 AS7W AG7W
23085711/EN – 03/2017

4.7.7 Encoder extension cable with two M23
X
4
Y
14818397963
6 × 2 × 0.25 mm2
6 × 2 × 0.25 mm2

TTL ES7R EG7R
RS485 AS7W AG7W
4.7.8 Encoder extension cable with M23 and D-sub
14818406795

TTL ES7R EG7R
RS485 AS7W AG7W
23085711/EN – 03/2017

System bus and module bus cable
4.8 System bus and module bus cable

The RJ45 connectors of the system bus and module bus cables, the connectors that
can be preassembled in the field, and the sockets in the application inverters have
been checked for mechanical stability and contact reliability by SEW‑EURODRIVE.
SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends to use the system bus and module bus cables listed
below, and the connectors that can be preassembled in the field. If other cables and
connectors are used, SEW‑EURODRIVE does not make any statements regarding the
quality of the plug-in connection.
NOTICE
Use of wrong cables.
Damage to the application inverter.
The system bus cables [2] must only be 4-pole cables. If an 8-pole cable is used,
malfunctions or failures may occur at the connected devices.
4.8.1 System bus and module bus cabling

Example of a system bus and module bus cabling
[2] [1] [1] [2] [1] [1] [2] [1] [2] [2] [2] [2]
[7]
Power Power
10 min 10 min
[3]
[4] [4] [6] [6]
[5]
18016992651
[1] Module bus cable, 8-pin, color: anthracite gray.

[2] System bus cable, 4-pin, color: light gray.
[3] MOVI-C® CONTROLLER power UHX8x
[4] MOVIDRIVE® modular
[5] MOVIDRIVE® system with DC link connection
[6] MOVIDRIVE® system
[7] Other EtherCAT® stations at the EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS
23085711/EN – 03/2017

System bus and module bus cable 4
4.8.2 System bus cable
Figure of the cable
4
[1] [2]
9007214291596811
[1] Connector red [2] Connector red

The 4-pole system bus cable [2] is used between automation components, see
figure (→ 2 156). Some of these components are listed here as examples:
• MOVI-C® CONTROLLER
• MOVIDRIVE® modular application inverter
• PC with MOVISUITE® engineering software
• MOVI‑PLC® I/O system
• Other EtherCAT® stations at the EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS
The following lengths of the system bus cable is available for fixed installation.
Cable length Part number

0.29 m 18179959
0.75 m 18167039
1.5 m 18179975
3.0 m 18167047
5m 18179983
10 m 18179991
RJ45 connector
Part number of Description Core cross section

RJ45 con-
nector
• Litz wire: AWG 22 – AWG 24
19174594 • Wire: AWG 22 – AWG 23
RJ45 connector to • Cable jacket: Ø 6.1 – 6.9 mm
IEC 60603-7, 4-pin • Litz wire: AWG 26
19174586 1)
• Wire: AWG 24
• Cable jacket: Ø 6.1 – 6.9 mm
1) Use this connector for the operation at a data cable of SEW‑EURODRIVE or when the preassembled
system cable is shortened
Plug connector characteristics:

23085711/EN – 03/2017
• Can be preassembled in the field without tools.

• Transmission category Cat. 5.
• Suitable for connecting litz wires and wires.
• UL approval.

System bus and module bus cable
Pin assignment
The prefabricated system bus cables are assigned according to EIA/TIA-568A. Also
use this assignment for prefabrication in the field.
Pin Color coding

1 white/green
2 Green
3 white/orange
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Orange
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
23085711/EN – 03/2017

System bus and module bus cable 4
4.8.3 Module bus cable
Figure
[1] [2]
4
18027071371
[1] Connector black [2] Connector red

For MOVIDRIVE® modular, the 8-core module bus cable [1] connects the power sup-
ply module to the first axis module and the axis modules to each other, see
figure (→ 2 156).
For MOVIDRIVE® system the module bus cable is used when 2 MOVIDRIVE® system
devices are connected in the DC link.
For MOVIDRIVE® modular, in addition to the system bus communication, the module
bus is routed in the cable for information inside the unit. The module bus cable is de-
livered in the length required as part of the accessories for the axis modules.
A module bus cable for MOVIDRIVE® system in the required length must be ordered
separately.
If the module bus cable for MOVIDRIVE® modular is needed as a spare part, it can be
ordered with the following part numbers.
Cable Part number Replacement cable for Cable assignment for

length MOVIDRIVE® modular MOVIDRIVE® system
0.23 m 18166989 MDA90A-0020 – 0120-.. -
MDD90A-0020 – 0040-..
0.26 m 18166997 MDA90A-0160 – 0240-.. -
MDD90A-0020 – 0080-..
0.29 m 18167004 MDP90A-0100-...-C00 MDX90A-0020 – 0160-..
MDA90A-0320 – 0480-.. to install the devices dir-
ectly next to each other
0.35 m 18167012 MDP90A-0500 – 0750-.. -
MDA90A-0640 – 1000-..
0.44 m 18167020 MDA90A-1400-.. MDX90A-0460 – 1130-..
to install the devices dir-
ectly next to each other
1.6 m 18174205 - MDX90A-.. with devices
not directly next to each
other
23085711/EN – 03/2017

5 General information
About this documentation
5.1 About this documentation
This documentation is an integral part of the product. The documentation is written for
all employees who assemble, install, start up, and service this product.
Make sure this documentation is accessible and legible. Ensure that persons respons-
ible for the machinery and its operation as well as persons who work on the product
independently have read through the documentation carefully and understood it. If you
are unclear about any of the information in this documentation or require further in-
formation, contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
5.2 Structure of the safety notes

5.2.1 Meaning of signal words
The following table shows the grading and meaning of the signal words for safety
notes.
Signal word Meaning Consequences if disregarded

DANGER Imminent hazard Severe or fatal injuries
WARNING Possible dangerous situation Severe or fatal injuries
CAUTION Possible dangerous situation Minor injuries
NOTICE Possible damage to property Damage to the product or its envir-
onment
INFORMATION Useful information or tip: Simplifies
handling of the product.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

General information
Structure of the safety notes 5
5.2.2 Structure of section-related safety notes
Section-related safety notes do not apply to a specific action but to several actions
pertaining to one subject. The hazard symbols used either indicate a general hazard
or a specific hazard.
This is the formal structure of a safety note for a specific section:
5
SIGNAL WORD
Type and source of hazard.
Possible consequence(s) if disregarded.
• Measure(s) to prevent the hazard.
Meaning of the hazard symbols

The hazard symbols in the safety notes have the following meaning:
Hazard symbol Meaning

General hazard
Warning of dangerous electrical voltage
Warning of hot surfaces
Warning of risk of crushing
Warning of suspended load
Warning of automatic restart
5.2.3 Structure of embedded safety notes

Embedded safety notes are directly integrated into the instructions just before the de-
scription of the dangerous action.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
This is the formal structure of an embedded safety note:

SIGNAL WORD Type and source of hazard. Possible consequence(s) if disreg-
arded. Measure(s) to prevent the hazard.

Rights to claim under limited warranty
5.3 Rights to claim under limited warranty

Read the information in this documentation. This is essential for fault-free operation
and fulfillment of any rights to claim under limited warranty. Read the documentation
before you start working with the product.
5.4 Content of the documentation

The current version of the documentation is the original.
This document contains additional safety-relevant information and conditions for use
in safety-related applications.
5.5 Exclusion of liability

Read the information in this documentation, otherwise safe operation is impossible.
You must comply with the information contained in this documentation to achieve the
specified product characteristics and performance features. SEW‑EURODRIVE as-
sumes no liability for injury to persons or damage to equipment or property resulting
from non-observance of these operating instructions. In such cases,
SEW‑EURODRIVE assumes no liability for defects.
5.6 Other applicable documentation

Observe the corresponding documentation for all further components.
5.7 Product names and trademarks

The brands and product names in this documentation are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective titleholders.
5.8 Copyright notice

© 2017 SEW‑EURODRIVE. All rights reserved. Unauthorized reproduction, modifica-
tion, distribution or any other use of the whole or any part of this documentation is
strictly prohibited.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

General information
Device availability 5
5.9 Device availability
This documentation lists modules of the application inverter and accessories that are
not yet available at the time of the publication of this document.
The following table lists the available modules of the application inverter. Accessories
required for the inverter operation such as braking resistors, chokes, and filters are
available. 5
Module Type designation
Power supply modules MDP90A-0100-503-4-000
MDP90A-0100-503-4-C00
MDP90A-0250-503-4-000
MDP90A-0500-503-4-000
MDP90A-0750-503-4-000
MDP90A-1100-503-4-000
Single-axis modules MDA90A-0020-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0040-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0080-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0120-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0160-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0240-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0320-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0480-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0640-503-X-S01
MDA90A-1000-503-X-S00
MDA90A-1400-503-X-S00
Double-axis modules MDD90A-0020-503-X-S00/X
MDD90A-0040-503-X-S00/X
MDD90A-0020-503-X-S00
MDD90A-0040-503-X-S00
MDD90A-0080-503-X-S00
23085711/EN – 03/2017

6 Safety notes
Preliminary information
6 Safety notes
6.1 Preliminary information
The following general safety notes have the purpose to avoid injury and damage to
property. They primarily apply to the use of products described in this documentation.
If you use additional components also observe the relevant warning and safety notes.
6.2 Operator's duties

Make sure that the basic safety notes are read and observed. Make sure that persons
responsible for the machinery and its operation as well as persons who work on the
device independently have read through the documentation carefully and understood
it. If you are unclear about any of the information in this documentation, or if you re-
quire further information, contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
The operator must ensure that the following works are only performed by qualified per-
sonnel:
• Transport
• Storage
• Setup and assembly
• Installation and connection
• Startup
• Maintenance and repair
• Shutdown
• Disassembly
• Waste disposal
Make sure persons working on the product adhere to the following regulations, re-
quirements, documents and information:
• National and regional safety and accident prevention regulations
• Warning and safety signs on the product
• All other relevant project planning documents, installation and startup instructions,
wiring diagrams and schematics
• Do not assemble, install or operate damaged products
• All specific specifications and requirements for the system
Make sure that systems with the product installed are equipped with additional monit-
oring and protection devices. Observe the applicable safety regulations and legislation
governing technical equipment and accident prevention regulations.
6.3 Target group

23085711/EN – 03/2017
Specialist for Any mechanical work may only be performed by adequately qualified personnel. Qual-
mechanical work ified personnel in the context of this documentation are persons familiar with the
design, mechanical installation, troubleshooting and maintenance of the product, who
possess the following qualifications:
• Qualification in the field of mechanics according to applicable national regulation.
• They are familiar with this documentation

Safety notes
Designated use 6
Specialist for elec- Any electronic work may only be performed by adequately skilled persons (electric-
trotechnical work ally). Qualified electricians in the context of this documentation are persons familiar
with electrical installation, startup, troubleshooting and servicing of the product who
possess the following qualifications:
• Qualification in the field of electrical engineering according to applicable national
regulation.
• They are familiar with this documentation
6
In addition to that, these persons must be familiar with the valid safety regulations and
laws, as well as with the requirements of the standards, directives and laws specified
in this documentation. The above mentioned persons must have the authorization ex-
pressly issued by the company to operate, program, configure, label and ground
devices, systems and circuits in accordance with the standards of safety technology.
Instructed persons All work in the areas of transportation, storage, operation and waste disposal must be
carried out by persons who are trained appropriately. The purpose of the instruction is
that the persons are capable of performing the required tasks and work steps in a safe
and correct manner.
6.4 Designated use

The product is intended for control cabinet installation in electrical plants or machines.
In case of installation in electrical systems or machines, startup of the product is pro-
hibited until it is determined that the machine meets the requirements stipulated in the
local laws and directives. For Europe, Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC as well as the
EMC Directive 2014/30/EU apply. Observe EN 60204-1 (Safety of machinery - elec-
trical equipment of machines). The product meets the requirements stipulated in the
Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU.
The standards given in the declaration of conformity apply to the product.
The systems can be mobile or stationary. The motors must be suitable for operation
with inverters. Do not connect any other loads to the product. Never connect capacit-
ive loads to the product.
The product can be used to operate the following motors in industrial and commercial
systems:
• AC asynchronous motors with squirrel-cage rotor
• Permanent-field AC synchronous motors
Technical data and information on the connection conditions are provided on the
nameplate and in chapter "Technical data" in the documentation. Always comply with
the data and conditions.
Unintended or improper use of the product may result in severe injury to persons and
damage to property.
6.4.1 Hoist applications

23085711/EN – 03/2017
To avoid danger of fatal injury by falling hoists, observe the following points when us-
ing the product in lifting applications:
• Use mechanical protection devices.
• Perform a hoist startup.

6 Safety notes
Functional safety technology
Application in ELSM® control mode

When the inverter is operated in ELSM® control mode, using it in lifting applications is
not permitted. In this control mode only applications of horizontal materials handling
are permitted.
6.5 Functional safety technology

The product must not perform any safety functions without a higher-level safety sys-
tem, unless explicitly allowed by the documentation.
6.6 Transport
Inspect the shipment for damage as soon as you receive the delivery. Inform the ship-
ping company immediately about any damage. If the product is damaged, it must not
be assembled, installed or started up.
Observe the following notes when transporting the device:
• Ensure that the product is not subject to mechanical impact during transportation.
• Before transportation, cover the connections with the supplied protection caps.
• Only place the product on the cooling fins or on the side without connectors during
transportation.
• Always use lifting eyes if available.
If necessary, use suitable, sufficiently dimensioned handling equipment.
Observe the information on climatic conditions in chapter "Technical data" of the docu-
mentation.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Safety notes
Installation/assembly 6
6.7 Installation/assembly
Ensure that the product is installed and cooled according to the regulations in the doc-
umentation.
Protect the product from excessive mechanical strain. The product and its mounted
components must not protrude into the path of persons or vehicles. Ensure that com-
ponents are not deformed and that insulation spaces are maintained, particularly dur-
ing transportation. Electric components must not be mechanically damaged or des- 6
troyed.
Observe the notes in the chapter "Mechanical installation" of the documentation.
6.7.1 Restrictions of use

The following applications are prohibited unless explicitly permitted:
• Use in potentially explosive areas
• Use in areas exposed to harmful oils, acids, gases, vapors, dust, and radiation
• Operation in applications with impermissibly high mechanical vibration and shock
loads in excess of the regulations stipulated in EN 61800-5-1
• Operation at installation altitudes above 3800 m above sea level
The product can be used at altitudes above 1000 m asl up to 3800 m asl under the fol-
lowing conditions:
• Taking the reduced continuous rated current into consideration, see chapter
"Technical data" of the documentation.
• Above 2000 m asl, the air and creeping distances are only sufficient for over-
voltage class II according to EN 60664. If the installation requires overvoltage cat-
egory III according to EN 60664 you have to reduce the overvoltages on the sys-
tem side from category III to II using additional external overvoltage protection.
• If a protective electrical separation is required, then implement this outside the
product at altitudes of more than 2000 m above sea level (protective separation in
accordance with EN 61800‑5‑1 and EN 60204‑1)
23085711/EN – 03/2017

6 Safety notes
Electrical connection
6.8 Electrical connection

Make yourself familiar with the applicable national accident prevention guidelines be-
fore you work on the product.
Perform electrical installation according to the pertinent regulations (e.g. cable cross
sections, fusing, protective conductor connection). The documentation at hand con-
tains additional information.
Make sure that all required covers are installed correctly after electrical installation.
Make sure that preventive measures and protection devices comply with the applic-
able regulations (e.g. EN 60204-1 or EN 61800-5-1).
6.8.1 Required preventive measure

Make sure that the product is correctly attached to the ground connection.
6.8.2 Stationary application

Necessary preventive measure for the product is:
Type of energy transfer Preventive measure

Direct power supply • Ground connection
6.8.3 Regenerative operation

The drive is operated as a generator due to the kinetic energy of the system/machine.
Before opening the connection box, secure the output shaft against rotation.
6.9 Protective separation

The product meets all requirements for protective separation of power and electronics
connections in accordance with EN 61800-5-1. To ensure protective separation, all
connected circuits must also meet the requirements for protective separation.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Safety notes
Startup/operation 6
6.10 Startup/operation
Observe the safety notes in the chapters "Startup" and "Operation" in the documenta-
tion.
Make sure that the present transport protection is removed.
Do not deactivate monitoring and protection devices of the machine or system even
for a test run.
6
Make sure the connection boxes are closed and screwed before connecting the sup-
ply voltage.
Depending on the degree of protection, products may have live, uninsulated, and
sometimes moving or rotating parts, as well as hot surfaces during operation.
Additional preventive measures may be required for applications with increased haz-
ard potential. You have to check the protection devices after each modification.
When in doubt, switch off the product whenever changes occur in relation to normal
operation. Possible changes are e.g. increased temperatures, noise, or oscillation. De-
termine the cause. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE if necessary.
When the device is switched on, dangerous voltages are present at all power connec-
tions as well as at any connected cables and terminals. This also applies even when
the product is inhibited and the motor is at standstill.
Do not separate the connection to the product during operation.
This may result in dangerous electric arcs damaging the product.
If you disconnect the product from the voltage supply, do not touch any live compon-
ents or power connections because capacitors might still be charged. Observe the fol-
lowing minimum switch-off time:
10 minutes.
Observe the corresponding information signs on the product.
The fact that the operation LED and other display elements are no longer illuminated
does not indicate that the product has been disconnected from the supply system and
no longer carries any voltage.
Mechanical blocking or internal safety functions of the product can cause a motor
standstill. Eliminating the cause of the problem or performing a reset may result in the
drive re-starting automatically. If, for safety reasons, this is not permitted for the drive-
controlled machine, first disconnect the product from the supply system and then start
troubleshooting.
Risk of burns: The surface temperature of the product can exceed 60 °C during opera-
tion.
Do not touch the product during operation.
Let the product cool down before touching it.
6.10.1 Energy storage unit

Products with a connected energy storage unit are not necessarily de-energized when
23085711/EN – 03/2017
they have been disconnected from the supply system. Usually, the energy storage unit
stores sufficient energy to continue operation of the connected motors for a limited
period of time. It is not sufficient to observe a minimum switch-off time.
Perform a shutdown as described in the documentation in chapter "Service" > "Shut-
down".

7 Unit structure, axis system structure
Connection variants

7.1 Connection variants
The MOVIDRIVE® modular application inverter can be used in the following connec-
tion variants:
• As axis system in connection with a MOVI-C® CONTROLLER.
Example of an axis system:
[1]
[2]
X31
X31
X20_1
X20_2
X20
X21_1
X21_2
X21
S1 S1
S2 S2
RUN ERR RUN ERR
X15_1
X15_2
X15
[3]
24V 24V
X5 X5
GND GND
+ UZ
+UZ
+UZ
+UZ +UZ +UZ
X4 X4 X4
-UZ
- UZ
-UZ
-UZ -UZ -UZ
[4] [5] [6]

18014411422536843
[1] Line voltage 3 × AC 380 – 500 V

[2] Industrial communication
[3] MOVI-C® CONTROLLER
[4] MDP.. power supply module
[5] MDA.. single-axis module
[6] MDD.. double-axis module
23085711/EN – 03/2017
and/or
• As axis system with additional MOVIDRIVE® system units in connection with a
MOVI-C® CONTROLLER.

Unit structure, axis system structure
Connection variants 7
[1]
[2]
7
X31
X31
X20_1
X20_2
X20
X21_1
X21_2
X21
S1 S1
S2 S2
RUN ERR RUN ERR
X15_1
X15_2
X15
[3] 24V
X5
24V
X5
GND GND
+ UZ
+UZ
+UZ
+UZ +UZ +UZ
X4 X4 X4
-UZ
- UZ
-UZ
-UZ -UZ -UZ
[7]
[4] [5] [6]

18014414329074059
[1] Line voltage 3 × AC 380 – 500 V

[2] Industrial communication
[3] MOVI-C® CONTROLLER
NOTICE
Damage to the MOVIDRIVE® modular application inverter when opening the DC link
(separate operation).
Separate operation of individual modules will damage the application inverter and is
not permitted.
Only operate the application inverter when installed in a system as illustrated above.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Nameplates
7.2 Nameplates
7.2.1 Power supply module
System nameplate
[1]
[2]
15058895499
[1] Device status

[2] Serial number
Performance data nameplate
[1]
15058904459
[1] Device status

23085711/EN – 03/2017

Nameplates 7
7.2.2 Single-axis module
System nameplate
[1]
[2]
15058946571
[1] Device status

[2] Serial number
Performance data
nameplate
[1]
15058950923
[1] Device status

23085711/EN – 03/2017

Nameplates
7.2.3 Double-axis module

System nameplate
[1]
[2]
15058955531
[1] Device status

[2] Serial number
Performance data
nameplate
[1]
15060073483
[1] Device status
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Type code 7
7.3 Type code
The following type code applies to MOVIDRIVE® modular.
Example: MDA90A-0080-503-X-S00
Product name MD • MD = MOVIDRIVE®
Device type A • A = Single-axis module
• D = Double-axis module
7
• P = Power supply module with brake chopper
Series 90 • 90 = Standard design
Version A • A = Version status A
Performance class 0080 • MDA: Nominal output current – e.g. 0080 = 8 A
• MDD: Nominal output current – e.g. 0020 = 2 × 2 A
• MDP: Nominal power – e.g. 0100 = 10 kW
Connection voltage 5 • 5 = AC 380 – 500 V
EMC variant of power 0 • 0 = Interference suppression integrated
section
Number of phases 3 • 3 = 3-phase connection type
Operating mode X • 4 = 4Q operation (with brake chopper)
• X = Not relevant
Variants 0 • 0 = not relevant
• S = Control MOVI-C® CONTROLLER
• C = Power supply module with integrated braking resistor and capacitor
Designs 00 • 00 = Standard design
Options • /X = MOVIDRIVE® modular without option card slots
The following list serves as an example:
• /CES11A = Multi-encoder card
• /CID21A, /CIO21A = I/O expansion card
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Unit structure of the MDP power supply module
7.4 Unit structure of the MDP power supply module
WARNING
Some of the modules shown in this chapter are depicted without touch guards.
Touch guards secure the live parts such as DC link, line connections and braking
resistor connections.
Uncovered power connections.
Severe or fatal injuries from electric shock.
• Never start up the application inverter without installed closed touch guards.
7.4.1 MDP90A-0100-.. (size 1)
A B C
[1]
[2] 2
X7
3
4
[12]
X3
X30 OUT
[3]
[13]
X30 IN
X1
[4] [5]
[6]
24V
[7] X5
GND
[8]
+UZ
+UZ
[9] X4
-UZ
-UZ
[10]
[11]
18014411422564235
A: View from top B: View from front C: View from bottom

[1] Terminal screw for TN/TT systems [5] 7-segment display [12] X3: Braking resistor connection
[2] X7: Temperature monitoring brak- [6] Standby display (Power) [13] X1: Line connection
23085711/EN – 03/2017
ing resistor
[3] X30 OUT: System bus [7] X5: Connection +24 V supply voltage
[4] X30 IN: System bus [8] PE connection
[9] X4: DC link connection
[10] PE connection housing
[11] Shield terminal

Unit structure of the MDP power supply module 7
7.4.2 MDP90A-0100-.. with integrated braking resistance (size 1A)
A B C
[1]
[2] 2
X7
3
4
[12]
X3
X30 OUT
[3]
[13]
X1
X30 IN
[4]
[5]
[6]
24V
[7] X5
GND
[8]
+UZ
+UZ
[9] X4
-UZ
-UZ
[10]
[11]
18014411422566667

[1] Terminal screw for TN/TT systems [5] 7-segment display [12] X3: Braking resistor connection
[2] X7: Control DC link discharge module [6] Standby display (Power) [13] X1: Line connection
[3] X30 OUT: System bus [7] X5: Connection +24 V supply voltage
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Unit structure of the MDP power supply module
7.4.3 MDP90A-0250-.. (size 2)
A B C
[10]
[1] [11]
[12]
[2] 2
X7
3
4
X30 OUT
[3]
X30 IN
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
18014411422569099

[1] Terminal screw for TN/TT systems [5] 7-segment display [10] X1: Line connection
[2] X7: Control DC link discharge module, [6] Standby display (Power) [11] X3: Braking resistor connection
temperature monitoring braking resistor
[3] X30 OUT: System bus [7] X5: Connection +24 V supply voltage [12] 3 × PE connection housing
23085711/EN – 03/2017
[10] X1: Line connection

[11] X3: Braking resistor connection
[12] 3 × PE connection housing

Unit structure of the MDA and MDD axis modules 7
7.5 Unit structure of the MDA and MDD axis modules
WARNING
Some of the modules shown in this chapter are depicted without touch guards.
Touch guards secure the live parts such as DC link, line connections and braking
resistor connections.
7
• Never start up the application inverter without installed closed touch guards.
MDA: Single-axis module

MDD: Double-axis module
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Unit structure of the MDA and MDD axis modules
7.5.1 MDA90A-0020, 0040, 0080, 0120 (size 1) – Single-axis module
A B C
[1]
X31
[5]
X10
[17]
X20
[6] [18]
1
[2] 2
3
4
5
X6 [19]
X21
X2
X30 OUT
[3] [7]
[16]
X30 IN
[4] [8] S1
S2
RUN ERR
[9]
RUN ERR
[10] [9]
[11]
X15
24V
[12] X5
GND
[13]
+UZ
+UZ
[14] X4
-UZ
-UZ
[15]
18014411422544139

[1] Terminal screw for TN/TT systems [5] X31: SEW‑EURODRIVE Service inter- [17] X10: Brake control and temper-
face ature monitoring motor
[2] X6: Connection for safe disconnection [6] X20: Digital inputs [18] PE connection housing
(STO)
[3] X30 OUT: System bus [7] X21: Digital outputs [19] X2: Motor connection
[4] X30 IN: System bus [8] EtherCAT® ID switch
[9] Status LEDs EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS "RUN",
"ERR"
[10] 7-segment display
[11] X15: Motor encoder connection
[12] X5: Connection +24 V supply voltage
[13] PE connection
23085711/EN – 03/2017

[15] Shield plate
[16] Option card slot

7.5.2 MDA90A-0160, 0240 (size 2) – Single-axis module
A B C
[1]
X31
[5]
7
X10
[17]
X20
[6]
1 [18]
2
[2] 3
4
[16]
5
X6
X21
[7] [19]
X30 OUT
[3]
X2
X30 IN
[4] [8] S1
S2
[9] RUN ERR
[10]
RUN ERR
[11] [9]
X15
[12]
[13]
+UZ
+UZ
[14] X4
-UZ
-UZ
[15]
18014411422546571

[1] Terminal screw for TN/TT systems [5] X31: SEW‑EURODRIVE service interface [17] X10: Brake control and temper-
ature monitoring motor
[2] X6: Connection for safe disconnection [6] X20: Digital inputs [18] PE connection housing
(STO)
[3] X30 OUT: System bus [7] X21: Digital outputs [19] X2: Motor connection
[4] X30 IN: System bus [8] EtherCAT ID switch
®

"ERR"
[13] PE connection
[15] Shield plate
23085711/EN – 03/2017
[16] Option card slots

7.5.3 MDA90A0-320, 0480 (size 3) – Single-axis module
A B C
[1]
X31
[5]
X10
[19]
X20
1
[6]
2
[2] 3
4
5
[18]
X6
X30 OUT
X21
[3] [7]
X30 IN
[4]
S1
[8] S2
RUN ERR
[9]
[10]
RUN ERR
[11] [9]
X15
[12]
[13]
+UZ
+UZ
X4
[14]
-UZ
-UZ
[15]
[16]
[17]
18014411422561803

[1] Terminal screw for TN/TT systems [5] X31: SEW‑EURODRIVE service interface [19] X10: Brake control and temper-
ature monitoring motor
[2] X6: Connection for safe disconnection [6] X20: Digital inputs
(STO)
[3] X30 OUT: System bus [7] X21: Digital outputs
"ERR"
[13] PE connection
23085711/EN – 03/2017

[15] X2: Motor connection
[17] Shield plate

7.5.4 MDD90A-0020, 0040 (size 1) – Double-axis module
A B C
[1]
X31
[5]
X10_1
X10_2
[16]
X20_1
X20_2
[6] [17]
1
2
[2] 3
4
5
X2_1
X2_2
X21_1
X21_2
X6_1 X6_2
X30 IN X30 OUT
[3] [7] [18]
[4] [8] S1
S2
RUN ERR
[9]
[10] RUN ERR
[9]
[11]
X15_1
X15_2
24V
[12] X5
GND
[13]
+ UZ
+UZ
[14] X4
- UZ
-UZ
[15]
18014411422539275

[1] Terminal screw for TN/TT systems [5] X31: SEW‑EURODRIVE Service in- [16] X10: 2 × brake control and temper-
terface ature monitoring motor
[2] X6: 2 × connection for safe disconnection [6] X20: 2 × digital inputs [17] PE connection housing
(STO)
[3] X30 OUT: System bus [7] X21: 2 × digital outputs [18] X2: 2 × motor connection
[9] Status LEDs EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS
"RUN", "ERR"
[10] 2 × 7-segment display
[11] X15: 2 × motor encoder connection
[13] PE connection
23085711/EN – 03/2017

[15] Shield plate

7.5.5 MDD90A-0020, 0040, 0080 (size 2) – Double-axis module
A C
B
[1]
X31
[5]
X10_1
X10_2
[17]
X20_1
X20_2
[6] [18]
1
[2] 2
3
4 [16]
X2_1
X2_2
5
X21_1
X21_2
X6_1 X6_2
[7] [19]
X30 IN X30 OUT
[3]
[4] [8] S1
S2
[9] RUN ERR
[10]
RUN ERR
[9]
[11]
X15_1
X15_2
[12] 24V
X5
GND
[13]
+ UZ
+UZ
[14] X4
- UZ
-UZ
[15]
18014411422541707

[1] Terminal screw for TN/TT systems [5] X31: SEW‑EURODRIVE service in- [17] X10: 2 × brake control and temper-
terface ature monitoring motor
[2] X6: 2 × connection for safe disconnection [6] X20: 2 × digital inputs [18] PE connection housing
(STO)
[3] X30 OUT: System bus [7] X21: 2 × digital outputs [19] X2: 2 × motor connection
[9] Status LEDs EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS
"RUN", "ERR"
[10] 2 × 7-segment display
[11] X15: 2 × motor encoder connection
23085711/EN – 03/2017
[13] PE connection
[15] Shield plate

Example of axis system connection 7
7.6 Example of axis system connection
[4] [5] [6]
X31
X31
X20_1
X20_2
X20
X21_1
X21_2
X21
S1 S1
S2 S2
RUN ERR RUN ERR
X15_1
X15_2
X15
24V 24V
[1] X5
GND
X5
GND
[2]
+ UZ
+UZ
+UZ
+UZ +UZ +UZ
[3] X4 X4 X4
-UZ
- UZ
-UZ
-UZ -UZ -UZ
9007212167793419

[2] PE connection
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Use of option cards
7.7 Use of option cards

The application inverters can have up to 2 option cards installed. The following section
describes the assignment of the slots and possible combinations of cards.
Type designation Description Slot in

MDA90A-... single-axis MDD90A-... double-axis
module module
0020 – 0120 0160 – 1800 0020 – 0040 0020 – 0080
CES11A Multi-encoder card [2] [2] - -
CID21A, CIO21A I/O expansion - [3] - -
7.7.1 Single-axis modules
MDA90A-0020, 0040, 0080, 0120 MDA90A-0160, 0240, 0320, 0640

X31
X31
X20
X20
X21
X21
[2]
[1] [1]
S1
[2]
S1
S2
RUN ERR S2 [3]
RUN ERR
X15
X15
24V
X5
GND
+UZ
+UZ
+UZ
+UZ
X4 X4
-UZ
-UZ
-UZ -UZ
9007212169660939
[1] Connector panel of basic device

[2] Safety module/additional encoder slot
23085711/EN – 03/2017
[3] I/O expansion slot

Use of option cards 7
7.7.2 Double-axis modules
MDD90A-0020, 0040 (size 1) MDD90A-0020, 0040, 0080 (size 2)
X31
X31
7
X20_1
X20_2
X20_1
X20_2
X21_1
X21_2
[2]
X21_1
X21_2
[1]
[1]
S1
S2 S1
RUN ERR S2
RUN ERR
X15_1
X15_2
X15_1
X15_2
24V
X5
GND
+ UZ
+UZ
X4
- UZ
-UZ
9007212170096139
[1] Connector panel of basic unit of the 1st or 2nd axis

[2] Safety module/additional encoder slot
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Installation accessories
8 Installation
MOVIDRIVE® modular application inverters are exclusively suitable for control cabinet
installation according to the degree of protection.
8.1 Installation accessories
8.1.1 Standard accessories

The listed standard accessories are included in the scope of delivery.
Standard accessories – mechanical accessories
Designation Power supply module Single-axis module Double-axis

module
MDP90A- MDA90A- MDD90A-
0100 0100 0250 0020, 0160, 0320, 0020, 0020,
(size 1) (size 0040, 0240 0480 0040 0040,
1A) 0080, 0080
0120
Electronics shield clamp
1×

module
MDP90A- MDA90A- MDD90A-
0100 0100 0250 0020, 0160, 0320, 0020, 0020,
(size 1) (size 0040, 0240 0480 0040 0040,
1A) 0080, 0080
0120
Power shield clamp
1×
The mechanical accessories can be ordered with the following part numbers:
Module Part number accessory pack

0100 ( size 1): 28224868
MDP90A- power supply module 0100 (size 1A): 28225198
0250: 25224507
0020, 0040, 0080, 0120: 28223756
MDA90A- single-axis module 0160, 0240: 28223756
23085711/EN – 03/2017
0320, 0480: 28220714

0020, 0040 (size 1): 28223756
MDD90A- double-axis module
0020, 0040, 0080 (size 2): 28220455

Installation
Installation accessories 8
Standard accessories – electrical accessories

module
0100 0100 0250 0020, 0160, 0320, 0020, 0020,
(size 1) (size 0040, 0240 0480 0040 0040,
1A) 0080, 0080
0120
24 V supply voltage
2× 8
module
0100 0100 0250 0020, 0160, 0320, 0020, 0020,
(size 1) (size 0040, 0240 0480 0040 0040,
1A) 0080, 0080
0120
DC link connection,
PE connection
3×

module
0100 0100 0250 0020, 0160, 0320, 0020, 0020,
(size 1) (size 0040, 0240 0480 0040 0040,
1A) 0080, 0080
0120
8-pole module bus cable,
system bus EtherCAT®/
SBusPLUS
1×

module
0100 0100 0250 0020, 0160, 0320, 0020, 0020,
(size 1) (size 0040, 0240 0480 0040 0040,
1A) 0080, 0080
0120
DC link closing cover
2×
Designation Power supply module Single-axis module

MDP90A-0250-.. MDA90A-0480-..
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Power connection closing

cover
1×

8 Installation
Installation accessories
The electrical accessories can be ordered with the following part numbers:
Module Part number

Accessory pack1) Module bus cable
MDP90A-0100 (size 1): 28224876 18166989
Power supply module MDP90A-0100 (size 1A): 28225201 18167004
MDP90A-0250: 28230027 18166989
MDA90A-0020, 0040, 0080, 0120: 28223764 18166989
MDA90A- single-axis module MDA90A-0160, 0240: 28220463 18166997
MDA90A-0320, 0480: 28225236 18167004
MDD90A-0020, 0040 (size 1): 28223764 18166989
MDD90A- double-axis module
MDD90A-0020, 0040, 0080 (size 2): 28220463 18166997
1) Accessory pack contains module bus cable
8.1.2 Optional accessories
Designation Length Connector
• 0.75 m 2 × RJ45
4-pole system bus cable, • 1.5 m
system bus EtherCAT®/ • 3m
SBusPLUS • 5m
• 10 m
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Permitted tightening torques 8
8.2 Permitted tightening torques
Screw connection Tightening torque in Nm at power supply module
MDP90A-
0100 (size 1) 0100 (size 1A) 0250 0500, 0750 1100
Line connection X1 0.5 – 0.6 3–4 18 – 22
Braking resistor connection X3 0.5 – 0.6 3–4 9 – 11
DC link connection X4 3–4
PE connection X4 3–4
Connection 24 V voltage
X5 1.2 – 1.5
supply
8
Terminal screw for TN/IT
EMC 1 – 1.2
systems
Safety cover 0.6 – 0.8 1 – 1.2
Screw connection Tightening torque in Nm at axis module

Double-axis module
MDA90A- single-axis module
MDD90A-
0020, 0040, 0160, 0240 0320, 0480 0640, 1000 1400, 0020, 0040 0020, 0040,
0080, 0120 1800 (size 1) 0080 (size
1A)
Motor connection X2 0.5 – 0.6 1.5 – 1.7 3–4 18 – 22 0.5 – 0.6 1.5 – 1.7
DC link connection X4 3–4 9 – 11 3–4
PE connection X4 3–4 3–4
Connection 24 V voltage sup-
X5 1.2 – 1.5 1.2 – 1.5
ply
Terminal screw for TN/TT
EMC 1 – 1.2 1 – 1.2
systems
PE connections
- M4 1 – 1.2 1 – 1.2
- M6 3–4 3–4
Safety cover 0.8 1 – 1.2 0.8
Installing option cards 0.6 – 0.8 0.6 – 0.8
NOTICE
Non-compliance with the stipulated tightening torques.
Possible damage to the application inverter.
• Always adhere to the stipulated tightening torques. Otherwise, excessive heat
can develop which would damage the application inverter.
• Exceeding the tightening torques may result in a rupture of the screw.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Mechanical installation
8.3 Mechanical installation
CAUTION
Risk of injury to persons and damage to property.
Never install defective or damaged application inverters.
• Before installing modules, check them for external damage. Replace any dam-
aged modules.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to property due to mounting surface with poor conductivity.
• The mounting plate in the control cabinet must be conductive over a large area
for the mounting surface of the application inverter (metallically pure, good con-
ductivity). EMC compliant installation of the application inverter can only be ac-
complished with a mounting plate that is conductive over a large area.
8.3.1 Hole pattern

Preparing the con- You can prepare the control cabinet for the installation of differently assembled axis
trol cabinet systems by drilling tapped holes every 30 mm for mounting the modules. The modules
can be attached to this grid irrespective of their width, see figure below.
Dimensions
Device base plate
Modules Dimensions of the device base plate in mm
A B C D E F G H
MDP90A-0100 (size 1) 60 30 355 383 19 15 7 13
MDP90A-0100 (size 1a) 120 90 355 383 19 15 7 13
MDP90A-0250 (size 2) 60 30 455 483 19 15 7 13
MDP90A-0500, 0750 (size 3) 150 120 433 473 28 15 7 13
MDA90A-0020, 0040, 0080, 0120 (size 1) 60 30 355 383 19 15 7 13
MDA90A-0160, 0240 (size 2) 90 60 355 383 19 15 7 13
MDA90A-0320, 0480 (size 3) 90 30 455 483 19 15 7 13
MDA90A-0640, 1000 (size 5) 150 120 455 483 19 15 7 13
MDD90A-0020, 0040 (size 1) 60 30 355 383 19 15 7 13
MDD90A0020, 0040, 0080 (size 2) 90 60 355 383 19 15 7 13
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Mechanical installation 8
Mounting grid
A
F B
E G
M6
30
H
8
D
27021610488337547
For dimension sheets of the application inverter, refer to chapter "Technical

data" (→ 2 43).
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Mechanical installation
8.3.2 Minimum clearance and mounting position

When installing the modules in the control cabinet, observe the following:
• To ensure unobstructed cooling, leave a minimum clearance of 100 mm above
and below the module housings. Make sure air circulation in the clearance is not
impaired by cables or other installation equipment.
• Make sure that the units are not subjected to heated air from nearby components.
• The axis system must be assembled without gaps.
• Install the modules only vertically. You must not install them horizontally, tilted or
upside down.
INFORMATION
Special bending spaces are required according to EN 61800‑5‑1 for cables with a
cross section of 10 mm2 and larger. This means the clearance must be increased if
required.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Covers 8
8.4 Covers
8.4.1 Covers
All MDA and MDD axis modules of the application inverter are equipped with a safety
cover [1], see following figures.
Removing the
safety cover
1
2
3
4
1
5
2
3
4
5
2.
1.
[1]
27021611749935499
• The safety cover [1] has a latching mechanism at the bottom. Put your finger in
one of the openings of the safety cover and pull it away from the application in-
verter to unlatch it.
• Pivot the safety cover forward and lift it to remove it from the application inverter.
Installing the
safety cover
1
2
3
4
1
5
2
3
1.
4
5
2.
[1]
23085711/EN – 03/2017
9007214394878475
• Place the safety cover [1] into the upper recess and move it towards the applica-
tion inverter until it clicks into place.

8 Installation
Covers
Reinstall all safety covers [1] after installation work.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Covers 8
8.4.2 Touch guards
1
2
3
4
1
5
2
3
4
5
[2]
[1]
18014412466136331
1. Insert closing covers [2] into the touch guards covers [1] of the first and last
module in the axis system.
2. Attach the touch guard covers [1] to the modules. Insert the screws and tighten
them securely with the specified tightening torque (→ 2 191).
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Covers
8.4.3 Power connection closing cover

To maintain the degree of protection IP20, a closing cover must be inserted into the
touch guard of the following modules.
• MDP power supply module 25 kW (X1 connection)
• MDA axis module 32 A and 48 A (X2 connection)
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
18948602891
[1] Supply module touch guard

[2] Supply module closing cover
[3] Axis module touch guard
[4] Axis module closing cover
1. Remove the touch guard [1], [3] from the respective module.
2. Insert the closing cover [2], [4] into the touch guard.
3. Install the touch guard on the respective module. Insert the screws and tighten
The closing covers are included in the delivery.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Covers 8
8.4.4 Front cover
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
2.
[1]
2.
1.
[2]
27021611716110859
1. Remove the safety cover [1].

2. Push the front cover [2] forwards and downwards.
3. Re-install the safety cover [1].
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Control cabinet installation
8.5 Control cabinet installation
8.5.1 Arrangement of the axis modules within the axis system

When arranging the axis system, observe that the nominal output current IN of the axis
modules must decrease from left to right. The axis module with the highest nominal
output current must be on the right side of the power supply module. All remaining
axis modules are installed in descending order regarding their nominal output current.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
1
5
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
1
5
2
3
4
5
27021611768386187
[1] Power supply module

[3] Example: MDD90A-0040... double-axis module: IN = 2 × 4 A = 8 A
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Control cabinet installation 8
8.5.2 Installing a module
The retaining screws [1] and [2] are screwed into the prepared mounting grid in the
control cabinet but not tightened.
1. Place the module with the slotted holes on the unit base plate onto the retaining
screws [1] from the top.
1
2
3
4
1
5
2
3
4
[2]
5
2.
1
2
3
5
1
2
3
5
1.
[1]
18014412292054411
2. Push the module backwards to insert the retaining screws [2] into the upper holes
in the unit base plate.
3. Lower the module.
4. Tighten the retaining screws [1] and [2].
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
8.5.3 Installing shield plates
Bottom shield plate
1
2
3
[1]
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
1
5
2
3
4
5
[2]
[3]
23085711/EN – 03/2017
18014412292061707
1. Install the shield plate [3] from below.

Installation
Top shield plate
1. Install the top shield plate as shown.
17475894795
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
8.5.4 Removing the covers
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
2.
1.
[1]
3.
4.
[2]
18014412461367435
1. Pivot the safety cover [1] forward and lift it to remove it from the application in-
verter.
2. Move the front cover [2] upwards and remove them by pulling them away from the
application inverter.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
8.5.5 Removing the touch guards
1
8
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
1
5
2
3
4
5
[2]
[1]
18014412461372299
1. Remove the screws [1] of the touch guards of all modules.

2. Remove the touch guards [2] from all modules.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
8.5.6 Installing the busbar
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
1
5
2
3
4
5
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] 24V
X5
GND
24V
X5
GND
[2]
+ UZ
+UZ
+UZ
+UZ +UZ +UZ
[3] X4 X4 X4
-UZ
- UZ
-UZ
-UZ -UZ -UZ
18014412466138763
1. Install the busbar [1] for the 24 V supply voltage as shown in the figure. Tighten
the screws with the specified tightening torque (→ 2 191).
2. Install the busbar [2] for the PE connection as shown in the figure. Tighten the
screws with the specified tightening torque (→ 2 191).
3. Install the busbar [3] for the DC link connection X4 as shown in the figure. Tighten
the screws with the specified tightening torque (→ 2 191).
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
8.5.7 Installing touch guards
1
2
3
4
1
5
2
3
4
5
[2]
[1]
18014412466136331
1. Insert closing covers [2] into the touch guards covers [1] of the first and last
module in the axis system.
2. Attach the touch guard covers [1] to the modules. Insert the screws and tighten
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
8.5.8 Installing front covers and covers
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
2.
3.
4.
[1]
2.
1.
[2]
18014413680427147
1. Pivot the safety cover [1] forward and lift it to remove it from the application in-
verter.
2. Push the front cover [2] forwards and downwards.
3. Place the safety cover [1] into the recess and pivot it into position.
8.5.9 Removing an axis module

To remove an axis module from the axis system proceed in the opposite order com-
pared to installation, see chapter "Control cabinet installation" (→ 2 200).
Also observe the safety notes in chapter "Electrical installation" (→ 2 209).
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Electrical installation 8
8.6 Electrical installation
DANGER
Dangerous voltage levels may still be present inside the unit and at the terminal
strips up to 10 minutes after the complete axis system has been disconnected from
the supply system.
To prevent electric shocks:
8
• Disconnect the axis system from the supply system and wait 10 minutes before
removing the protective covers.
• After maintenance work, do not operate the axis system unless you have re-
placed the covers because the unit only has degree of protection IP00 without
the cover.
DANGER
A leakage current > 3.5 mA can occur during operation of the MOVIDRIVE® modular
application inverter.
To avoid shock currents according to EN 61800-5-1, strictly observe the following:
• Supply system lead < 10 mm2:
– Route a second PE conductor with the cable cross section of the supply sys-
tem lead in parallel to the protective earth via separate terminals or use a cop-
per PE conductor with a cable cross section of 10 mm2.
• Supply system lead 10 mm2 – 16 mm2:
– Route a copper protective earth conductor with the cable cross section of the
supply system lead.
• Supply system lead 16 mm2 – 35 mm2:
– Route a copper protective earth conductor with a cable cross section of
16 mm2.
• Supply system cable > 35 mm2:
– Route a copper protective earth conductor with half the cable cross section of
the supply cable.
• If an earth leakage circuit breaker is used for protection against direct and indir-
ect contact, it must be universal current sensitive (RCD type B).
INFORMATION
Installation with protective separation.
The application inverter meets all requirements for protective separation of power
and electronics connections in accordance with EN 61800-5-1. The connected signal
23085711/EN – 03/2017
circuits have to meet the requirements according to SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage)
or PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) to ensure protective separation. The installa-
tion must meet the requirements for protective separation.

8 Installation
Electrical installation
8.6.1 General information

• Take suitable measures to prevent the motor starting up inadvertently, for example
by removing the electronics terminal block X20 on the axis module. Take addi-
tional safety measures depending on the application to prevent possible injuries to
people and damage to machinery.
• SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends to use only closed cable lugs for connection to
the bolts in order to prevent litz strands from escaping.
8.6.2 Permitted voltage systems
Information on the voltage systems Information on permissibility

TN and TT systems – voltage systems with Use is possible without restrictions.
directly grounded star point.
IT systems – voltage systems with non-groun- Use is only permitted adhering to
ded star point. specific measures. The measures
are described in chapter "Use in IT
systems" (→ 2 210).
Voltage systems with grounded outer con- This is not permitted.
ductor.
8.6.3 Use in IT systems

To ensure IT system-capability, the terminal screw shown in the following figure must
be removed from all modules in the axis system. 2 terminal screws must be removed
in the power supply module of size 3 and bigger.
Power supply Power supply module Position and number of terminal screws to be re-
modules moved
MDP90A-...-503...
0010 (size 1, 1A)
0025 (size 2)
12924056459
0050, 0075 (size 3)

0110 (size 4)
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Axis modules Axis module Position and number of terminal screws to be re-
MDA90A-...-503... moved
MDD90A-...-503...
All axis modules
12924056459
INFORMATION
No EMC limits are specified for interference emission in voltage supply systems
without a grounded star point (IT systems). The efficiency of line filters is severely
limited.
SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends the use of an pulse-code-modulated insulation
monitor for operation in IT systems.
8.6.4 Line fuses, fuse types

Line fuses and miniature circuit breakers are used for protecting the supply system
cables of the axis block. In case of a fault, these components protect the power supply
module against short circuit. For fusing, use fuses and miniature circuit breakers with
the following properties:
Type class Requirement

Line protection types in opera- Fusing voltage ≥ nominal line voltage
tion classes gL, gG
Miniature circuit breaker with • Nominal miniature circuit breaker voltage ≥ nom-
characteristics B, C, D inal line voltage
• Nominal circuit breaker currents must be 10 %
above the nominal line current of the supply
module.
Adhere to the country and system specific regulations when carrying out the fusing. If
required, observe the notes in chapter UL-compliant installation.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
8.6.5 Line connection

Operation without line contactor is permitted, if the temperature of the braking resistor
is monitored at MDP 25 kW according to the specifications in chapter "Protection
against thermal overload of the braking resistor" (→ 2 236).
NOTICE
Observe a minimum switch-off time of 10 s for the application inverter. Do not turn
power on or off more than once per minute.
Irreparable damage to the application inverter or unforeseeable malfunctions.
The specified times and intervals must be observed.
• Observe the minimum switch-off time of 10 s before switching the power back on.
• Do not turn the power of the supply system on or off more than once per minute.
• The line contactor must always be located before the line filter.
• Use only line contactors in utilization category AC-3 (EN 60947-4-1) or higher.
• Do not use the line contactor for jog mode, but only for switching the application in-
verter on and off. For jog mode, the FCB 20 "Jog" must be used.
• Observe the required dimensioning of the cable cross section for UL-compliant in-
stalling.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
8.6.6 24 V supply voltage
MOVIDRIVE® modular requires an external 24 V supply voltage. Us the following in-
stallation material for the connection:
• M4 fork-type or ring lugs with insulating collar and a cable cross section of max-
imum 4 mm2,
or
• M4 tubular cable lugs with insulating heat shrink tubing and a cable cross section
of maximum 6 mm2.
8
24 V
GND
14476866443
Select the cross section of the supply cable according to the power demand of the
device to be supplied. Note the additionally required power of the directly supplied
24 V brake for CMP motors with BK or BP brake without brake control.
The maximally permitted length of the 24 V supply cable is 30 m.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
The connection is established either one-sided at the power supply module, or two-
sided at the power supply module and the last axis module in the axis system, see the
following figure.
X31
X31
X31
X20_1
X20_2
X20_1
X20_2
X20
X21_1
X21_2
X21_1
X21_2
X21
S1 S1 S1
S2 S2 S2
RUN ERR RUN ERR RUN ERR
X15_1
X15_2
X15_1
X15_2
X15
[1]
[2]
24V
X5
24V
X5
24V
X5
+
GND GND GND –
[2]
+
–
+ UZ
+UZ
+ UZ
+UZ
+UZ +UZ +UZ +UZ
X4 X4 X4 X4
-UZ
- UZ
- UZ
-UZ
-UZ -UZ -UZ -UZ
9007214899809291

[2] DC 24 V fuse
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
8.6.7 Connection of an axis system
24V 24V
[4] X5 X5 [1]
GND GND
[2]
+ UZ
+UZ
+UZ
+UZ +UZ +UZ
X4 X4 X4 [3]
-UZ
- UZ
-UZ
-UZ -UZ -UZ
27021611563769099
[1] Connection +24 V supply voltage

8
[2] PE connection
[4] Connection external 24 V supply voltage
For information on how to connect a DC link, refer to chapter "Installing the
busbar" (→ 2 206).
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
8.6.8 Installing touch guards and closing covers

All modules of the application inverter are equipped with touch guards [1] and the
outer modules of the axis system have closing covers [2], see the following figure.
1
2
3
4
1
5
2
3
4
5
[2]
[1]
18014412466136331
[1] Touch guard

[2] Closing cover
Reinstall all touch guards [1] after installation work.
Install one closing cover [2] each at the outer modules of the axis system. The closing
covers prevent that the DC link can be touched. Two closing covers are included with
each power supply module.
WARNING
Missing touch guards and closing covers.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
• Install all touch guards.

• Install closing covers at the first and last module in the axis system.

Installation
8.6.9 Motor output
NOTICE
Connecting capacitive loads to an axis module.
Destruction of the axis module.
• Only connect ohmic/inductive loads (motors).
• Never connect capacitive loads.
8
8.6.10 Output brake chopper
NOTICE
Connecting capacitive loads to the power supply module.
Connecting inductive loads to the power supply module.
Destruction of the power supply module.
• Only connect ohmic loads (braking resistors).
• Never connect capacitive or inductive loads.
8.6.11 Temperature evaluation of the motor

The temperature evaluation can be connected in 2 ways:
• The encoder cable includes the cables of the temperature evaluation.
• The temperature evaluation is connected separately.
WARNING
Dangerous contact voltages at the signal terminals of the application inverter when
connecting the wrong temperature sensors.
• Connect only temperature sensors with protective separation from the motor
winding to the temperature evaluation. Otherwise, the requirements for protective
separation are not met. Dangerous contact voltages may occur at the signal ter-
minals of the application inverter via the signal electronics in case of an error.
8.6.12 Brake output
INFORMATION
• If the brake connection and the motor connection are combined in one power
cable, the brake cable must be shielded separately. The shielding of the power
cable and the brake cable must be connected to the motor and application inverter
23085711/EN – 03/2017
over a large area.

• SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends to also use a shielded brake cable for separate
brake cable routing.
• Note the different project planning criteria to determine the length of brake cable
and motor cable.

8 Installation
8.6.13 Inputs/outputs
NOTICE
Destruction of digital inputs and digital outputs.
The digital inputs are not electrically isolated. Incorrectly applied voltages can dam-
age the digital inputs.
• Do not apply external voltages to the digital outputs.
• The digital inputs and outputs are dimensioned according to IEC 61131‑2.
• The cable length must not exceed 30 m.

• Cables outside the control cabinet must be shielded.
• The cables of the input and output connections must be shielded.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
8.6.14 System bus EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS
For connecting the EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS system bus, SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends
to use only prefabricated cables from SEW‑EURODRIVE.
[2] X30 OUT
X30 IN
[1]
8
[2]
X30 OUT
X30 IN
[2]
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
[3]
[4]
16723990411
[1] Module bus cable, 8-pin, color: anthracite gray. The cable is included in the delivery.
[2] System bus cable, 4-pin, color: light gray. The cable is not included in the delivery.
[3] MOVIDRIVE® modular
Cabling
23085711/EN – 03/2017
The connectors of the module bus cable are red and black to simplify correct installa-
tion.
• The black connectors must be plugged into the bus input X30 IN.
• The red connectors must be plugged into the bus output X30 OUT.
Axis systems are interconnected using the system bus cable, see figure above.

8 Installation
8.6.15 Encoder
The encoder cable may include the cables of the temperature evaluation.
For information on the pin assignment, refer to chapter Terminal assignment at MDA
single-axis module.
WARNING
Dangerous contact voltages at the terminals of the application inverter when con-
necting the wrong temperature sensors.
• Connect only temperature sensors with protective separation from the motor
winding to the temperature evaluation. Otherwise, the requirements for protective
separation are not met. Dangerous contact voltages may occur at the terminals
of the application inverter via the signal electronics in case of an fault.
Installation notes for encoder connection
Encoder cable
• Use shielded cables with twisted pair cores. Connect the shield over a wide area
at both ends:
– At the encoder in the cable gland or in the encoder plug,
– At the application inverter in the housing of the D-sub connector.
13887834891
• Route the encoder cable separately from the power cables.

• Connect the shield on the inverter end in the housing of the D-sub connector over
a large area.
On the encoder/resolver
• To ensure a flawless shield connection, an EMC screw fitting must be used for the
cable entry of the signal line.
• For drives with a plug connector, connect the shield on the encoder plug.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
SEW‑EURODRIVE offers pre-fabricated cables for connecting encoders.
SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends to use these prefabricated cables.

Installation
Encoder connection/cable lengths

INFORMATION
The maximum cable length might be reduced depending on the technical data of the 8
respective encoder. Observe the manufacturer specifications.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
8.6.16 Self-assembled encoder cables

If self-assembled encoder cables are used, make sure to dimension the connector and
the route the cable in a way that the safety cover of the application inverter can be
closed.
The maximum permitted width of the connector is 16 mm.
The maximum permitted height of the connector up to the highest point of the cable
routing is 46 mm.
16 mm 46 mm
14858590859
Minimum requirements for encoder cables

Requirements
Make sure that self-assembled cables fulfilled the following requirements:
• Cross section of voltage supply cable:
– Minimum 0.25 mm2 up to a cable length of 50 m.
– Minimum 0.5 mm2 up to a cable length of 100 m.
• Cross section of the signal wire:
– Minimum 0.25 mm2.
• Capacitance per unit length:
– Maximum 70 pF/m - wire/wire.
– Maximum 120 pF/m - wire/shield.
• The cable must be shielded.
• Differential signals must be routed via twisted wires e.g. Data+ and Data-.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Installing options and accessories 8
8.7 Installing options and accessories
8.7.1 Installing an option card
Observe the safety notes in chapter "Electrical installation" (→ 2 209).
INFORMATION
Requirements for installation.
Option cards can only be installed in axis modules suitable for option cards.
For information on which option card can be installed in which slot, refer to chapter 8
"Use of option cards" (→ 2 186).
1. Disconnect the application inverter from the power supply. Disconnect the DC 24 V
supply and the line voltage.
2. Ensure electrostatic discharge with suitable measures before starting the work.
Suitable measures for equipotential bonding are e.g. the use of a discharge strap
or wearing conductive shoes.
3. Remove the safety cover [1] from the front of the application inverter.
1
2
3
4
1
5
2
3
4
5
2.
1.
[1]
27021611749935499
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Installing options and accessories
4. Remove the plastic cover [1] at the card slot.
[1]
18014412495192075
INFORMATION
Hold the option card by its edges only.
5. Take the option card [1] and insert it in the slot with slight pressure.
[1]
23085711/EN – 03/2017
18014412495196939

Installation
6. Screw in the card with the specified tightening torque (→ 2 191).
18014412495199371
7. Install the safety cover at the front of the application inverter.

23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
8.7.2 CIO21A and CID21A input/output card
INFORMATION
For technical data and a detailed description of the encoder interface, refer to chapter
"Technical data of the option cards".
Voltage supply
The I/O cards are supplied by the basic unit via the 24 V voltage supply.
Short-circuit behavior of digital outputs

The digital outputs are short-circuit-proof.
As soon as the short circuit is remedied, the target output voltage is output, meaning
the output does not switch off.
Short circuit behavior of analog outputs

The analog outputs are short-circuit-proof.
In the event of a short circuit, the output current is limited to a maximum value of
30 mA. The short circuit current is not pulsating.
As soon as the short circuit is remedied, the target output voltage is output, meaning
the output does not switch off.
Connecting inductive loads at digital outputs

The digital outputs can switch inductive loads up to an energy content of maximum
500 mJ 10 times per seconds at the maximum without any additional measures. For
larger energy contents an external protective element (freewheeling diode) is required.
Connecting digital outputs in parallel

Connecting digital outputs in parallel is possible. The possible output current is
doubled. Ensure identical parameterization of the digital outputs.
Cable lengths
The maximum cable length of connections on the inputs and outputs is 30 m.
INFORMATION
Shielding the cables.
Cables outside the control cabinet must be shielded.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
CIO21A terminal assignment
Terminal Connec- Brief description

tion
S50/1 on: Current input active for AI2x
1
S50/2 on: Current input active for AI3x
ON
S50/1 off1) : Voltage input active for AI2x
2
S50/2 off1): Voltage input active for AI3x
X50:1 REF1 +10 V reference voltage output 8
X50:2 AI21 Analog current and voltage input
X50:4 GND Reference potential
S50

X50:8 REF2 -10 V reference voltage output
X51:1 AOV2 Analog voltage output 1, freely programmable
X51:2 AOC2 Analog current output 1, freely programmable
X51:3 GND Reference potential for the outputs AOV2 and
AOC2
X51:4 AOV3 Analog voltage output 2, freely programmable
X51:5 AOC3 Analog current output 2, freely programmable
X51:6 GND Reference potential for the outputs AOV3 and
AOC3
X52:1 DI10 Digital input 1, freely programmable
X52:5 GND Reference potential for the digital inputs DI10 –
DI13
X52:6 DO10 Digital output 1, freely programmable
X52:10 GND Reference potential for the digital outputs DO10 –
DO13
23085711/EN – 03/2017
1) Delivery state

8 Installation
CID21A terminal assignment
Terminal Connec- Brief description

tion
X52:5 GND Reference potential for the digital inputs DI10 – DI13
X52:10 GND Reference potential for the digital outputs DO10 –
DO13
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
INFORMATION
For technical data and a detailed description of the encoder interface, refer to chapter
"Technical data of the option cards".
Overview of functions
The CES11A multi-encoder card expands the functionality of the application inverter in 8
a way that an additional encoder can be evaluated. The encoder connected to the
CES11A multi-encoder card can be used as motor encoder or external encoder.
Supported encoder types

The following encoder types can be evaluated by the CES11A multi-encoder card:
HTL 12/24 V (differential)

TTL/RS422 (differential)
SIN/COS 1 VSS (differential)
HIPERFACE® with SIN/COS signals 1 VSS
SEW encoder (RS485) with SIN/COS signals 1 VSS, e.g. AS7W, AG7W
EnDat 2.1 with SIN/COS signals 1 VSS
SSI encoder with/without SIN/COS signals 1 VSS
CANopen encoder
Invalid encoder types

Resolvers cannot be evaluated with the CES11A multi-encoder card.
Encoder connection/cable lengths

INFORMATION
The maximum cable length might be reduced depending on the technical data of the
respective encoder. Observe the manufacturer specifications.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Terminal assignment of TTL, HTL, SIN/COS encoder
Card Terminal Connection Brief description

X17:1 A (COS+) (K1) Signal track A (COS+) (K1)
X17:2 B (SIN+) (K2) Signal track B (SIN+) (K2)
X17:3 C Signal track C (K0)
X17:4 Reserved –
X17:5 Reserved –
X17:6 -TEMP_M Motor temperature evaluation
8
15 X17:7 Reserved –
9 X17:9 A (COS-) (K1) Negated signal track A (COS-) (K1)

1
X17:10 B (SIN-) (K2) Negated signal track B (SIN-) (K2)
X17:11 C Negated signal track C (K0)
X17:12 Reserved –
X17:13 VS24VG 24 V encoder supply
X17:14 +TEMP_M Motor temperature evaluation
Terminal assignment HIPERFACE® and SEW encoder (RS485)

X17:1 A (COS+) (K1) Signal track A (COS+) (K1)
X17:2 B (SIN+) (K2) Signal track B (SIN+) (K2)
X17:3 Reserved –
X17:4 DATA+ Data line RS485
X17:5 Reserved –
8
9 X17:9 A (COS-) (K1) Negated signal track A (COS-) (K1)

1
X17:10 B (SIN-) (K2) Negated signal track B (SIN-) (K2)
X17:11 Reserved –
X17:12 DATA- Data line
23085711/EN – 03/2017


Installation
Terminal assignment EnDat encoder

X17:1 A (COS+) Signal track A (COS+)
X17:2 B (SIN+) Signal track B (SIN+)
X17:3 PULSE+ Clock signal
X17:4 DATA+ Data line
X17:5 Reserved –
8
8
9 X17:9 A (COS-) Negated signal track A (COS-)

1
X17:10 B (SIN-) Negated signal track B (SIN-)
X17:11 PULSE- Clock signal
X17:14 +TEMP_M –
Terminal assignment SSI encoder

X17:1 Reserved –
X17:2 Reserved –
X17:5 Reserved –
8
1
X17:10 Reserved –
23085711/EN – 03/2017


8 Installation
Terminal assignment SSI and SIN/COS combination encoders

X17:1 A (COS+) Signal track A (COS+)
X17:2 B (SIN+) Signal track B (SIN+)
X17:4 DATA+ Data line
X17:5 Reserved –
8
9 X17:9 A (COS-) Negated signal track A (COS-)

1
X17:10 B (SIN-) Negated signal track B (SIN-)
Terminal assignment CANopen encoder

X17:1 Reserved –
X17:2 Reserved –
X17:3 Reserved –
X17:4 CAN_H CAN high data cable
X17:5 Reserved –
8
1
X17:10 Reserved –
X17:11 Reserved –
X17:12 CAN_L CAN low data cable
23085711/EN – 03/2017


Installation
Braking resistors 8
8.8 Braking resistors
Observe the following points if braking resistors are installed:
• The supply cables to the braking resistors carry a high pulsed DC voltage during
rated operation.
DANGER
Dangerous pulsed DC voltage of up to 970 V.
8
To prevent electric shocks:
• Disconnect the application inverter from the supply system and wait 10 minutes
before working on a braking resistor or its supply cables.
• Never operate the application inverter without touch guards and installed closing
covers.
• Braking resistors get very hot during operation.
WARNING
The surfaces of the braking resistors will reach temperatures of up to 250 °C when
the braking resistors are loaded with the nominal power.
Severe burns.
To prevent burns:
• Do not touch any braking resistor.
• Select a suitable installation location for the braking resistors such as the control
cabinet roof.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Braking resistors
8.8.1 Permitted installation of braking resistors

The surfaces of the resistors get very hot if loaded with nominal power. Make sure that
you select an installation site that will accommodate these high temperatures. Braking
resistors are therefore usually mounted on the control cabinet roof.
NOTICE
Braking resistors can overheat.
Non-permissible installation might lead to an accumulation of heat in the braking res-
istor due to reduced convection. A tripping temperature contact or an overheated
braking resistor can lead to a system standstill.
ü Adhere to the following minimum clearances:
• About 200 mm to adjacent components and walls.
• About 300 mm to above components/ceilings.
Observe the following permitted mounting positions when installing the resistors:
• Grid resistor
BW003-420-T
1 4
4
3
5
18512460171
The arrow marks the connection side.

23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Braking resistors 8
• Wire resistor
4 8
3
5
18512455307
• Flat type resistor
4
3
5
18512457739
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Braking resistors
8.8.2 Protection against thermal overload of the braking resistor
INFORMATION
Guards for supply modules with nominal power larger than 10 kW
It is not permitted to separate the connection between power supply module and
braking resistor. Isolating protection devices, such as fuses or miniature circuit break-
ers are not permitted.
External thermal circuit breaker TCB
MDP90A power supply module 10 kW

If an external TCB thermal circuit breaker is used, the following connection applies.
Connection
1 3 5
MDP90A
12
X7:2 -Temp_R 24
X7:1 +Temp_R
X3 -R
X3 +R
23 24 5 2 1 4 3 6 23
11
[2]
[1]
2 4 6
19561220235
[1] TCB thermal circuit breaker

[2] Braking resistor
• If the thermal circuit breaker trips, the signal contact is set (23-24 connection is
opened) and evaluated in the power supply module.
• The connection between power supply module and braking resistor is disconnec-
ted.
• This does not require a response by the PLC.
• It is not required to disconnect the supply system connection with an external
switching device.
• If the thermal circuit breaker trips, the power supply module switches all axis mod-
ules to "Output stage inhibit".
23085711/EN – 03/2017
• Set the thermal circuit breaker TCB to the tripping current IF of the connected brak-
ing resistor.
• After all cables are connected, the 3 upper screw holes must be covered with 3
touch guard caps. The touch guard lids are included in the delivery.

Installation
Braking resistors 8
Internal temperature switch -T
MDP90A-0100-.. power supply module

If an BW...-T braking resistor with internal temperature switch is used with a 10 kW
power supply module, there are 3 possible connections.
Connection 1 Connection 2 Connection 3
[1] [1]
PLC PLC
8
DO
DO
GND
GND
DI DI
24 V OUT 24 V OUT
[1]
MDP90A MDP90A MDP90A
X7:2 -Temp_R X7:2 -Temp_R X7:2 -Temp_R

X7:1 +Temp_R X7:1 +Temp_R X7:1 +Temp_R
X3 -R
X3 +R
X3 -R
X3 -R
X3 +R
X3 +R
[2] [2] [2]
[1] Line contactor

Note that the reference potential GND of the digital input control must be the same as
the reference potential of the application inverter when connection 1 is used.
• Connection 1
– If the thermal circuit breaker trips, the signal in the power supply module and in
the PLC is evaluated.
– If the thermal circuit breaker trips, the PLC must interrupt the power supply.
– If the thermal circuit breaker trips, the power supply module switches all axis
modules to "Output stage inhibit".
• Connection 2
– If the thermal circuit breaker trips, the signal in the PLC is evaluated.
– If the thermal circuit breaker trips, there is no response in the power supply
module and the axis modules.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
– With connection 2, it is possible that the PLC finishes the current travel cycle al-
though the thermal circuit breaker has tripped. Only then, the power supply is
disconnected. In this case, the residual braking energy WRest = RBRnom × 20 s
must not be exceeded.
• Connection 3
– If the thermal circuit breaker trips, the signal directly affects the line contactor.
– This does not require a response by the PLC.

8 Installation
Braking resistors
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Braking resistors 8
MDP90A-0250, 0500, 0750, 1100 power supply module
If an BW...-T braking resistor with internal temperature switch is used with a 25 –
110 kW power supply module, there are 3 possible connections.
[1]
PLC
DO
GND
DI
24 V OUT
[1]
8

X3 -R
X3 -R
X3 -R
X3 +R
X3 +R
X3 +R
[2] [2] [2]
[1] Line contactor

• Connection 1
– If the thermal circuit breaker trips, the signal in the power supply module is
evaluated.
– It is not required to disconnect the supply system connection with an external
switching device.
– If the thermal circuit breaker trips, the power supply module interrupts the
power supply by inhibiting the rectifier.
• Connection 2
23085711/EN – 03/2017
• Connection 3

8 Installation
Braking resistors

– If the thermal circuit breaker trips, there is no direct response in the application
inverter.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Braking resistors 8
External bimetallic relay
MDP90A-0100-.. power supply module

If an external bimetallic relay is used with a 10 kW power supply module, there are 3
possible connections.
[1]
[1]
PLC
PLC
8
DO
GND
DO
GND
DI DI
24 V OUT 24 V OUT
[1]
MDP90A MDP90A
MDP90A
X7:2 -Temp_R X7:2 -Temp_R

X7:1 +Temp_R X7:2 -Temp_R
X7:1 +Temp_R
X7:1 +Temp_R
X3 -R
X3 +R
X3 -R
X3 +R
X3 -R
X3 +R
[2]
[2]
[2]
9007214215763467
[1] Line contactor

Note that the reference potential GND of the digital input control must be the same as
the reference potential of the application inverter when connection 1 is used.
• Connection 1
– If the thermal circuit breaker trips, the signal in the power supply module and in
the PLC is evaluated.
• Connection 2
23085711/EN – 03/2017
• Connection 3

8 Installation
Braking resistors

23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Braking resistors 8
MDP90A-0250, 0500, 0750, 1100 power supply module
If an external bimetallic relay is used with a 25 –110 kW power supply module, there
are 3 possible connections.
[1]
PLC
DO
GND
DI [1]
24 V OUT
8

X3 -R
X3 -R
X3 -R
X3 +R
X3 +R
X3 +R
[2] [2] [2]
[1] Line contactor

• Connection 1
– If the thermal circuit breaker trips, the signal in the power supply module is
evaluated.
– It is not required to disconnect the supply system connection with an external
switching device.
– If the thermal circuit breaker trips, the power supply module interrupts the
power supply by inhibiting the rectifier.
• Connection 2
23085711/EN – 03/2017

• Connection 3

8 Installation
Braking resistors

– If the thermal circuit breaker trips, there is no direct response in the application
inverter.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Line choke 8
8.9 Line choke
Install the line choke close to the application inverter but outside the minimum clear-
ance for cooling. The line choke must not be heated by the exhaust air of the applica-
tion inverter.
• Install the line choke before the line filter.
• The connection cable between line choke and line filter does not have to be shiel-
ded.
• Limit the length of the cable between the line choke and the line filter to the abso-
lute minimum needed. 8
8.10 Line filter

• Install the line filter close to the application inverter but outside the minimum clear-
ance for cooling. The line filter must not be heated by the exhaust air of the applic-
ation inverter.
• Do not wire any other consumers between the line filter and the application in-
verter.
• The connection cable between line filter and application inverter does not have to
be shielded.
• Limit the length of the cable between the line filter and the application inverter to
the absolute minimum needed.
• Do not switch between the NF... line filter and inverter.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
EMC-compliant installation
8.11 EMC-compliant installation
[15]
[1]
[6]
X31
X31
X20_1
X20_2
[3]
X20
11X21_21
X21_1
X21
S1 S1
S2 S2
RUN ERR RUN ERR
[2]
X15_1
X15_2
X15
24V
X5
GND
+ UZ
+UZ
+UZ
[6]
+UZ
X4 X4
- UZ
-UZ
-UZ -UZ
[7] [11]
[9]
[10]
[5] [4]
[13]
[8] [16]
[16]
[16]
[12] [10]
[16]
19501899787
[1] Zinc-coated mounting plate [9] Braking resistor performance
23085711/EN – 03/2017
[2] Line filter [10] Motor cable

[3] Inverter [11] Power shield plate at the axis module
[4] PE busbar [12] Brake cable
[5] HF connection of PE busbar/mounting plate [13] Grounding clamp
[6] Supply system cable [15] Electronics shield plate
[7] Power shield plate at the power supply module [16] HF connection

Installation
EMC-compliant installation 8
The information in this chapter will help you to optimize the system in regard of elec-
tromagnetic compatibility, or to eliminate already existing EMC interferences.
The notes in this chapter are not legal regulations; they are merely recommendations
for improving the electromagnetic compatibility of your plant.
For further notes on EMC-compliant installation, refer to the publication Drive Engin-
eering - Practical Implementation, edition "EMC in Drive Engineering – Basic Theoret-
ical Principles – EMC-Compliant Installation in Practice".
8.11.1 Control cabinet

8
Use a control cabinet with conducting (galvanized) mounting plate. In cased more than
one mounting plate is used, connect the plate over a large area.
Mount line filter and inverter on a shared mounting plate. Make sure they are connec-
ted over a large area and with good conductivity.
8.11.2 HF equipotential bonding in the system

In general, a suitable equipotential bonding between system, control cabinet, machine
structure, cable ducts, and drives must be ensured.
Connect the individual sections in a HF-compatible manner.
From an electrical safety perspective, the PE busbar is the star point. The PE con-
ductor replaces neither HF grounding nor shielding.
In terms of EMC, it is advantageous if the mounting plate is used as a star point with
respect to HF equipotential bonding.
Perform the following measures for a suitable HF equipotential bonding:
• Connect the PE busbar to the mounting plate in a HF-compatible manner.
• Connect the shield metal cable ducts to the control cabinet in a HF-compatible
manner.
• Connect the cable ducts with the mounting plate in the control cabinet using an HF
litz wire.
• Connect the parts of the shield metal cable ducts in a HF-compatible manner.
• Connect the shield metal cable ducts to the gearmotor in a HF-compatible manner.
8.11.3 Cable installation

Route the power cables, such as motor cable and brake cable separated from the
supply system cable and control cable.
Route all cables as close to the reference potential as possible, e.g. the mounting
plate.
All cables must be as short as possible. Avoid spare loops.
8.11.4 Supply system cable connection

23085711/EN – 03/2017
The supply system cable can be connected to the line choke and/or line filter using
twisted unshielded single conductors, or using unshielded cables.
If necessary, shielded cables can increase the EMC.

8 Installation
8.11.5 Line filter connection

Limit the length of connection cables between line filter and inverter to the absolute
minimum needed.
In general, filtered and unfiltered cables must not be routed together. For this reason,
route incoming and outgoing line filter cables separately.
8.11.6 Braking resistor connection

For connecting braking resistors, use 2 closely twisted conductors or a shielded power
cable. Connect the braided shields of shielded cables over the entire circumference.
Use the designated shield plates at the basic device to connect the shield.
19500969867
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
EMC-compliant installation 8
8.11.7 Motor and brake connection
Only use shielded motor cables. Connect the braided shield of the motor cable at both
ends over its entire circumference to the power shield plate at the inverter.
Shielded cables must be selected for the brake supply. The shield of the brake cable
can be connected to the power shield plate at the inverter.
In case motor cable and brake cable are combined in a shared cable, the cable must
have an inner shield separating the brake cable from the motor conductors. In addi-
tion, the cables have an overall shield.
19500972299
SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends to use prefabricated cables.

In case of especially high requirements, an additional connection point for the shield is
recommended. To limit the emitted interference the motor shield can additionally be
grounded to the control cabinet outlet using commercial installation materials (ground-
ing clamps or EMC screw fittings).
8.11.8 Control cable connection

The digital inputs can be connected using an unshielded single conductor. Shielded
cables increase the EMC. Use the designated shield plates to connect the shield.
For routing outside of the control cabinet shielded cables must be used.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
19500974731
8.11.9 Encoder connection

SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends to use prefabricated encoder cables.
The shield of prefabricated cables by SEW‑EURODRIVE is connected via the con-
nector.

8 Installation
8.11.10 Shielding connection

Ensure a shield connection suitable for HF, e.g. by using grounding clamps, or EMC
cable glands, so that the braided shield has a large connection surface.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Terminal assignment 8
8.12 Terminal assignment
INFORMATION
Reference potentials inside the device:
The device internal reference potential is designated as GND in the following table.
All reference potentials GND are internally connected to PE.
INFORMATION 8
The assignment "reserved" means that no cable must be connected to this connec-
tion.
INFORMATION
The technical data for the connection of power electronics and control electronics are
listed in chapter Technical Data.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Terminal assignment
8.12.1 Terminal assignment at MDP power supply module
Illustration Terminal Connec- Brief description

tion
X1:L1 L1
X3
X1:L2 L2 Line connection MDP 10 kW (size 1)
X1 X1:L3 L3
PE PE connection at housing
X1:L1 L1
X1:L2 L2 Line connection MDP 25 kW (size 2)
X1:L3 L3
U V W X1:1 L1
X1:2 L2 Line connection MDP 50/75 kW (size 3)
X1:3 L3
X1:1 L1
X1:2 L2 Line connection MDP 110 kW (size 4)
X1:3 L3
X3:+R +R
X3 Connection of braking resistor MDP 10 kW (size 1)
X3:-R -R
X1 Reserved with size 1 as no Ri available
X3:Ri Ri
Connection of internal braking resistor to MDP..C00 (Ri)
+R -R X3:+R +R
Connection of braking resistor MDP 25 kW (size 2)
X3:-R -R
+R -R X3:1 +R
Connection of braking resistor MDP 50/75 kW (size 3)
X3:2 -R
23085711/EN – 03/2017
X3:1 +R
Connection of braking resistor MDP 110 kW (size 4)
X3:2 -R

Installation
Illustration Terminal Connec- Brief description
tion
X4:+VDCL +VDCL
+U Z DC link connection
X4:-VDCL -VDCL
-UZ
X4:+VDCL +VDCL
DC link connection left side MDP 110 kW (size 4)
X4:-VDCL -VDCL 8
X4:+VDCL +VDCL
DC link connection right side MDP 110 kW (size 4)
X4:-VDCL -VDCL
24 V X5:24 V VI 24 V
GND 24 V supply voltage
X5:GND GND
X30 OUT
X30 OUT
System bus
X30 IN X30 IN
X7:1 +TEMP_R DC 24 V auxiliary voltage output

1
2 X7:2 -TEMP_R Sensor input for temperature monitoring of the braking resistor
3
4 X7:3 Reserved –
X7:4 Reserved –
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Terminal assignment
8.12.2 Terminal assignment at MDA single-axis module
Illustration Terminal Connection Brief description

U X2:U U
V
W X2:V V Motor connection MDA 2 - 12 A (size 1, 2)
X2:W W
U V W X2:U U
X2:V V Motor connection MDA 16 - 24 A (size 3)
X2:W W
U V W X2:U U
X2:W W
X2:U U
X2:W W
X4:1 +VDCL
X4:2 -VDCL
-UZ
X4:1 +VDCL
DC link connection MDA 140 A – 180 A (size 6)
X4:2 -VDCL
24 V X5:24V VI24 V DC 24 V supply voltage

GND
X5:GND GND Reference potential
DB00 X10:DB00 DB00 Brake control

GND X10:GND GND Reference potential
23085711/EN – 03/2017
TF1
X10:TF1 TF1 Sensor input for temperature monitoring of the motor
GND

Installation
Illustration Terminal Connection Brief description
X30 OUT
X30 OUT
System bus
X30 IN X30 IN
X31 SEW‑EURODRIVE Service interface
X20:1 DI00 Digital input 1, with fixed assignment "Output stage

enable"
8
1
2
3 X20:3 DI02 Digital input 3, freely programmable
4
5
8
X20:8 +24 V DC 24 V voltage output
1
2 X21:2 DO01 Digital output 2, freely programmable
3 X21:3 DO02 Digital output 3, freely programmable
4
5
X6:1 STO_P1 DC +24 V input STO_P1
1 X6:2 STO_M Reference potential for STO_P1 and STO_P2
2
3 X6:3 STO_P2 DC +24 V input STO_P2
4
5 X6:4 GND Reference potential
X6:5 24 V STO_OUT Vout = DC 24 V to supply STO_P1 and STO_P2
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Terminal assignment
Illustration Terminal Connection Brief description motor encoder resolver

X15:1 S2 (SIN +) Signal track
X15:2 S1 (COS +) Signal track
X15:3 Reserved -
X15:4 Reserved -
X15:5 R1 (REF +) Supply voltage resolver
8
15 X15:7 Reserved -
X15:8 Reserved -
9 X15:9 S4 (SIN -) Signal track

1
X15:10 S3 (COS -) Signal track
X15:11 Reserved -
X15:12 Reserved -
X15:13 R2 (REF -) Supply voltage resolver
X15:15 Reserved -
Illustration Terminal Connection Brief description motor encoder Sin/Cos encoder,

TTL encoder
X15:1 A (COS +) (K1) Signal track A (COS+) (K1)
X15:2 B (SIN +) (K2) Signal track B (SIN+) (K2)
X15:3 C (K0) Signal track C (K0)
X15:4 Reserved –
X15:5 Reserved –
8
9 X15:9 A (COS -) (K1) Negated signal track A (COS-) (K1)

1
X15:10 B (SIN -) (K2) Negated signal track B (SIN-) (K2)
X15:11 C (K0) Negated signal track C (K0)
X15:12 Reserved –
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Illustration Terminal Connection Brief description motor encoder HTL encoder
X15:1 A (K1) Signal track A (K1)
X15:2 B (K2) Signal track B (K2)
X15:3 C (K0) Signal track C (K0)
X15:4 Reserved –
X15:5 Reserved –
15
8
X15:7 Reserved – 8
9 X15:9 A (K1) Negated signal track A (K1)

1
X15:10 B (K2) Negated signal track B (K2)
X15:11 C (K0) Negated signal track C (K0)
X15:12 Reserved –
Illustration Terminal Connection Brief description motor encoder HIPERFACE®

and SEW-EURODRIVE encoder (RS485)
X15:1 A (COS +) (K1) Signal track A (COS+) (K1)
X15:2 B (SIN +) (K2) Signal track B (SIN+) (K2)
X15:3 Reserved –
X15:5 Reserved –
8
9 X15:9 A (COS -) (K1) Negated signal track A (COS-) (K1)

1
X15:10 B (SIN -) (K2) Negated signal track B (SIN-) (K2)
X15:11 Reserved –
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Terminal assignment
8.12.3 Terminal assignment at MDD double-axis module
Illustration Terminals Connection Brief description

U X2_1:U X2_2:U V
V
W X2_1:V X2_2:V V Motor connection MDD 2 - 8 A (size 1, 2)
X2_1:W X2_2:W W
X4:+VDCL +VDCL
X4:-VDCL -VDCL
-UZ
24 V X5:24V VI 24 DC 24 V supply voltage

GND
DB00 X10_1:DB00 X10_2:DB00 DB00 Brake control

GND X10_1:GND X10_2:GND GND Reference potential
TF1
X10_1:TF1 X10_2:TF1 TF1 Sensor input for temperature monitoring of
GND
the motor
X10_1:GND X10_2:GND GND Reference potential
X30 OUT
X30 OUT
System bus
X30 IN X30 IN
X31 SEW‑EURODRIVE Service interface
X20_1:1 X20_2:1 DI00 Digital input 1, with fixed assignment "Output

stage enable"
1
2
X20_1:2 X20_2:2 DI01 Digital input 2, freely programmable
3 X20_1:3 X20_2:3 DI02 Digital input 3, freely programmable
4
X20_1:4 X20_2:4 DI03 Digital input 4, freely programmable
5
8
X20_1:7 X20_2:7 GND Reference potential
X20_1:8 X20_2:8 +24 V DC 24 V voltage output
X21_1:1 X21_2:1 DO00 Digital output 1, freely programmable
23085711/EN – 03/2017
1
2 X21_1:2 X21_2:2 DO01 Digital output 2, freely programmable
3 X21_1:3 X21_2:3 DO02 Digital output 3, freely programmable
4
X21_1:4 X21_2:4 DO03 Digital output 4, freely programmable
5

Installation
Illustration Terminals Connection Brief description
X6_1:1 X6_2:1 STO_P1 DC +24 V input STO_P1
X6_1:2 X6_2:2 STO_M Reference potential for STO_P1 and
1 STO_P2
2
3 X6_1:3 X6_2:3 STO_P2 DC +24 V input STO_P2
4
5 X6_1:4 X6_2:4 GND Reference potential
24 V Vout = DC 24 V to supply STO_P1 and
X6_1:5 X6_2:5
STO_OUT STO_P2
8
Illustration Terminals Connection Brief description motor encoder resolver
X15_1:1 X15_2:1 S2 (SIN +) Signal track
X15_1:2 X15_2:2 S1 (COS +) Signal track
X15_1:3 X15_2:3 Reserved -
X15_1:4 X15_2:4 Reserved -
X15_1:5 X15_2:5 R1 (REF +) Supply voltage resolver
X15_1:6 X15_2:6 -TEMP_M Motor temperature evaluation
8
15 X15_1:7 X15_2:7 Reserved -
X15_1:8 X15_2:8 Reserved -
9 X15_1:9 X15_2:9 S4 (SIN -) Signal track

1
X15_1:10 X15_2:10 S3 (COS-) Signal track
X15_1:11 X15_2:11 Reserved -
X15_1:12 X15_2:12 Reserved -
X15_1:13 X15_2:13 R2 (REF -) Supply voltage resolver
X15_1:14 X15_2:14 +TEMP_M Motor temperature evaluation
X15_1:15 X15_2:15 Reserved -
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Terminal assignment
Illustration Terminals Connection Brief description motor encoder Sin/Cos

encoder, TTL encoder
X15_1:1 X15_2:1 A (COS +) (K1) Signal track A (COS+) (K1)
X15_1:2 X15_2:2 B (SIN +) (K2) Signal track B (SIN+) (K2)
X15_1:3 X15_2:3 C (K0) Signal track C (K0)
X15_1:4 X15_2:4 Reserved –
X15_1:5 X15_2:5 Reserved –
8
15 X15_1:7 X15_2:7 Reserved –
9 X15_1:9 X15_2:9 A (COS -) (K1) Negated signal track A (COS-) (K1)

1
X15_1:10 X15_2:10 B (SIN -) (K2) Negated signal track B (SIN-) (K2)
X15_1:11 X15_2:11 C (K0) Negated signal track C (K0)
X15_1:12 X15_2:12 Reserved –
X15_1:13 X15_2:13 VS24VG 24 V encoder supply
Illustration Terminals Connection Brief description motor encoder HTL en-

coder
X15_1:1 X15_2:1 A (K1) Signal track A (K1)
X15_1:2 X15_2:2 B (K2) Signal track B (K2)
X15_1:3 X15_2:3 C (K0) Signal track C (K0)
X15_1:4 X15_2:4 Reserved –
X15_1:5 X15_2:5 Reserved –
8
15 X15_1:7 X15_2:7 Reserved –
9 X15_1:9 X15_2:9 A (K1) Negated signal track A (K1)

1
X15_1:10 X15_2:10 B (K2) Negated signal track B (K2)
X15_1:11 X15_2:11 C (K0) Negated signal track C (K0)
X15_1:12 X15_2:12 Reserved –
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Illustration Terminals Connection Brief description motor encoder
HIPERFACE® and SEW-EURODRIVE en-
coder (RS485)
X15_1:1 X15_2:1 A (COS +) (K1) Signal track A (COS+) (K1)
X15_1:2 X15_2:2 B (SIN +) (K2) Signal track B (SIN+) (K2)
X15_1:3 X15_2:3 Reserved –
X15_1:4 X15_2:4 DATA+ Data line RS485
X15_1:5 X15_2:5 Reserved –
8
8
15 X15_1:7 X15_2:7 Reserved –
9 X15_1:9 X15_2:9 A (COS -) (K1) Negated signal track A (COS-) (K1)

1
X15_1:10 X15_2:10 B (SIN -) (K2) Negated signal track B (SIN-) (K2)
X15_1:11 X15_2:11 Reserved –
X15_1:12 X15_2:12 DATA- Data line
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Wiring diagrams
8.13 Wiring diagrams
8.13.1 General information on the wiring diagrams

• For technical data of the power electronics and the control electronics, refer to
chapter "Technical data" (→ 2 34).
• For the terminal assignment and connections, refer to chapter "Terminal
assignment" (→ 2 251).
8.13.2 Power connection
NOTICE
Incorrectly placed components.
Destruction of the power supply module.
• Do not install any other components between the line filter and the power supply
module.
NOTICE
Overtemperature of line filter and line choke.
Destruction of line filter and line choke.
• Make sure line filter and line choke are not heated by warm exhaust air of other
devices.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Wiring diagrams 8
Exemplary wiring of the MDP90A.. power connections with line contactor, line choke, and line filter
L1
L2
L3
PE
[1]
U1 V1 W1
[2]
U2 V2 W2
8
L1 L2 L3
[3]
L1´ L2´ L3´
X1 L1 L2 L3
MDA MDD
PE
PE
PE PE PE
X4 X4 X4
+
+
- - -
MDP
PE PE PE X2 PE PE X2_1 PE PE X2_2 PE
+R -R U V W U V W U V W
X3
[4]
PE
PE PE
[5] [5] [5]
36028806497163019
[1] Line contactor
[2] Line choke (optional)
[3] Line filter
[4] Braking resistor connection, see also chapter "Connecting braking resistors". The power supply
module must not be operated without braking resistor.
[5] Motor
MDP Power supply module
MDA Single-axis module
MDD Double-axis module
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Wiring diagrams
Wiring the MDP90A-0250, 0500, 0750, 1100 power connections without line contactor
Operation without line contactor is only possible for power supply modules of 25 kW or
higher.
L1
L2
L3
PE
U1 V1 W1
[1]
U2 V2 W2
L1 L2 L3
[2]
L1´ L2´ L3´
X1
L1 L2 L3
PE MDA MDD
PE
PE PE PE
X4 X4 X4
+
+
- - -
MDP
+R -R U V W U V W U V W
X3
[3]
PE PE PE
[4] [4] [4]
27021609848822539
[2] Line filter
[3] Braking resistor connection, see also chapter "Connecting braking resistors". The power supply
module must not be operated without braking resistor.
[4] Motor
INFORMATION
23085711/EN – 03/2017
In case of a line connection without line contactor, the temperature evaluation of the
braking resistor via connection X7 of the power supply module must be ensured. The
temperature evaluation is evaluated as error message in each axis.

Installation
Wiring diagrams 8
Wiring of the MDP90A-..-C00 power connections using the integrated braking resistor
L1
L2
L3
PE
[1]
U1 V1 W1
[2]
U2 V2 W2
L1 L2 L3 8
[3]
L1´ L2´ L3´
X1
L1 L2 L3
PE MDA MDD
PE
MDP PE PE PE
X4 X4 X4
+
+
- - -
Ri
+R -R Ri U V W U V W U V W
X3
[4]
PE PE PE
[5] [5] [5]
27021607242286475
[1] Line contactor
[3] Line filter
[4] Braking resistor connection, see also chapter "Connecting braking resistors".
[5] Motor
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Wiring diagrams
Wiring of the MDP90A-..-C00 power connections using the external braking resistor
L1
L2
L3
PE
[1]
U1 V1 W1
[2]
U2 V2 W2
< 600 mm
L1 L2 L3
[3]
L1´ L2´ L3´
X1
L1 L2 L3
PE MDA MDD
PE
MDP
PE PE PE
X4 X4 X4
+
+
+
- - -
Ri
+R -R Ri U V W U V W U V W
X3
[4]
PE PE PE
[5] [5] [5]

27021607250517643
[1] Line contactor
[3] Line filter
[4] Braking resistor connection, see also chapter "Connecting braking resistors".
[5] Motor
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Wiring diagrams 8
8.13.3 Brake control
Key:
DC Disconnection of the DC and AC circuits

AC (Rapid brake application)
DC
Disconnection of the DC circuit
Brake 8
BS
BS = accelerator coil
TS TS = coil section
DC brake with one brake coil
1a
2a
3a Auxiliary terminal strip in terminal box
4a
5a
Control cabinet limit
WH White
RD Red
BU Blue
INFORMATION
The selection of the brake control and the shown connection diagrams only represent
one of the many possibilities. Observe the catalogs and operating instructions of the
motors for more information and installation notes.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Wiring diagrams
BMK. brake control
DC
AC GND DB00
- + AC
WH BMK
1
RD BMKB
1a 2
BS 3
2a
M
3a 4
TS 4a
BU 13
5a
14
15
14324495755
BMV brake control – 2 coils
DC
GND DB00 DC 24 V
- + - +
WH BMV
1
RD
1a 2
BS 3
2a
M
3a 4
TS 4a
BU 13
5a
14
15
14373482507
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Wiring diagrams 8
BMV brake control – 1 coil
DC
GND DB00 DC 24 V
- + - +
8
RD BMV
1
1a 2
2a 3
M
3a 4
4a
BU 13
5a
14
15
14373494923
BMS, BME brake control
DC
AC
AC
DB00
GND
1 BMS
WH
BME
RD 2
1a
BS 3
2a
M 4
3a
TS 4a 13
BU
5a 14
15
14324554891
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Wiring diagrams
BMP brake control
DC AC
AC
DB00
GND
1 BMP
WH
RD 2
1a
BS 3
2a
M 4
3a
TS 4a 13
BU
5a 14
15
14324544523
BG, BGE brake control
AC
DC
AC DB00
GND
BG
1 BGE
WH
2
RD
3
BS 4
M
5
TS
BU
14324565259
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Wiring diagrams 8
BSG brake control
DC DC 24 V
+ -
AC
DB00
GND
BSG
WH
1 8
2
RD
3
BS 4
M
5
TS
BU
14324597131
Direct control DC 24 V brake

If the system complies with the following specifications for direct brake control, a BK or
BP brake (holding brake) can also be controlled directly via the brake output of an ap-
plication inverter.
Specifications for direct brake control:
• Only the BK brakes of the CMP40 – 63 motor and the BP brake of the CMP71 mo-
tor are permitted.
• Expressly excluded are brakes of the motor types CMP80 and greater, CMPZ mo-
tors, and all non-SEW brakes.
• Only prefabricated brakemotor cables from SEW‑EURODRIVE must be used.
• The brakemotor cable must be shorter than 25 m.
• The shielding of the brake cable must be connected to the shielding plate.
Observe additional information in the "Synchronous Servomotors" catalog.
+ DB00
- GND
14333605771
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Wiring diagrams
8.13.4 Electronics connection MDP90A.. power supply module
Wiring the control electronics

For the terminal assignment and connections, refer to chapter "Terminal
X7
1 + T emp_R
2 -T emp_R [1]
3 reserved
4 reserved
X30 OUT
X30 IN
DC 24 V X5
+ 1 +24 V
- 2 GND
27021612078091531
[1] Signal contact of the thermal monitoring of the braking resistor

X5 Connection +24 V supply voltage
X7 Control DC link discharge module, temperature monitoring braking resistor
X30 System bus
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Wiring diagrams 8
8.13.5 Electronics connection MDA90A.. single-axis module

8
PE
X6
1 STO_P1
2 STO_M X31
3 STO_P2
4 GND
5 24VSTO_OUT X20
DI00 1 Fixed assignment “Output stage enable”
X30 OUT DI01 2 Digital input
DI02 3 Digital input
X30 IN
GND 7 Reference potential for digital inputs
24V 8 DC 24 V auxiliary voltage
X21
DO00 1 Digital output
GND 5 Reference potential for digital outputs
X15
DB00 1 Brake control 8
15
GND 2 Reference potential 14
7
X10 6
TF1 3 Motor temperature evaluation 13
12
5
GND 4 Reference potential 11
10
4
3
2
9
1
DC 24 V X5
+ 1 +24 V
- 2 GND
23085711/EN – 03/2017
16752457995
X5 Connection +24 V supply voltage X20 Digital inputs

X6 Connection for safe disconnection (STO). Cable jumpers are installed at factory. X21 Digital outputs
X10 Brake control and temperature monitoring motor X30 System bus
X15 Motor encoder connection X31 SEW-EURODRIVE service inter-
face

8 Installation
Wiring diagrams
8.13.6 Electronics connection MDD90A.. double-axis module

PE
1 STO_P1 1 STO_P1
2 STO_M 2 STO_M X31
3 STO_P2 3 STO_P2
4 GND 4 GND
5 24VSTO_OUT 5 24VSTO_OUT
X20_1 X20_2
X6_1 X6_2
DI00 1 DI00 1 Fixed assignment ”Output stage inhibit”
DI01 2 DI01 2 Digital input
X30 OUT DI02 3 DI02 3 Digital input
X30 IN
GND 7 GND 7 Reference potential for digital input
24 V 8 24 V 8 DC 24 V auxiliary output
X21_1 X21_2
DO00 1 DO00 1 Digital output
GND 5 GND 5 Reference potential for digital output
X10_1 X10_2
DB00 1 DB00 1 Brake control X15_1 X15_2
GND 2 GND 2 Reference potential 8 8
15 15
TF1 3 TF1 3 Temperatur evaluation of motor 14

7
6
14
7
GND 4 GND 4 Reference potential

13
12
5
13
12
5
4 4
11 11
3 3
10 10
2 2
9 9
1 1
DC 24 V X5
+ 1 +24 V
- 2 GND
18014413653074827
X5 Connection +24 V supply voltage X20 Digital inputs

X6 Connection for safe disconnection (STO). Cable jumpers are installed at factory. X21 Digital outputs
23085711/EN – 03/2017
X10 Brake control and temperature monitoring motor X30 System bus
X15 Motor encoder connection X31 SEW-EURODRIVE service inter-
face

Installation
Wiring diagrams 8
8.13.7 Connection diagram CIO21A and CID21A input/output card
Digital inputs and outputs
X52
[1]
DI10
DI11
1
2
8
DI12 3
DI13 4
GND 5 GND
DO10 6
DO11 7
DO12 8
DO13 9
GND 10 GND
18014412829087243
[1] Higher-level controller

23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Wiring diagrams
Voltage input
-10 – 0 – +10 V
X50
REF1 1
+
AI21 2
AI22 3
-
GND 4
AI31 5
AI32 6
GND 7
REF2 8
9007213575393675
Connection to the terminals AI31 and AI32 is carried out analogously to the connec-
tion to the terminals AI21 and AI22 shown in the wiring diagrams.
X50 R > 5 kΩ
REF1 1
AI21 2
AI22 3
GND 4
AI31 5
AI32 6
GND 7
REF2 8
18014412830137099
Connection to the terminals REF2 and AI31 is carried out analogously to the connec-
tion to the terminals REF1 and AI21 shown in the wiring diagrams.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
Wiring diagrams 8
Current input
X50
0 (4) – 20 mA
REF1 1 +
AI21 2
AI22 3 -
GND 4
AI31 5 8
AI32 6
GND 7
REF2 8
9007213575398539
Connection to the terminals AI31 and AI32 is carried out analogously to the connec-
tion to the terminals AI21 and AI22 shown in the wiring diagrams.
Observe the switch position of DIP switch S50 when activating the current input.
Voltage output
-10 – 0 – +10 V
X51
AOV2 1 +
AOC2 2 V
GND 3 -
AOV3 4
AOC3 5
GND 6
18014412830141963
Connection to the terminals AOV3 and GND is carried out analogously to the connec-
tion to the terminals AOV2 and GND shown in the wiring diagram.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

8 Installation
Wiring diagrams
Current output
X51
0 (4) – 20 mA
AOV2 1 +
AOC2 2
A
GND 3
-
AOV3 4
AOC3 5
GND 6
18014412830272395
Connection to the terminals AOC3 and GND is carried out analogously to the connec-
tion to the terminals AOC2 and GND shown in the wiring diagram.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Installation
UL-compliant installation 8
8.14 UL-compliant installation
UL approval of the application inverter is in preparation.
8
23085711/EN – 03/2017

9 Startup
General
9 Startup
9.1 General
DANGER
• Install the touch guards at the modules, see chapter "Covers" (→ 2 195).
• Install the closing covers according to the regulations, see chapter
"Covers" (→ 2 195).
• Never start up the application inverter without installed closed touch guards and
closing covers.
9.1.1 Lifting applications
WARNING
Danger of fatal injury if the hoist falls.
• The application inverter is not designed for use as a safety device in lifting applic-
ations. Use monitoring systems or mechanical protection devices to ensure
safety.
9.1.2 Connecting power
NOTICE
Undercutting the minimum switch-off time of the line contactor.
The specified times and intervals must be observed.
• After disconnection from the supply system, observe a minimum switch-off time
of 10 s.
• Do not turn the power of the supply system on or off more than once per
minute.
9.1.3 Connecting cables
NOTICE
Cables may only be connected and disconnected in a de-energized state.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

• Power plug connectors (motor, supply system braking resistor, brake) must only
be plugged in de-energized state.

Startup
Setting the EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS ID 9
9.2 Setting the EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS ID
Setting the
EtherCAT®/
SBusPLUS
ID
The hexadecimal switches S1 and S2 must be set to "0".
9.3 Startup requirements

The following conditions apply to startup:
• You installed the application inverter correctly both mechanically and electrically.
• You configured the application inverter and connected drives correctly.
• Safety measures prevent accidental drive startup. 9
• Safety measures prevent danger to persons or machines.
Required hardware:
• PC or laptop with Ethernet interface.
• Standard Ethernet cables for connection between PC and MOVI‑C®
CONTROLLER.
• MOVI‑C® CONTROLLER with completed startup
Required software:
• Engineering software MOVISUITE® standard from SEW‑EURODRIVE.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

9 Startup
Startup procedure
9.4 Startup procedure

The application inverters are taken into operation using the engineering software
MOVISUITE® from SEW‑EURODRIVE.
15643252491
The startup is functionally divided into segments. The following steps illustrate an ex-
ample of the startup procedure for an application inverter.
Drive train seg- Drive train Configuring drive trains.
ment
Interfaces seg- Built-in interfaces Basic settings of the installed interfaces

ment
• EtherCAT®
• Standard I/O
• Encoder 1
Options Basic settings of the options
• Fieldbus
• I/O card
• Encoder 2
• DriveSafety®
Functions segment I/O configuration • Standard I/O

• I/O card DI/DO
• I/O card AI/AO
PO configuration • Basic settings
23085711/EN – 03/2017
• PO data
• Setpoint buffer
• Fixed setpoints
• Control word 1 – 3

Startup
Startup procedure 9
PI configuration • PI data
• Status word 1 – 3
Drive functions • FCB 05 Speed control

• FCB 09 Positioning
Advanced drive functions • FCB 01 Output stage inhibit 9
• FCB 20 Jog mode
• FCB 26 Stop at user limit
Event-driven functions • Touchprobe 1
• Touchprobe 2
• Cam switch
Monitoring • Reference signals
• Limit values 1
• Limit values 2
• Energy-saving function
User units Converting system units into user units.
Information on the Device data is available via the project nodes.

application inverter
Device data • Device identification
• Main component
• Subcomponent
• Production label
Overview of fault responses • Axis module
• Power supply monitoring
• Functions
Setup • Parameter set selection
• Access rights
• Resetting device parameters.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
9.4.1 Check list for startup

The following checklist lists the necessary steps for complete startup.
Step Startup step Done

1 Motor installation

9 Startup
Connection to the engineering software
Step Startup step Done

2 Install MOVI‑C component ®
3 Start MOVISUITE®
4 Start up the drive train
5 Parameterize setpoints and FCBs
6 Configure digital inputs and outputs
7 Configure PD
8 Configure software module (MOVIKIT®)
9 Test drives/application
9.5 Connection to the engineering software

The following figure shows the connection of the application inverter to the
MOVISUITE® engineering software using a PC.
[1]
X31
X31
X20_1
X20_2
X20
X21_1
X21_2
X21
S1 S1
S2 S2
RUN ERR RUN ERR
X15_1
X15_2
X15
24V 24V
X5 X5
GND GND
+ UZ
+UZ
+UZ
+UZ +UZ +UZ
X4 X4 X4
-UZ
- UZ
-UZ
-UZ -UZ -UZ
9007214576496523
[1] Ethernet
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Operation
General information 10
10 Operation
10.1 General information
DANGER
Dangerous voltages present at cables and motor terminals.
• Dangerous voltages are present at the output terminals and the cables and motor
terminals connected to them when the device is switched on. This also applies
even when the device is inhibited and the motor is at standstill.
• Before you touch the power terminals, check to see that the application inverter 10
has been disconnected from the supply system.
• Wait 10 minutes after disconnection from the supply system before removing the
power terminals.
• The fact that the operation LEDs are no longer illuminated does not indicate that
the application inverter no longer carries any voltage.
• Observe the general safety notes in chapter "Safety notes" (→ 2 164).
DANGER
Risk of crushing if the motor starts up unintentionally.
• Ensure that the motor cannot start inadvertently, for example, by removing the
electronics terminal block X20.
• Additional safety precautions must be taken depending on the application to
avoid injury to people and damage to machinery.
NOTICE
Switching the motor output at the application inverter with enabled output stage.
• The motor output of the application inverter may only be switched or disconnec-
ted when the output stage is inhibited.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

10 Operation
7-segment display
10.2 7-segment display
10.2.1 Operating displays
• The two 7-segment displays indicate the operating state of the power supply
modules and axis modules.
• The displays for the axis modules and the power supply modules are therefore
described separately.
10.2.2 Fault display

The application inverter detects any faults that occur and displays them as fault code.
Each fault is clearly defined by its fault code and corresponding attributes, as shown
below:
• Fault response
• Final state after executing the fault response
• Type of reset response.
The fault codes are indicated as flashing numeric values in the axis and power supply
module.
The fault code is displayed in the following display sequence:
500 ms 124 ms 1000 ms 124 ms 1000 ms 124 ms
12082058123
In the example, a 2-digit fault code with subfault is shown at the axis module, fault
07.01 in this example.
Fault display at the double-axis module

The double-axis module has one two-digit 7-segment display for each of the two integ-
rated axes. They are located horizontally next to each other. The left display applies to
axis 1, the right one to axis 2.
10.3 Operating displays

10.3.1 Operating displays at the power supply module
Display Description State Comment/action
Displays during normal operation
rd Ready for operation (ready). No fault/warning: VDCL ≥ 100 V. Only status display.
Display Description State Comment/action

Displays of different device statuses
23085711/EN – 03/2017
00 DC link voltage missing or be- 24 V backup mode Check supply system.

low 100 V.

Operation
Operating displays 10
10.3.2 Operating displays at the axis module
Display Description State Comment / action
Displays during boot process
b0 Unit passes through several states • Status: Not ready. • Waiting for boot process to finish.
b1 when loading the firmware (boot) to • Output stage is inhibited. • Device stays in this condition: Device defect-
get ready for operation. • No communication possible. ive.
b3
br

Displays of different device statuses
• Energy-saving mode Energy-saving mode active.
C0 Module bus is not ready Check the module bus connection.
Flashing
C1 Startup state Startup state is active.
Flashing 10
C2 STO active The function Safe Torque Off is active.
Flashing
C3 Incorrect synchronization with bus. • Check bus connection.
Flashing Process data processing not avail- • Check synchronization setting at device and
able. controller.
• Check process data settings at device and
controller.
C4 The encoder evaluation is not • Encoders are being initialized.
Flashing ready. • Device stays in this condition:
– No encoder selected.
– "Source actual speed" or "Actual position"
parameter shows an encoder that does not
exist.
C5 Motor management is not ready. The motor control system is not ready.
Flashing
C6 Internal device supply incomplete. • Supply voltage fault of SMPS
Flashing • 24 V supply not ready.
C7 Power section not ready. The power section is not ready.
Flashing
C8 External device not ready. The message "Not ready" was detected at the
Flashing digital input.
C9 Data flexibility level is not ready. Flexibility level is not ready yet.
Flashing
Cd Parameter download running. One parameter set is being downloaded.
Flashing

Displays during initialization processes (parameters will be reset to default values)
d0 Basic initialization. • Status: Not ready. Waiting for initialization to finish.
Flashing • Output stage is inhibited.
d1 Initialization of delivery state. • Communication is possible.
Flashing

Displays during normal operation
01 Output stage inhibit • Output stage is inhibited. The drive is not actuated by the output stage.
Brake is applied. If no brake is installed, the mo-
tor will coast to a stop. This FCB is permanently
selected with terminal DI00. But it can be selec-
ted by other sources.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

10 Operation
Operating displays

02 Stop default For further information refer to the Drive function (FCB) "Default stop" active, if not
"FCB" (→ 2 17) description. other FCB is selected and the system is "ready".
04 Manual mode Manual mode active
05 Speed control Speed control with internal ramp generator.
06 Interpolated speed control Speed control with setpoints cyclically via bus.
The ramp generator is located externally, e.g. in
the higher-level controller.
07 Torque control Torque control
08 Interpolated torque control Torque control with setpoints cyclically via bus.
09 Position control Position mode with internal ramp generator.
10 Interpolated position control Positioning mode with setpoints cyclically via
bus. The ramp generator is located externally,
e.g. in the higher-level controller.
12 Reference travel The drive performs reference travel.
13 Stop at application limits Deceleration at the application limit. This FCB
also becomes active if no other FCB is selected
as default FCB.
14 Emergency stop Deceleration at emergency stop limit.
18 Rotor position identification Encoder commutation for synchronous motors.
19 Position hold control Position control on current position.
20 Jog Jog mode active.
21 Brake test Brake is tested by applying torque while brake is
closed.
25 Motor parameter measurement Motor parameter measurement active.
26 Stop at user limits Serves to stop at user limits.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Operation
Faults at the power supply module 10
10.4 Faults at the power supply module
10.4.1 Fault 49 Power supply module

Subfault: 49.1
Description: Unknown supply unit
Response: Remote – critical fault
Cause Measure
Failed to identify the supply unit. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 49.2
Description: EEPROM memory – faulty hardware
Cause Measure
EEPROM cannot be read; initialization fault. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
10
Subfault: 49.3
Description: Internal voltage supply
Cause Measure
At least one of the internal supply voltages is faulty. Switch the power off and on again. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE
service if the fault is still present.
Subfault: 49.4
Description: 24 V supply voltage
Cause Measure
The 24 V supply is below the min. specified 24 V input voltage. Check 24 V supply, switch power supply off and on again. Con-
tact SEW‑EURODRIVE service if the fault is still present.
Subfault: 49.5
Description: Fault in a hardware component of analog to digital conversion
Cause Measure
The measured DC link values are outside the valid range, or Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
the voltage supply of the transducers is defective.
Subfault: 49.6
Description: CRC fault – power section data
Cause Measure
Device not yet calibrated. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Initialization fault Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 49.7
Description: EEPROM data fault
Cause Measure
Calibration data not plausible. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 49.8
Description: DC link overvoltage
Cause Measure
The maximum permitted DC link voltage limit was exceeded. – Check brake chopper function, braking resistor, and regener-
23085711/EN – 03/2017
ative energy.
– Check configuration of the axis system.
Subfault: 49.9
Description: DC link overcurrent
Cause Measure
DC link current too high motor mode or generator mode. – Motoring operation: load too high / check project planning.
– Generator mode: Braking resistance too low or short circuit in
braking resistor.

10 Operation
Faults at the power supply module
Subfault: 49.10
Description: Brake chopper short circuit
Cause Measure
A failed brake chopper was detected in the device. For units – Check brake chopper circuit connections --> Switch the
with half-controlled bridge, the thyristors are inhibited. power off and on again.
If the fault is still present, replace the device. Contact the
SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 49.11
Description: Collector-emitter voltage monitoring
Cause Measure
The voltage supply for the brake chopper is defective. Check the connection of the braking resistor.
UCE monitoring of the brake chopper trips. Switch the power off and on again. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE
service if the fault is still present.
Short circuit in the braking resistor. Check braking resistor and supply cable.
Too much generative power. Check the project planning for the axis system.
Subfault: 49.12
Description: Temperature sensor (internal) defective
Cause Measure
Temperature sensor does not respond (e.g. wire break) Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 49.13
Description: Overtemperature 105%
Cause Measure
The maximum permitted heat sink temperature was exceeded. Check the project planning and installation of the axis system.
Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 49.14
Description: Temperature evaluation defective
Cause Measure
Failure to transfer temperature signals. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 49.15
Description: Utilization 105%
Cause Measure
An electromechanical utilization of > 105% was detected by the Check the project planning and installation of the axis system.
I2xT model. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 49.16
Description: Braking resistor temperature monitoring
Cause Measure
Monitoring of the external braking resistor has tripped. Check configuration of the axis system.
The temperature of the externally connected braking resistor is
too high.
Incorrect wiring. Check braking resistor installation.
Subfault: 49.17
Description: Internal braking resistor utilization 105%
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Cause Measure
The utilization of the internal braking resistor has reached the Check the project planning and installation of the axis system.
switch-off threshold of > 105%.

Operation
Faults at the power supply module 10
Subfault: 49.18
Description: Internal device temperature
Cause Measure
An impermissibly high internal unit temperature was detected. – Clarify the temperature condition of the axis system.
– Check ventilation of the control cabinet.
– Check mounting position, fan function.
– Check heat sink and fan for dirt and clean.
Subfault: 49.19
Description: External fault
Cause Measure
Another module bus station has requested external emergency Eliminate emergency shutdown condition at the module bus
stop. station.
Subfault: 49.20
10
Description: Utilization 100%
Response: Remote – standard fault
Cause Measure
An electromechanical utilization of > 100% was detected by the Check the project planning and installation of the axis system.
I2xT model. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 49.21
Description: Internal braking resistor utilization 100%
Cause Measure
The utilization of the internal braking resistor has reached the Check installation of braking resistor and configuration of the
switch-off threshold of > 100%. axis system.
Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 49.22
Description: Overtemperature 100%
Cause Measure
The permitted heat sink temperature was exceeded. – Check mounting position and fan function.
– Check heat sink and fan for dirt and clean.
– Check the project planning and installation of the axis sys-
tem.
Subfault: 49.23
Description: Module bus timeout
Cause Measure
The slave does not receive any telegrams. Check the module bus cable.
Subfault: 49.24
Description: Module bus initialization
Response: Remote – warning
Cause Measure
Module bus system not yet initialized. Check the module bus cable.
Subfault: 49.25
Description: Module bus CRC fault
Cause Measure
23085711/EN – 03/2017
CRC fault. Check the module bus cable.
Subfault: 49.26
Description: Module bus station fault
Cause Measure
More than 15 module bus stations (axes) are connected to the Connect a maximum of 15 stations.
module bus master.

10 Operation
Faults at the power supply module
Subfault: 49.27
Description: Fan function fault
Cause Measure
One of the fans is not connected, or is blocked mechanically. – Check fan plug connector.
– Check fan for mechanical blockage.
– Replace the fan.
Subfault: 49.28
Description: Temperature prewarning
Cause Measure
The temperature of the heat sink has reached the prewarning – Check mounting position and fan function.
threshold. – Check heat sink and fan for dirt and clean.
– Check the project planning and installation of the axis sys-
tem.
Subfault: 49.29
Description: Utilization prewarning
Cause Measure
An electromechanical utilization greater than the electromech- Check the project planning and installation of the axis system.
anical utilization of the prewarning threshold was detected by
the I2xT model.
Subfault: 49.30
Description: Internal braking resistor utilization prewarning
Cause Measure
The utilization of the internal braking resistor has reached the Check the connection and project planning of the braking res-
prewarning threshold. istor.
Subfault: 49.31
Description: Braking resistor connection monitoring
Cause Measure
Connection monitoring has not detected a connected braking Check the connection of the braking resistor.
resistor.
The connected braking resistor is not within the projected Check the connection and project planning of the braking res-
range. istor.
Short circuit in the braking resistor. Check the connection of the braking resistor.
Subfault: 49.32
Description: Thermal overload of the additional capacity
Cause Measure
Additional capacity at full thermal capacity. Braking resistor Check device utilization and project planning.
converters regenerative energy into heat.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Operation
Axis module fault 10
10.5 Axis module fault
10.5.1 Fault 1 Output stage monitoring

Subfault: 1.1
Description: Short circuit in motor output terminals
Response: Inhibit output stage
Cause Measure
Overcurrent in output stage or faulty output stage control was Possible causes for overcurrent are short circuit at the output,
detected, and output stage was inhibited by the hardware. excessive motor current, or a defective power output stage.
Subfault: 1.2
Description: Overcurrent in output stage
Cause Measure
Motor current too high. Connect a smaller motor. 10
Current supply. Check current supply.
Current transformer. Check current transformer.
Ramp limit is deactivated and set ramp time is too short. Increase ramp time.
Defective phase module. Check phase module.
Supply voltage 24 V or 24 V generated from it is instable. Check 24 V supply voltage.
Interruption or short circuit on the signal lines of the phase Check signal lines.
modules.
10.5.2 Fault 3 Ground fault

Subfault: 3.1
Description: Ground fault
Cause Measure
Ground fault in motor lead. Eliminate ground fault in motor lead.
Ground fault in inverter. Eliminate ground fault in inverter.
Ground fault in motor. Eliminate ground fault in motor.
10.5.3 Fault 4 Brake chopper

Subfault: 4.1
Description: Brake chopper overcurrent
Cause Measure
Too much generative power. Extend deceleration ramps.
Short circuit in the braking resistor circuit. Check supply cable to braking resistor.
Resistance of braking resistor is too high. Check technical data of braking resistor.
Subfault: 4.2
Description: Brake chopper defective
Cause Measure
Output stage of brake chopper defective. Replace defective brake chopper.
10.5.4 Fault 6 Line fault

23085711/EN – 03/2017
Subfault: 6.1
Description: Line phase failure
Response: Line phase failure
Cause Measure
A missing line phase was detected. Check the supply system cable.
DC link voltage periodically too low. Check dimensioning of the supply system.
Inadequate line voltage quality. Check supply (fuses, contactor).

10 Operation
Axis module fault
10.5.5 Fault 7 DC link fault

Subfault: 7.1
Description: DC link overvoltage
Cause Measure
The maximum permitted DC link voltage limit was exceeded, – Extend deceleration ramps.
and the output stage was inhibited by the hardware. – Check supply cable to the braking resistor.
– Check technical data of braking resistor.
10.5.6 Fault 8 Speed monitoring fault

Subfault: 8.1
Description: Speed monitoring – motor mode
Cause Measure
The speed controller operates at setting limit (mechanical over- Increase set delay time of speed monitoring or reduce load.
load or phase failure in the supply system or the motor).
The encoder is not connected correctly. Check encoder connection and direction of rotation. If neces-
sary, increase current limiting or reduce acceleration values.
Encoder has incorrect direction of rotation. – Check encoder connection and direction of rotation. If neces-
sary, increase current limiting. If necessary, reduce accelera-
tion values.
– Check motor lead and motor, check line phases.
Subfault: 8.2
Description: Speed monitoring – generator mode
Cause Measure
The speed controller operates at setting limit (mechanical over- Increase set delay time of speed monitoring or reduce regener-
load or phase failure in the supply system or the motor). ative load.
The encoder is not connected correctly. Check encoder connection and direction of rotation. If neces-
sary, increase current limiting or reduce deceleration values.
Encoder has incorrect direction of rotation. – Check encoder connection and direction of rotation. If neces-
sary, increase current limiting. If necessary, reduce decelera-
tion values.
– Check motor lead and motor, check line phases.
Subfault: 8.3
Description: Motor limit speed exceeded
Cause Measure
The maximum permitted motor speed was exceeded. Reduce the maximum speed.
10.5.7 Fault 9 control mode

Subfault: 9.1
Description: Magnetization of motor not possible
Cause Measure
The user current limit or output stage monitoring has reduced – Reduce output stage utilization (e.g. by reducing the PWM
the possible maximum current to such a degree that the re- frequency or by reducing the load).
quired magnetization current cannot be set. – Increase the user current limit.
Subfault: 9.2
Description: The requested operating mode is not possible with the active control mode
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Cause Measure
The current FCB has activated an operating mode. The active Start up control mode that supports the required operating
control mode does not support this operating mode, for ex- mode. Connect encoder is necessary. Select an operating
ample "position control" or "torque control" with V/f control mode that is supported by the current control mode.
mode.

Operation
Subfault: 9.3
Description: Absolute rotor position not available
Cause Measure
The current control mode requires an absolute rotor position. Use absolute encoder, or identify the rotor position using FCB
The encoder selected for "Source is actual speed" does not 18.
provide an absolute rotor position.
Subfault: 9.4
Description: Correct current supply of motor not possible
Cause Measure
Failure to set the required current during premagnetization. Check the cabling, or disable the function "current monitoring
during premagnetization".
Subfault: 9.5
Description: Maximum output frequency exceeded
10
Cause Measure
Maximum output frequency exceeded. Reduce maximum speed.
Subfault: 9.6
Description: Maximum model speed exceeded
Cause Measure
The speed of the drive calculated in ELSM® control mode is If possible minimize the "Speed/position controller sampling
too high for motor control. cycle", or reduce the speed.
Subfault: 9.8
Description: Flux model error
Cause Measure
The rotor flux calculated by the motor model is not plausible, or – Check configuration data.
the calculated internal voltage is too small. – Check motor data.
– Check machines: Idle state or too low speed.
– Contact SEW-EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 9.9
Description: Parameter measurement not possible with active motor type
Cause Measure
Parameter measurement is only possible with "asynchronous" Select the correct motor type.
and "synchronous" motor types. No magnetic reluctance and
LSPM motors.
10.5.8 Fault 10 Data flexibilization layer

Subfault: 10.1
Description: Initialization
Response: Application stop (with output stage inhibit)
Cause Measure
Fault during init task. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 10.2
Description: Illegal operation code
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Cause Measure
Illegal opcode in the data flexibilization layer program. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 10.3
Description: Memory access
Cause Measure
Memory area violated while accessing array. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.

10 Operation
Axis module fault
Subfault: 10.4
Description: Stack
Cause Measure
Data flexibilization layer stack overflow. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 10.5
Description: Division by 0
Cause Measure
Division by 0. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 10.6
Description: Runtime
Cause Measure
Runtime error/WatchDog. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
PDI or PDO tasks. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 10.7
Description: Calculation result of multiplication/division command too large
Cause Measure
The calculation result of a multiplication/division command in Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
the data flexibilization layer program exceeds 32 bits.
The result cannot be written into the result variable. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 10.8
Description: Illegal connection
Cause Measure
The index used in connect is not allowed. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 10.9
Description: CRC code
Cause Measure
The CRC checksum of the code is wrong. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 10.10
Description: Setpoint cycle time not supported
Cause Measure
Non-supported setpoint cycle time parameterized. Set the setpoint cycle time to the default value 1 ms.
Subfault: 10.11
Description: No application program loaded
Cause Measure
No data flexibilization layer application program loaded. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 10.99
Description: Unknown error
Cause Measure
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Unknown data flexibilization layer error. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.

Operation
10.5.9 Fault 11 Temperature monitoring
Subfault: 11.1
Description: Heat sink overtemperature
Cause Measure
The maximum permitted heat sink temperature was exceeded. – Reduce load.
The capacity utilization is possibly too high. – Reduce rms value of current.
– Reduce PWM frequency.
– Ensure sufficient cooling.
– Reduce ambient temperature.
Subfault: 11.2
Description: Heat sink utilization – prewarning
Response: Heat sink utilization – prewarning
Cause Measure
High thermal load on the heat sink of the device, and the pre- – Reduce load. 10
warning threshold was reached. – Reduce rms value of output current.
– Reduce PWM frequency.
– Ensure sufficient cooling.
Subfault: 11.3
Description: Device utilization
Cause Measure
The temperature has reached or exceeded the switch-off Reduce load.
threshold. Possible causes: Mean output current too high.
PWM frequency too high. Reduce PWM frequency.
Ambient temperature too high. Ensure sufficient cooling.
Unfavorable air convection. Check air convection.
Fan defective. Inspect and replace fan, if necessary.
Subfault: 11.5
Description: Electromechanical utilization
Cause Measure
The electromechanical components of the device are over- Reduce the load: If necessary, reduce the rms value of the cur-
loaded by excessive continuous current. rent.
Subfault: 11.6
Description: Electromechanical utilization – prewarning
Response: Electromechanical utilization – prewarning
Cause Measure
High load on the electromechanical components of the device – Reduce load.
due to the high continuous current; the prewarning threshold – Reduce PWM frequency.
was reached. – Reduce rms value of current.
Subfault: 11.7
Description: Wire break of the temperature sensor of the heat sink
Cause Measure
Wire break of the temperature sensor of the heat sink. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 11.8
Description: Short circuit on the temperature sensor of the heat sink
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Cause Measure
Short circuit on the temperature sensor of the heat sink. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.

10 Operation
Axis module fault
10.5.10 Fault 12 Brake

Subfault: 12.1
Description: Brake output
Cause Measure
No brake connected. Check brake connection.
Brake cable disconnected when the device is switched on. Check brake connection.
Overload due to overcurrent > 2 A. Check sequential profile of brake control.
Overload due to excessive connection (approx. > 0.5 Hz). Check sequential profile of brake control.
Monitoring is only active with parameter settings “Brake in- Check if connected brake is permitted.
stalled” and “Brake applied”.
Subfault: 12.2
Description: 24 V brake voltage
Cause Measure
24 V supply not within permitted tolerance of ±10%. Check 24 V supply voltage.
Monitoring is only works with parameter settings “Brake in- Check parameter setting.
stalled” and “Brake applied”.
10.5.11 Error 13 Encoder 1

Subfault: 13.1
Description: Position comparison check
Response: Encoder 1 – latest critical fault
Cause Measure
Faulty comparison between raw position and track counter of – Check the track signal wiring.
absolute encoder. – Check interference source (e.g. from EMC).
– Replace encoder.
– Replace card.
Note: In the "emergency mode" manual mode, you can move
the drive even with a fault in the external position encoder.
Subfault: 13.2
Description: Unknown encoder type
Cause Measure
Encoder type not known; is not supported by the inverter. – Check encoder type.
Subfault: 13.3
Description: Invalid data
Cause Measure
Invalid encoder nameplate data (measuring steps/pulses per – Check startup parameters.
revolution/multi-turn). – Replace encoder.
Subfault: 13.4
Description: Track measurement
Cause Measure
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Faulty track measurement. – Switch the device off and on again.

– Check wiring.
– Check interference source (e.g. from EMC).
– Check/replace encoder.

Operation
Subfault: 13.5
Description: Internal warning
Response: Encoder – warning
Cause Measure
Encoder signals warning status. – Check wiring.
– Check interference source (light beam interrupted, reflector,
data cable, etc.).
– Clean sensor.
Subfault: 13.6
Description: Signal level too low
Cause Measure
Error while monitoring signal level; vector below permitted limit. – Check wiring.
– Check encoder. 10
Subfault: 13.7
Description: Signal level too high
Cause Measure
Error while monitoring signal level; vector exceeds permitted Check the gear ratio of the resolver in use.
limit. Note: In the "emergency mode" manual mode, you can move
Subfault: 13.8
Description: Signal level monitoring
Cause Measure
Error while monitoring signal level; vector exceeds permitted Check the encoder mounting position.
Subfault: 13.9
Description: Quadrant check
Cause Measure
Error while checking quadrants (sine encoder). – Switch the device off and on again.
– Check wiring.
Subfault: 13.10
Description: Position tolerance band monitoring
Cause Measure
Position outside tolerance band. – Check startup parameters.
– Check wiring.
data cable, etc.).
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Subfault: 13.11
Description: Data timeout
Cause Measure
Timeout of encoder process data. – Check interference source (e.g. from EMC).
– Check startup parameters.

10 Operation
Axis module fault
Subfault: 13.12
Description: Emergency
Cause Measure
Encoder sends emergency error message. – Check interference source (e.g. from EMC).
Subfault: 13.13
Response: Encoder 1 – latest fault
Cause Measure
Communication error during initialization. – Check parameterization.
– Check baud rate.
– CANopen interface at encoder (node ID) not set correctly.
– Check wiring.
Subfault: 13.14
Description: Communication
Cause Measure
Error in communication to the encoder. – Check voltage supply.
– Check wiring.
Subfault: 13.15
Description: System error
Cause Measure
Encoder evaluation signals a system fault. – Multi-turn encoder is outside the configured track are.
– Check limits.
– Check correct settings of encoder numerator/denominator
factors.
– Switch off the device and on again.
– Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE service if the error is still present.
Subfault: 13.16
Description: Permanent high level in data line – critical
Cause Measure
Permanent high level of data signal. – Check wiring.
– Check encoder.
Subfault: 13.17
Description: Permanent high level in data line.
Cause Measure
23085711/EN – 03/2017

– Check encoder.

Operation
Subfault: 13.18
Description: Permanent low level in data line – critical
Cause Measure
Permanent low level of data signal. – Check wiring.
– Check encoder.
Subfault: 13.19
Description: Permanent low level in data line
Cause Measure
– Check encoder.
Note: In the "emergency mode" manual mode, you can move 10
Subfault: 13.20
Description: SSI error bit – critical
Cause Measure
Error bit set in SSI protocol. – Check startup parameters.
– Check settings at SSI encoder (error bit).
– Check wiring.
data cable, etc.).
Subfault: 13.21
Description: SSI error bit
Cause Measure
– Check wiring.
data cable, etc.).
Subfault: 13.22
Description: Internal fault – critical
Cause Measure
Encoder signals internal fault status. – Check wiring.
data cable, etc.).
Subfault: 13.23
Description: Internal fault
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Cause Measure
data cable, etc.).

10 Operation
Axis module fault
Subfault: 13.24
Description: Travel range exceeded
Cause Measure
The current position mode (8381.10) does not permit a larger Check travel range.
travel range. Note: In the "emergency mode" manual mode, you can move
Subfault: 13.25
Description: Encoder startup
Cause Measure
Fatal error during startup. Switch the device off and on again.
10.5.12 Error 14 Encoder 2

Subfault: 14.1
Description: Position comparison check
Cause Measure
Faulty comparison between raw position and track counter of – Check the track signal wiring.
absolute encoder. – Check interference source (e.g. from EMC).
– Replace card.
Subfault: 14.2
Description: Unknown encoder type
Cause Measure
Encoder type not known; not supported by inverter. – Check encoder type.
Subfault: 14.3
Description: Invalid data
Cause Measure
Invalid encoder nameplate data (measuring steps/pulses per – Check startup parameters.
revolution/multi-turn). – Replace encoder.
Subfault: 14.4
Description: Track measurement
Cause Measure
Faulty track measurement. – Switch the device off and on again.
– Check wiring.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Subfault: 14.5
Description: Internal warning
Response: Encoder – warning
Cause Measure
Encoder signals warning status. – Check wiring.
data cable, etc.).
– Clean sensor.

Operation
Subfault: 14.6
Description: Signal level too low
Cause Measure
Error while monitoring signal level; vector below permitted limit. – Check wiring.
– Check encoder.
Subfault: 14.7
Description: Signal level too high
Cause Measure
Error while monitoring signal level; vector exceeds permitted Check the gear ratio of the resolver in use.
limit. Note: In the "emergency mode" manual mode, you can move 10
Subfault: 14.8
Description: Signal level monitoring
Cause Measure
Error while monitoring signal level; vector exceeds permitted Check the encoder mounting position.
Subfault: 14.9
Description: Quadrant check
Cause Measure
Error while checking quadrants (sine encoder). – Switch the device off and on again.
– Check wiring.
Subfault: 14.10
Description: Position tolerance band monitoring
Cause Measure
Position outside tolerance band. – Check startup parameters.
– Check wiring.
data cable, etc.).
Subfault: 14.11
Description: Data timeout
Cause Measure
Timeout of encoder process data. – Check interference source (e.g. from EMC).
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Subfault: 14.12
Description: Emergency
Cause Measure
Encoder sends emergency error message. – Check interference source (e.g. from EMC).

10 Operation
Axis module fault
Subfault: 14.13
Cause Measure
Communication error during initialization. – Check parameterization.
– Check baud rate.
– CANopen interface at encoder (node ID) not set correctly.
– Check wiring.
Subfault: 14.14
Description: Communication
Cause Measure
Error in communication to the encoder. – Check voltage supply.
– Check wiring.
Subfault: 14.15
Description: System error
Cause Measure
Encoder evaluation signals a system fault. – Multi-turn encoder is outside the configured track are.
– Check limits.
– Check correct settings of encoder numerator/denominator
factors.
– Switch the device off and on again.
Subfault: 14.16
Description: Permanent high level in data line – critical
Cause Measure
– Check encoder.
Subfault: 14.17
Description: Permanent high level in the data line
Cause Measure
– Check encoder.
Subfault: 14.18
Description: Permanent low level in data line – critical
Cause Measure
23085711/EN – 03/2017

– Check encoder.

Operation
Subfault: 14.19
Description: Permanent low level in data line
Cause Measure
– Check encoder.
Subfault: 14.20
Description: SSI error bit – critical
Cause Measure
– Check wiring. 10
data cable, etc.).
Subfault: 14.21
Description: SSI error bit
Cause Measure
– Check wiring.
data cable, etc.).
Subfault: 14.22
Description: Internal fault – critical
Cause Measure
data cable, etc.).
Subfault: 14.23
Description: Internal fault
Cause Measure
data cable, etc.).
Subfault: 14.24
Description: Travel range exceeded
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Cause Measure
The current position mode (8382.10) does not permit a larger Check travel range.
travel range. Note: In the "emergency mode" manual mode, you can move

10 Operation
Axis module fault
Subfault: 14.25
Description: Encoder startup
Cause Measure
Fatal error during startup. Switch the device off and on again.
10.5.13 Error 16 Startup

Subfault: 16.1
Description: Motor not started up yet
Cause Measure
The motor has not yet been started up completely. Perform complete startup of the motor.
Subfault: 16.2
Description: Cannot calculate controller parameters
Cause Measure
The delay of the encoder in use is too long to calculate the re- Use an encoder with shorter delay, or contact the
quired filter coefficients. SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 16.3
Description: Thermal motor model not possible
Cause Measure
Invalid parameters for the thermal motor model or drive enable Check the parameters of the thermal motor model, and perform
although starting up the thermal model has not been completed startup.
yet.
Subfault: 16.4
Description: Current limit too high
Cause Measure
The current limit value is greater than the maximum current of Set the current limit to a smaller value than the maximum cur-
the inverter. rent of the inverter.
Subfault: 16.5
Description: Current limit smaller than magnetizing current of motor
Cause Measure
The current limit is smaller than the magnetizing current of the Increase current limit. Required magnetizing current: See dia-
motor calculated by the active control mode. gnostics parameters of control mode.
Subfault: 16.6
Description: Control mode not possible
Cause Measure
Wrong control mode selected for the motor. Choose a control mode that matches the selected motor.
Subfault: 16.7
Description: PWM frequency not possible
Cause Measure
23085711/EN – 03/2017
The specified PWM frequency is not allowed for this power out- Select different PWM frequency. Possible PWM frequencies;
put stage. see device configuration data.
Subfault: 16.8
Description: Temperature sensor motor 1
Cause Measure
Faulty startup of temperature sensor for motor 1. Perform startup again.

Operation
Subfault: 16.9
Description: Temperature sensor motor 2
Cause Measure
Faulty startup of temperature sensor for motor 2. Perform startup again.
Subfault: 16.10
Description: Actual position source not assigned
Cause Measure
The active control mode requires an encoder for positioning Assign actual position source in encoder assignment of the act-
mode. ive parameter set: 8565.3 or 8566.3.
If no encoder is installed, activate the FCBs only using "torque
control" or "speed control" mode.
Subfault: 16.11
Description: Motor data calculation error
10
Cause Measure
Motor startup is not possible because of inconsistent motor Motor data and device configuration data are checked for
data or wrong device configuration data. plausibility. Or contact SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 16.12
Description: Motor data write sequence
Cause Measure
Subindex 1 was not written to zero before writing the electrical Reset error. Set parameters 8360/1 or 8361/1 to 0 before writ-
startup parameters 8357, 8360, 8394, 8420 or 8358, 8361, ing additional parameters.
8395, 8421.
Subfault: 16.20
Description: Nominal speed too high or nominal frequency too low
Cause Measure
During startup using nameplate data: Nominal speed too high Enter plausible motor data (nominal speed and nominal fre-
or nominal frequency too low. The resulting number of pole quency).
pairs is 0.
Subfault: 16.21
Description: Nominal slip negative
Cause Measure
During startup using nameplate data, the calculated nominal Enter plausible motor data (nominal frequency, nominal speed,
slip is negative: Nominal frequency too low or nominal speed number of pole pairs).
too high or number of pole pairs too high.
Subfault: 16.22
Description: Specify the number of pole pairs
Cause Measure
During startup using nameplate data: It is not possible to calcu- Enter the number of pole pairs.
late the number of pole pairs accurately from nominal fre-
quency and nominal speed.
Subfault: 16.23
Description: Plausibility check failed.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Cause Measure
During startup using nameplate data: the estimated nominal Check entered nameplate data for plausibility.
power does not match the entered nominal power.

10 Operation
Axis module fault
Subfault: 16.24
Description: Speed controller sampling cycle not possible with current PWM frequency or current control mode
Cause Measure
At PWM frequency "2.5 kHz", only the speed controller Increase PWM frequency or increase sampling cycle of speed
sampling cycle of 2 ms is permitted. For the ELSM® control controller to 2 ms. Set the sampling cycle to 1 ms or 2 ms for
mode, only the speed controller sampling times 1 ms and 2 ms ELSM® control mode.
are permitted.
Subfault: 16.25
Description: User current limit too low for standstill current
Cause Measure
The user current limit value is too small for the minimum stand- Increase the user current limit, or disable the standstill current
still current. function.
Subfault: 16.26
Description: Nominal values incomplete
Cause Measure
During startup using nameplate data: Nominal voltage, nominal Enter nominal voltage, nominal current, nominal speed, and
current, nominal speed, or nominal torque not entered. nominal torque.
Subfault: 16.27
Description: Maximum current or maximum torque not plausible
Cause Measure
During startup using nameplate data: Maximum current or max- Check maximum current and maximum torque.
imum torque not entered, or maximum current and maximum
torque not plausible.
Subfault: 16.30
Description: Faulty EtherCAT® EEPROM configuration status.
Response: Warning
Cause Measure
Faulty EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS EEPROM configuration status. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
EEPROM not loaded, binary file not loaded.
Faulty EEPROM loading procedure. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Faulty EEPROM checksum. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
10.5.14 Error 17 Internal processor error

Subfault: 17.7
Description: Exception error
Cause Measure
An exception trap has occurred in the CPU. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
10.5.15 Error 18 Software error

Subfault: 18.1
Description: Motor management
System state: Fault acknowledgement with CPU reset
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Cause Measure
An error was detected at the motor management interface. Switch the device off and on again.
Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE service if the error is still present.

Operation
Subfault: 18.4
Description: Task system
Cause Measure
An error was detected during processing the internal task sys- Switch the device off and on again.
tem. This can for example be a timeout for cyclic tasks. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE service if the error is still present.
Subfault: 18.7
Description: Fatal error
Cause Measure
A fatal software error occurred. Switch the device off and on again. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE
service if the error is still present.
Subfault: 18.8
10
Description: Invalid error code
Cause Measure
An invalid error code was requested. Switch the device off and on again.
Subfault: 18.9
Description: Internal software error
Cause Measure
A group software error is issued. Switch the device off and on again.
Subfault: 18.10
Description: Watchdog
Cause Measure
The software no longer works within the intended cycle time. Switch the device off and on again.
Subfault: 18.12
Description: Configuration data
Cause Measure
Configuration data not plausible or cannot be interpreted by the Load firmware update or valid configuration data.
active firmware version.
10.5.16 Error 19 Process data

Subfault: 19.1
Description: Torque violation
Cause Measure
The specified torque values are not plausible. Adjust torque values.
Subfault: 19.2
Description: Position setpoint violation
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Cause Measure
The position setpoint is outside the software limit switches. Check position setpoint.
The position setpoint is outside the modulo range. Check position setpoint.
Position in user unit generates number overflow in system Check position in user unit.
units.

10 Operation
Axis module fault
Subfault: 19.3
Description: Speed setpoint violation
Cause Measure
The specified speed setpoints are not plausible. Adjust speed setpoints.
Subfault: 19.4
Description: Acceleration setpoint violation
Response: Emergency stop (with output stage inhibit)
Cause Measure
The specified acceleration setpoints are not plausible. Adjust acceleration setpoints.
Subfault: 19.5
Description: Drive function does not exist
Cause Measure
A non-existing drive function (FCB) was selected via process Set an existing FCB number for FCB selection via process
data. data.
Subfault: 19.7
Description: Referencing missing
Cause Measure
The activated function is only permitted with referenced en- Reference the encoder first, then activate the function.
coder.
Subfault: 19.8
Description: Data set changeover not allowed
Cause Measure
You have requested to change over to another data set while Before changing to another data set, inhibit the output stage.
the output stage is enabled.
Subfault: 19.9
Description: Jerk setpoint violation
Cause Measure
Implausible jerk values. Adjust jerk setpoints.
10.5.17 Fault 20 Device monitoring

Subfault: 20.1
Description: Supply voltage – fault
Cause Measure
The internal electronics supply voltage or the externally con- Check the voltage level of the external 24 V standby supply
nected 24 V standby supply voltage are outside the permitted voltage and check for correct connection. If required, correct.
voltage range. – Acknowledge the error. If this does not help and the error
message is displayed again, the device must be replaced.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Operation
Subfault: 20.2
Description: Supply voltage – overload fault
Cause Measure
For MOVIDRIVE® system, the current load of the current paths Remove all external consumers:
of the 24 V standby supply voltage in the device is too high. – from the digital output terminals of the basic device.
The device signal output of the device was de-energized be- – from other installed options.
cause of the fault message. – from all encoder connections.
– from all other consumers at the 24 V output voltage termin-
als.
– Acknowledge error.
– If the fault is no longer displayed, reconnect the removed
consumers one after the other until the fault message is dis-
played again. The consumer connected last is the one that
caused the internal supply voltage overload.
– To eliminate the fault, use a consumer with a lower current
consumption or eliminate possible short circuit. 10
Subfault: 20.7
Description: Internal hardware error
Cause Measure
An error has occurred in the device hardware. Acknowledge error. If this does not help and the error message
is displayed again, the device must be replaced.
Subfault: 20.8
Description: Fan function – warning
Response: Warning with self reset
Cause Measure
The function of the fan is impaired. Check fan for proper functioning.
Subfault: 20.9
Description: Fan function – fault
Cause Measure
The fan is defective. Replace fan.
Subfault: 20.10
Description: Fan supply voltage – fault
Cause Measure
The supply voltage of the fan is missing. Check connection or establish connection.
Subfault: 20.11
Description: STO – switching delay
Cause Measure
A switching delay occurred between the two STO channels. Check STO channels.
10.5.18 Fault 23 Power section

Subfault: 23.1
Description: Warning
Cause Measure
Power section fault with fault response of the type "warning". See also "power section subcomponent" fault status.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Subfault: 23.2
Description: Fault
Cause Measure
Power section fault with fault response of the type "standard". See also "power section subcomponent" fault status.

10 Operation
Axis module fault
Subfault: 23.3
Description: Critical error
Cause Measure
Power section fault with fault response of the type "critical See also "power section subcomponent" fault status.
error".
Subfault: 23.4
Description: Hardware fault
Cause Measure
A fault occurred in a hardware component of the power section, – Check current supply.
e.g.: – Check current transformer.
– Overcurrent hardware comparator. – Increase ramp time.
– Check phase modules.
– Check for correct motor size (the motor current is too high).
– Perform power section update.
SMPS fault, hardware fault. – Check current supply.
– Check 24 V supply voltage.
Fault at gate driver of an IGBT. Defect in the power output stage. Contact the
Invalid process data configuration. Status of control section and Perform power section update.
power section are not compatible.
Subfault: 23.5
Description: Invalid process data configuration
Cause Measure
Invalid process data configuration. Perform power section update.
10.5.19 Error 24 Cam switch

Subfault: 24.1
Description: Cam window limits interchanged
Response: Warning
Cause Measure
Left cam window limit is larger than right limit. Check cam windows limits and adjust.
Subfault: 24.2
Description: Cam window limit not within modulo range
Response: Warning
Cause Measure
Cam window limit not within modulo range. Check cam windows limits and adjust.
10.5.20 Error 25 Parameter memory monitoring

Subfault: 25.2
Description: NV memory — runtime error
Cause Measure
Runtime error of the non-volatile memory system. – Reset device.
If this occurs repeatedly, replace device. Contact the
Subfault: 25.3
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Description: NV data import – error

Cause Measure
– Error while importing non-volatile memory data from non-
volatile memory.

Operation
Subfault: 25.4
Description: NV setup – error
Cause Measure
Error while performing delivery state or during basic initializa- – Reset device.
tion of the parameters. If this occurs repeatedly, replace device. Contact the
Subfault: 25.5
Description: NV data error
Cause Measure
Faulty data detected in non-volatile memory system. The data on the (mobile) non-volatile memory might have been
formatted for another device. You can rectify the error by re-
formatting the data (basic initialization).
Subfault: 25.6
10
Description: NV memory – incompatible data
Cause Measure
Incompatible data detected while reading non-volatile memory. The data on the (mobile) non-volatile memory might have been
formatted for another device. You can rectify the error by re-
formatting the data (basic initialization).
Subfault: 25.7
Description: NV memory initialization – error
Cause Measure
Error while initializing non-volatile memory system. – Reset device.
Subfault: 25.9
Description: NV memory hardware – error
Cause Measure
Faulty access to non-volatile memory hardware. – Reset device.
Subfault: 25.10
Description: Power section configuration data – version conflict
Cause Measure
Wrong version of configuration data of the power section. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 25.11
Description: Control electronics configuration data – version conflict
Cause Measure
Wrong version of configuration data of control electronics. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 25.12
Description: Power section configuration data – CRC error
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Cause Measure
Faulty configuration data of the power section. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 25.13
Description: Configuration data of control electronics – CRC error
Cause Measure
Faulty configuration data of the control electronics. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.

10 Operation
Axis module fault
Subfault: 25.20
Description: Initialization error – basic unit memory
Cause Measure
Initialization error of the basic unit memory. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 25.21
Description: Runtime error – basic unit memory
Cause Measure
Runtime error in the memory of the basic unit. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 25.30
Description: Initialization error – replaceable memory module
Cause Measure
Initialization error of the replaceable memory module. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 25.31
Description: Runtime error – replaceable memory module
Cause Measure
Runtime error of the replaceable memory module. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 25.40
Description: Initialization error – safety unit memory
Cause Measure
Initialization error of the Safety unit memory. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 25.41
Description: Runtime error – Safety unit memory
Cause Measure
Runtime error of the Safety unit memory. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 25.50
Description: Runtime error – replaceable safety memory module
Cause Measure
Runtime error of the replaceable safety memory module. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 25.60
Description: Compatibility fault – replaceable memory module
Cause Measure
Data on replaceable memory module does not match device. Establish compatibility with the device, e.g. by installing miss-
ing options, etc.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Subfault: 25.61
Description: Fault – restore point basic unit memory
Cause Measure
The restore point could not be created. Delete restore point.

Operation
Subfault: 25.70
Description: NV memory – incompatible option card configuration
Cause Measure
Incompatible option card configuration detected. – Restore the initial option setup.
The current configuration of the option card does not match the Acknowledge the changed configuration in MOVISUITE®: Dia-
state of the stored startup. gnostics/Status/Error status/Reset = "with parameter accept-
An option card that was installed during startup has been re- ance".
moved, for example. Reset the device to delivery state in MOVISUITE®: Reset
setup/reset device parameter/reset delivery state.
10.5.21 Fault 26 External fault

Subfault: 26.1
Description: Terminal
Response: External fault 10
Cause Measure
Error message about external error source. Programmable via 8622.5 (default: Application stop (+output
stage inhibit)).
Subfault: 26.2
Description: Emergency shutdown
Cause Measure
Another module bus station has requested external emergency Check the other module bus stations for errors.
stop.
Subfault: 26.3
Description: Power section emergency shutdown
Cause Measure
Power section has requested external emergency stop. Power section has detected critical error.
Subfault: 26.4
Description: External braking resistor fault
Response: Response to external braking resistor fault
Cause Measure
The braking resistor's temperature switch connected to a ter- Check the braking resistor mounting position.
minal has tripped. – Clean the braking resistor.
– Check project planning of the resistor.
– Install larger braking resistor.
Check trip switch settings.
– Optimize travel cycle so that less regenerative energy is gen-
erated.
10.5.22 Error 28 FCB drive functions

Subfault: 28.1
Description: FCB 12 – timeout while searching zero pulse
Cause Measure
Failed to find the zero pulse of the encoder's C track within the Check encoder wiring.
specified search time during reference travel.
Subfault: 28.2
Description: FCB 12 – Hardware limit switch before reference cam
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Cause Measure
The hardware limit switch was reached during reference travel. Make sure that the reference cam is not installed behind the
The reference cam was not detected. hardware limit switch.

10 Operation
Axis module fault
Subfault: 28.3
Description: FCB 12 – Hardware limit switch and reference cam not flush
Cause Measure
Hardware limit switch and reference cam are not mounted Make sure that reference cam and hardware limit switch are in-
properly. stalled so they overlap.
Subfault: 28.4
Description: FCB 12 – reference offset error
Cause Measure
An error occurred while determining the reference offset. – Make sure that the reference offset is not set to a larger value
than the "Modulo max." limit value.
When using a single-turn absolute encoder, make sure that the
reference offset is not set to a larger value than one encoder
revolution.
Subfault: 28.6
Description: FCB 12 – limit switch/reference cam not flush/overlapping with fixed stop
Cause Measure
During reference travel to fixed stop, a hardware limit switch or Check whether the parameters set for reference travel are cor-
reference cam, which was not selected, was hit. rect.
During reference travel to fixed stop with selected hardware Check whether the parameters set for reference travel are cor-
limit switch or reference cam, the fixed stop was reached rect.
without hitting the hardware limit switch or reference cam.
Subfault: 28.7
Description: FCB 21 – test torque greater than maximum torque at motor shaft
Cause Measure
The required test torque for the brake test is higher than the Reduce the test torque.
maximum torque. It cannot be generated by the motor/inverter
combination.
Subfault: 28.8
Description: FCB 21 – test torque not reached
Cause Measure
The required test torque for the brake test exceeds the valid – Reduce the test torque.
limit values. – Check limit values.
Subfault: 28.9
Description: FCB 18 – rotor position identification not possible
Cause Measure
Rotor position identification was started with an incremental en- – Restart the rotor position identification.
coder but was aborted prematurely. – Check whether the encoder is connected correctly.
– Check whether encoder is defective.
The result of rotor position identification cannot be stored in the Select "inverter" as storage location.
encoder.
The combination of "Automatic" mode and "Encoder" storage Set the operating mode to "Manual" or the storage location to
location is not permitted. "Inverter".
Subfault: 28.10
Description: FCB 25 – unbalanced motor phases
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Cause Measure
When measuring stator resistances, significantly different val- – Check whether the motor is connected correctly.
ues were determined in the three phases. – Check all contact points on the motor and inverter.
– Check the motor and motor cable for damage.

Operation
Subfault: 28.11
Description: FCB 25 – at least one phase with high resistance
Cause Measure
At least one motor phase could not be measured during motor – Check whether the motor is connected correctly.
parameter measurement. – Check all contact points on the motor and inverter.
– Check the motor and motor cable for damage.
Subfault: 28.12
Description: FCB 25 – timeout during stator resistance measurement
Cause Measure
Motor parameter measurement was activated while motor is ro- – Stop motor.
tating. – Start motor parameter measurement when the motor is at
standstill.
Subfault: 28.13
10
Description: FCB 25 – characteristic curve identification not possible
Cause Measure
Motor parameter measurement does not allow for unique iden- Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
tification of the characteristic curve.
10.5.23 Error 29 Hardware limit switch

Subfault: 29.1
Description: Positive limit switch hit
Response: HW limit switches – current parameter set
Cause Measure
The positive hardware limit switch was hit. – Check hardware limit switch wiring.
– Check target position.
– Move clear with negative speed.
Subfault: 29.2
Description: Negative limit switch hit
Response: HW limit switches – current parameter set
Cause Measure
The negative hardware limit switch was hit. – Check hardware limit switch wiring.
– Move clear with positive speed.
Subfault: 29.3
Description: Limit switch missing
Cause Measure
Both limit switches (positive and negative) were hit at the same – Check hardware limit switch wiring.
time. – Check the parameter setting of digital inputs.
– Check the parameter setting of PO data.
Subfault: 29.4
Description: Limit switches reversed
Cause Measure
The positive hardware limit switch was hit at negative speed, or Check if hardware limit switch connections are swapped.
the negative hardware limit switch was hit at positive speed.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

10 Operation
Axis module fault
10.5.24 Error 30 Software limit switch

Subfault: 30.1
Description: Positive limit switch hit
Response: SW limit switches – current parameter set
Cause Measure
The positive software limit switch was hit. – Check software limit switch position.
– Move clear with negative speed.
Subfault: 30.2
Description: Negative limit switch hit
Response: SW limit switches – current parameter set
Cause Measure
The negative software limit switch was hit. – Check software limit switch position.
– Move clear with positive speed.
Subfault: 30.3
Description: Limit switches reversed
Cause Measure
The position value of the negative software limit switch is Check software limit switch positions.
greater than the position value of the positive software limit
switch.
10.5.25 Error 31 Thermal motor protection

Subfault: 31.1
Description: Wire break temperature sensor – motor 1
Cause Measure
The connection to the temperature sensor of motor 1 is inter- Check temperature sensor wiring.
rupted.
Subfault: 31.2
Description: Temperature sensor short circuit – motor 1
Cause Measure
Short circuit in the connection to the temperature sensor of mo- Check temperature sensor wiring.
tor 1.
Subfault: 31.3
Description: Temperature sensor overtemperature – motor 1
Cause Measure
Temperature sensor of motor 1 signals overtemperature. – Let motor cool down.
– Check for motor overload.
Subfault: 31.4
Description: Temperature model overtemperature – motor 1
Cause Measure
Temperature model of motor 1 signals overtemperature. – Let motor cool down.
Subfault: 31.5
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Description: Temperature sensor prewarning – motor 1

Response: Motor temperature prewarning – current parameter set
Cause Measure
The temperature signaled by the temperature sensor of motor Check for motor overload.
1 exceeds the prewarning threshold.

Operation
Subfault: 31.6
Description: Temperature model prewarning – motor 1
Cause Measure
Subfault: 31.7
Description: UL temperature monitoring
Cause Measure
Temperature model of the active motor signals overtemperat- Check for motor overload.
ure.
Subfault: 31.9
Description: Temperature too low – Temperature sensor – Motor 1
10
Cause Measure
The temperature signaled by the temperature sensor of motor – Check if a KTY temperature sensor is installed in the motor
1 is below -50 °C. but the parameterization is carried out for a PT1000 temperat-
ure sensor.
– Heat the motor.
Subfault: 31.11
Description: Wire break temperature sensor – motor 2
Cause Measure
The connection to the temperature sensor of motor 2 is inter- Check temperature sensor wiring.
rupted.
Subfault: 31.12
Description: Temperature sensor short circuit – motor 2
Cause Measure
Short circuit in the connection to the temperature sensor of mo- Check temperature sensor wiring.
tor 2.
Subfault: 31.13
Description: Temperature sensor overtemperature – motor 2
Cause Measure
Temperature sensor of motor 2 signals overtemperature. – Let motor cool down.
Subfault: 31.14
Description: Temperature model overtemperature – motor 2
Cause Measure
Temperature model of motor 2 signals overtemperature. – Let motor cool down.
Subfault: 31.15
Description: Temperature sensor prewarning – motor 2
Cause Measure
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Subfault: 31.16
Description: Temperature model prewarning – motor 2
Cause Measure

10 Operation
Axis module fault
Subfault: 31.19
Description: Temperature too low – Temperature sensor – Motor 2
Cause Measure
The temperature signaled by the temperature sensor of motor – Check if a KTY temperature sensor is installed in the motor
2 is below -50 °C. but the parameterization is carried out for a PT1000 temperat-
ure sensor.
– Heat the motor.
10.5.26 Error 32 Communication

Subfault: 32.2
Description: EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS timeout
Response: Fieldbus – timeout
Cause Measure
Timeout during EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS communication. – Check the wiring of system bus and module bus.
– Check for correct setting of the EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS con-
figuration in the MOVI-C® CONTROLLER.
– Check EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS timeout configuration in the
device.
Subfault: 32.3
Description: Faulty synchronization signal
Response: External synchronization
Cause Measure
Faulty synchronization signal period. Check for correct setting of the EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS configura-
tion in the MOVI-C® CONTROLLER.
Subfault: 32.4
Description: No synchronization signal
Cause Measure
No synchronization signal present. Check for correct setting of the EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS configura-
tion in the MOVI-C® CONTROLLER.
Subfault: 32.5
Description: Synchronization timeout
Cause Measure
A timeout occurred while synchronizing to the synchronization Check for correct setting of the EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS configura-
signal. tion in the MOVI-C® CONTROLLER.
Subfault: 32.6
Description: Copy parameter set
Cause Measure
Fault while downloading the parameter set to the device. – Check the wiring of system bus and module bus.
– Restart download.
Subfault: 32.7
Description: Application heartbeat timeout
Response: Application heartbeat timeout
Cause Measure
Communication interrupted between IE program in MOVI-C® – Check status of IEC program.
CONTROLLER and device. – Restart IEC program.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Subfault: 32.12
Description: Manual mode timeout
Response: Manual mode – timeout response
Cause Measure
Communication connection to the device interrupted in manual – Check whether too many programs are open on the operator
mode. PC.
Increase the timeout time in manual mode.

Operation
10.5.27 Error 33 System initialization
Subfault: 33.1
Description: Motor current measurement
Cause Measure
Motor current measurement has detected an error. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 33.2
Description: Firmware CRC check
Cause Measure
Error detected while checking the firmware. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 33.3 10
Description: RAM error
Cause Measure
Error detected while checking RAM. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 33.4
Description: Bootloader CRC check
Cause Measure
The bootloader check has detected an fault. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 33.5
Description: RAM code CRC check
Cause Measure
Error detected while checking RAM code. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 33.6
Description: FPGA configuration
Cause Measure
Error detected while checking the FPGA configuration. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 33.7
Description: Function block compatibility error
Cause Measure
The compatibility test of the function block has detected an Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
error.
Subfault: 33.8
Description: SW function block configuration
Cause Measure
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Error detected while checking the configuration of the software Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
function block.
Subfault: 33.10
Description: Boot timeout
Cause Measure
Timeout during system boot. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.

10 Operation
Axis module fault
Subfault: 33.11
Description: Hardware compatibility error
Cause Measure
The firmware does not match the device. Contact the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service.
Subfault: 33.12
Description: Memory module plugged
Cause Measure
A plugged in memory module was detected during device start. – Switch off device. Remove the memory module and restart
The setting for the device parameter source is set to "Internal the device.
memory". Change the parameter "Non-volatile memory source" to "Arbit-
rary" or "Replaceable memory module". Switch device off and
on again.
Subfault: 33.13
Description: Memory module removed
Cause Measure
The device was started without memory module. The setting Switch off device. Insert the memory module and restart the
for the device parameter source is set to "Replaceable memory device.
module".
The replaceable memory module was removed during ongoing Change parameter "Non-volatile memory source" to "Internal
operation. memory". Switch the device off and on again.
10.5.28 Error 34 Process data configuration

Subfault: 34.1
Description: Changed process data configuration
Cause Measure
The configuration data was changed during active process data – Stop the process data and make your changes. Then start
operation. the process data again.
– Perform a reset. Doing so will stop the process data, apply
the changes, and restart the process data.
10.5.29 Error 35 Function activation

Subfault: 35.1
Description: Invalid TAN
Cause Measure
Incorrect TAN was entered. Enter TAN again.
The TAN was not created for this device. Check TAN.
When using a double axis, the TAN was generated for the Enter a TAN for the assigned sub address.
wrong sub address in the device.
Subfault: 35.2
Description: Application requires a higher license
Cause Measure
The activated application module requires a higher license. Enter a TAN for higher application activation.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Subfault: 35.3
Description: Technology activation missing
Cause Measure
An activated technology function requires a technology activa- – Enter a TAN to activate the required technology function.
tion that is not available. – Activate technology function that can be operated with the
current technology activation.

Operation
Subfault: 35.4
Description: Technology activation for wrong device variant
Cause Measure
This device does not support the technology activation included – Activate a technology function that is supported by this
in this TAN. device.
– Use a device that supports the required technology function.
10.5.30 Error 42 Lag error

Subfault: 42.1
Description: Positioning lag error
Response: Positioning lag error
Cause Measure
A lag error occurred during positioning. Check encoder connection. 10
Incorrect encoder connection.
Inverted position encoder or position encoder that was incor- Check installation and connection of the position encoder.
rectly installed at the track.
Wiring faulty. Check wiring of encoder, motor, line phases.
Acceleration ramps too short. Extend acceleration ramps.
P component of positioning controller too small. Set larger P component of positioning controller.
Incorrectly set speed controller parameters. Check controller parameters.
Value of lag error tolerance too small. Increase lag error tolerance.
Mechanical components cannot move freely or are blocked. Make sure mechanical parts can move freely, check whether
they are blocked.
Subfault: 42.2
Description: Jog mode lag error
Cause Measure
A lag error occurred in jog mode (FCB 20). Check encoder connection.
Mechanical components cannot move freely or are blocked. Make sure mechanical parts can move freely, check whether
they are blocked.
Subfault: 42.3
Description: Standard lag error
Cause Measure
A lag error occurred outside a positioning process. Check encoder connection.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

10 Operation
Axis module fault
10.5.31 Fault 45 Fieldbus option

Subfault: 45.50
Description: Option card – warning
Cause Measure
The fieldbus interface signals a subcomponent fault of the type Refer to the subcomponent fault of the fieldbus interface and
"warning". perform the action required for eliminating the fault.
10.5.32 Error 46 Safety option

Subfault: 46.1
Description: No response
Cause Measure
Failed to synchronize with subcomponent. – Check device assignment of basic device and option.
– Check card slot and installation and correct if necessary.
– Perform device restart.
Subfault: 46.2
Description: Invalid variant
Cause Measure
The plugged safety option variant does not match the inverter – Remove option.
type. – Use the correct variant of the safety option.
For double axes, only variants without encoder interface can be – Remove option.
used. – Use the variant without encoder interface.
For double axes, no encoder option must be plugged in. Remove option.
Subfault: 46.3
Description: Internal communication timeout
Cause Measure
Communication interrupted between inverter and safety option. Check card slot and installation and correct if necessary.
The safety option signals a subcomponent error of the type Check card slot and installation and correct if necessary.
"warning". – Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE service if the error is still present.
Subfault: 46.50
Description: Warning
Cause Measure
The safety option signals a subcomponent fault of the type
"warning".
Subfault: 46.51
Description: Fault
Response: Emergency stop (with output stage inhibit) with self reset
Cause Measure
"standard error".
Subfault: 46.52
Description: Critical error
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Response: Inhibit output stage with self reset

Cause Measure
"critical error".

Operation
10.5.33 Fault 47 Supply unit
Subfault: 47.1
Description: Supply unit – warning
Cause Measure
The supply unit signals a fault with response type "warning".
The fault is only displayed.
Subfault: 47.2
Description: Supply unit – standard error
Cause Measure
The supply unit signals a fault with response type "standard".
The axis performs a fault response that is determined by the
driver for the supply unit implemented on the axis.
10
Subfault: 47.3
Description: Supply unit – critical error
Cause Measure
The supply unit signals a fault with response type "Critical
error". The axis performs a fault response that is determined by
the driver for the supply unit implemented on the axis.
10.5.34 Error 48 Module bus

Subfault: 48.1
Description: Incompatible
Cause Measure
Module bus slave and module bus master are not compatible.
Subfault: 48.2
Description: Timeout
Cause Measure
Timeout detected by module bus. Check cable connections and voltage supply of module bus
stations.
10.5.35 Error 50 I/O option

Subfault: 50.1
Description: Boot synchronization timeout
Cause Measure
Card is plugged in device but cannot be addressed. – Check device assignment of basic device and option.
– Check card slot and installation and correct if necessary.
– Restart device.
Subfault: 50.2
Description: CRC error of FPGA driver
Cause Measure
Communication between FPGA and option card does not work, – Check card slot and installation and correct if necessary.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
or is interrupted. – Check for EMC-compliant installation.

– Restart device.
Subfault: 50.3
Description: CRC error of option card
Cause Measure
The option card signals a CRC error on the SPI bus. – Check card slot and installation and correct if necessary.
– Check for EMC-compliant installation.
– Restart device.

10 Operation
Axis module fault
Subfault: 50.4
Description: Timeout error of the option card
Cause Measure
The option card signals a timeout error on the SPI bus. – Check card slot and installation and correct if necessary.
– Restart device.
Subfault: 50.5
Description: Watchdog error of the option card
Cause Measure
Microcontroller of the option card signals a watchdog error. – Check card slot and installation and correct if necessary.
– Restart device.
Subfault: 50.6
Description: Ready signal timeout
Cause Measure
The card has booted but cyclic communication is not possible. – Check card slot and installation and correct if necessary.
– Restart device.
10.5.36 Error 51 Analog processing

Subfault: 51.1
Description: Analog current input 4 mA limit
Cause Measure
The input current of AI2/AI3 is below 4 mA. Monitoring of input current of AI2/AI3.
10.5.37 Error 52 Explosion protection category 2 function

Subfault: 52.1
Description: Startup fault
Cause Measure
No valid startup available. Perform startup.
Subfault: 52.2
Description: Illegal system function
Cause Measure
An illegal system function is active.
Subfault: 52.3
Description: Inverter too large
Cause Measure
Ratio of inverter current and nominal motor current too large.
Subfault: 52.4
Description: Parameterization of the current limit characteristic
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Cause Measure
Error while setting the parameters for the current limit charac-
teristic.

Operation
Subfault: 52.5
Description: Timeout f < 5 Hz
Cause Measure
Duration of 60 s for f < 5 Hz exceeded.
10
23085711/EN – 03/2017

10 Operation
Responses to error acknowledgement
10.6 Responses to error acknowledgement
10.6.1 Error acknowledgement at the power supply module

faults that are detected and displayed at the power supply module are acknowledged
by switching off the fault source. The fault messages of the power supply module are
transferred to the axis modules.
10.6.2 Error acknowledgement at the axis modules

During fault acknowledgement, the final fault status determines which reset type will
be executed, see following table.
Software reset
Response Effect
Behavior equal to device start
Reference is lost
System restart with Fieldbus interface is restarted
start of the CPU
EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS is restarted
The active "fault message" is reset (digital output = 1, system
status = 0).
Software restart
A software restart is no real reset of the microcontroller.
Response Effect
The firmware will be restarted, without the boot loader becom-
ing active (no display "b0"!).
Reference positions of incremental encoder systems will be
lost.
Any existing fieldbus interfaces are not affected.
Software restart
The interface between options and firmware system is initialized
again. A new boot synchronization to the fieldbus or control op-
tion takes place.
The active "fault message" is reset [digital output = 1, system
status = 0].
The ready signal is set again depending on the system state after the reset by the sys-
tem state control.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Operation
Responses to error acknowledgement 10
Warm start
A warm start only resets the fault code.
Response Effect
The firmware system is not rebooted.
All reference positions will be maintained.
Warm start Communication is not interrupted.
The active "fault message" is reset [digital output = 1, system
status = 0].
Fieldbus timeout 10
After manual reset of an fault, the fault message is deleted. The system changes to
the state "Waiting for data".
23085711/EN – 03/2017

10 Operation
Fault responses
10.7 Fault responses
10.7.1 Default – fault response

Fault response Description
No response The inverter ignores the event.
Warning with self reset
The inverter issues a warning message.
Warning
Application stop (with output stage in- The inverter stops with the deceleration set for the application limit.
hibit) Parameter set 1 Index 83750-13
Application stop (with output stage in- Parameter set 2 Index 83758-13
hibit) with self reset For n=0: Brake "applied" and output stage "off".
Emergency stop (with output stage in-
hibit) The inverter stops with the set emergency stop deceleration.
Parameter set 1 Index 83750-20
Emergency stop (with output stage in- Parameter set 2 Index 83758-20
hibit) with self reset
Inhibit output stage with self reset
The output stage is deactivated and the brake is applied.
Inhibit output stage
Self-reset means: Eliminating the cause of the fault acknowledges the fault. The in-
verter automatically resumes the operation performed before the fault. The drive re-
starts automatically.
10.7.2 Parameterizable faults

Parameterizable faults Description Index no. Possible fault response
Manual mode – timeout re- This parameter is used to set the response to 8504.3 • Application stop (with output stage in-
sponse a bus timeout during manual mode. hibit)
• Emergency stop (with output stage in-
hibit)
• Inhibit output stage
Heat sink overtemperature – Here, you can set the device response when 8622.2 • No response
prewarning the prewarning threshold for heat sink utiliza- • Warning
tion is exceeded (index 8336.1).
Positioning lag error This parameter is used to set the device re- 8622.3 • No response
sponse to a lag error (lag error window ex- • Warning
ceeded, index 8509.4). • Application stop (with output stage in-
hibit)
hibit)
Line phase failure This parameter is used to set the device re- 8622.4 • No response
sponse to a line phase failure (values below • Warning
threshold defined by the user, index 8351.5). • Application stop (with output stage in-
hibit)
hibit)
External fault This parameter is used to set the device re- 8622.5 • No response
sponse to an external fault (e.g. triggered by • Warning
terminal or control word). • Application stop (with output stage in-
hibit)
hibit)
Fieldbus – timeout This parameter is used to set the device re- 8622.6 • Warning
23085711/EN – 03/2017
sponse to an EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS timeout • Application stop (with output stage in-

(timeout time, index 8455.3). hibit)
hibit)
• Warning with self reset
• Application stop (with output stage in-
• Inhibit output stage with self reset

Operation
Fault responses 10
External synchronization This parameter is used to set the device re- 8622.7 • No response
sponse to loss of external synchronization. • Warning
hibit)
hibit)
• Warning with self reset
• Inhibit output stage with self reset
Motor temperature prewarning – Motor temperature active parameter set – pre- 8622.8 • No response
current parameter set warning. • Warning
hibit)
10
hibit)
Electromechanical utilization – This parameter is used to set the device re- 8622.10 • No response
prewarning sponse to an exceeded prewarning threshold • Warning
for electromechanical utilization (index • Application stop (with output stage in-
8336.2). hibit)
hibit)
HW limit switches – current 8622.11 • No response
parameter set • Emergency stop (with output stage in-
hibit)
SW limit switches – current 8622.12 • No response
parameter set • Emergency stop (with output stage in-
hibit)
Encoder – warning This parameter is used to set the device re- 8622.13 • Warning
sponse to an encoder warning. • Application stop (with output stage in-
hibit)
hibit)
Encoder – fault This parameter is used to set the device re- 8622.14 • Application stop (with output stage in-
sponse to an encoder fault. hibit)
hibit)
Additional encoder This parameter is used to set the device re- 8622.15 • Warning
sponse to a fault of an encoder that is not • Application stop (with output stage in-
used for control (speed or positioning control). hibit)
hibit)
Encoder 1 – latest fault 8622.16 • No response
Encoder 2 – latest fault 8622.17 • No response
Encoder 1 – latest critical fault 8622.18 • No response
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Encoder 2 – latest critical fault 8622.19 • No response

Response to external braking External braking resistor fault 8622.20 • No response
resistor fault • Warning
hibit)
hibit)

10 Operation
Fault responses

Application heartbeat timeout This parameter is used to set the device re- 8622.21 • Warning
sponse to a timeout of the application heart- • Application stop (with output stage in-
beat. hibit)
hibit)
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Service
Electronics Service by SEW‑EURODRIVE 11
11 Service
11.1 Electronics Service by SEW‑EURODRIVE

If you are unable to rectify a fault, contact SEW‑EURODRIVE Service. For the ad-
dresses, refer to www.sew‑eurodrive.com.
When contacting the SEW‑EURODRIVE Service, always specify the following inform-
ation so that our service personnel can assist you more effectively:
• Information on the device type on the nameplate (e.g. type designation, serial
number, part number, product key, purchase order number)
• Brief description of the application
• Error message on the status display
• Nature of the fault 11
• Accompanying circumstances
• Unusual events preceding the problem
11.2 Extended storage

The following table shows the time intervals and maintenance works that are relevant
for extended storage of the application inverter modules.
Modules Time interval Maintenance

MDP90A...-C00/0 1)
MDP90A.... Line connections: Connect the device

Every 2 years
to the line voltage for 5 minutes.
for extended storage
above 40 °C
1) Power supply module with integrated braking resistor and capacitor
For all modules other than the ones listed, no maintenance is required.
DANGER
• Install the touch guards at the modules, see chapter "Touch guards" (→ 2 197).
• Install the closing covers according to the regulations, see chapter "Touch
guards" (→ 2 197).
• Never start up the application inverter without installed closed touch guards and
closing covers.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

11 Service
Shutdown
11.2.1 Procedure in case maintenance has been neglected

If you have not performed maintenance regularly, SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends
that you increase the line voltage slowly up to the maximum voltage. This can be
done, for example, by using a variable transformer for which the output voltage has
been set according to the following overview. After you have completed the regenera-
tion process, the device can be used immediately or stored again.
The following steps are recommended:
AC 400/500 V devices:
• Step 1: 0 V to AC 350 V within a few seconds.
• Step 2: AC 350 V for 15 minutes.
• Step 2: AC 420 V for 15 minutes.
• Step 3: AC 500 V for 1 hour.
11.3 Shutdown
To shut down the application inverter, de-energize the application inverter using ap-
propriate measures.
WARNING
Electric shock from capacitors that have not been fully discharged.
• Observe a minimum switch-off time of 10 minutes after disconnecting the power
supply.
11.4 Waste disposal

Observe the applicable national regulations.
Dispose of the following materials separately in accordance with the country-specific
regulations in force, such as:
• Electronics scrap (circuit boards)
• Plastics
• Sheet metal
• Copper
• Aluminum
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Functional safety
General information 12
12 Functional safety
12.1 General information

12.1.1 Underlying standards
The safety assessment of the application inverter is based on the following standards
and safety classes:
Underlying standards
Safety class/underlying standard • Performance level (PL) according to
EN ISO 13849‑1:2008
• Safety Integrity Level (SIL) according to
EN 61800‑5‑2:2007
• Safety Integrity Level Claim Limit (SILCL) ac-
cording to EN 62061:2005/A1:2013 12
12.2 Integrated Safety Technology

The safety technology of the application inverter described below has been developed
and tested in accordance with the following safety requirements:
• Safety Integrity Level 3 according to EN 61800-5-2:2007, EN 61508:2010.
• PL e according to EN ISO 13849-1: 2008.
This was certified by TÜV Rheinland. Copies of the TÜV certificate and the corres-
ponding report are available from SEW‑EURODRIVE on request.
12.2.1 Safe condition

For safety-related operation of the application inverter, safe torque off is defined as
safe condition (see STO safety function). The safety concept is based on this.
12.2.2 Safety concept

The application inverter is supposed to be able to perform the safety function "Safe
Torque Off" according to EN 61800‑5‑2:
• The application inverter is characterized by the optional connection of a safety re-
lay/external safety controller. This external safety controller/safety relay discon-
nects the safety-related STO input via a 2-pole 24 V switching signal (sourcing/
sinking) when a connected control device (e.g. emergency stop button with latch-
ing function) is activated. This activates the STO function of the application in-
verter.
• An internal, dual-channel structure with diagnostics prevents the generation of
pulse trains at the power output stage (IGBT).
• Instead of galvanic separation of the drive from the supply system by means of
23085711/EN – 03/2017
contactors or switches, the disconnection of the STO input described here safely
prevents the control of the power semiconductors in the output stage. The rotary-
field generation for the respective motor is deactivated even though the line
voltage is still present.
• When the STO safety function is activated, the PWM signals generated by the ap-
plication inverter are interrupted and not transmitted to the IGBTs.

Integrated Safety Technology
• If the STO function detects a discrepancy between both channels, the PWM sig-
nals are permanently inhibited.
• The STO safety function can be activated externally e.g. via an external safety
device via the STO input.
12.2.3 Schematic representation of the safety concept
Uz+
[1]
[2] [5]
[3]
Uz-
[4]
9007214467507851
[1] STO function

[2] Drive controller
[3] Diagnostics and inhibiting unit
[4] Safety-related connection
[5] Motor
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Functional safety
Integrated Safety Technology 12
12.2.4 Safety functions
The following drive-related safety functions can be used:
• STO (safe torque off according to EN 61800-5-2) by disconnecting the STO input.
If the STO function is activated, the frequency inverter no longer supplies power to
the motor for generating torque. This safety function corresponds to a non-con-
trolled stop according to EN 60204-1, stop category 0.
The STO input must be disabled by a suitable external safety controller/safety re-
lay.
The following figure shows the STO function:
12
t1
t
2463228171
v Velocity
t Time
t1 Point of time when STO is triggered
Disconnection range
• SS1(c) (safe stop 1, function variant c according to EN 61800-5-2) by means of
suitable external control (e.g. safety relay with delayed disconnection).
The following sequence is mandatory:
– Decelerate the drive using an appropriate brake ramp specified via setpoints.
– Disconnect the STO input (= triggering the STO function) after a specified
safety-related time delay.
This safety function corresponds to a controlled stop according to EN 60204‑1,
stop category 1.
The following figure illustrates the SS1(c) function:
v
23085711/EN – 03/2017
t1 t t2
t
2463226251
v Velocity
t Time
t1 Point of time when the brake ramp is initiated

Integrated Safety Technology
t2 Point of time when STO is triggered

Δt Delay time until STO is triggered
Safe time delay range
Disconnection range
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Functional safety
Integrated Safety Technology 12
12.2.5 Restrictions
• Note that if the drive does not have a mechanical brake, or if the brake is defect-
ive, the drive may coast to a halt (depending on the friction and mass moment of
inertia of the system). In case of regenerative loads, or with axes that are loaded
with gravitational forces or driven externally, the drive can even accelerate. This
must be taken into account in a risk assessment of the system/machine. Additional
safety measures might have to be implemented (e.g. safety brake system).
The application inverter cannot be used without an additional brake system for ap-
plication-specific safety functions that require active deceleration (braking) of the
dangerous movement.
• When using the SS1(c) function as described in chapter "Safety
functions" (→ 2 337), the brake ramp of the drive is not monitored with respect to
safety. In case of a fault, the drive might not be decelerated after the delay time, or
it might be accelerated in the worst case. In this case, the safety-related discon-
nection via the STO function is only activated after the set time delay has passed,
see chapter "Safety functions" (→ 2 337). The resulting danger must be taken into 12
account in the risk assessment of the system/machine. Additional safety measures
might have to be implemented.
• The STO function cannot prevent a possible jerk or DC braking.
WARNING
The safety concept is only suitable for performing mechanical work on driven sys-
tem/machine components.
When the STO signal is disconnected, the line voltage is still present at the DC link
of the application inverter.
• Before working on the electric part of the drive system, disconnect it from the
supply voltage using an appropriate external disconnecting device and secure it
against unintentional reconnection to the voltage supply.
WARNING
Electric shock due to charged capacitors.
• Observe a minimum switch-off time of 10 minutes after disconnecting the power
supply.
INFORMATION
In case of safety-related disconnection of the DC 24 V supply voltage at X16 (STO
activated), the brake is always applied. The brake control in the application inverter
is not safety-related.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Safety Conditions
12.3 Safety Conditions

The requirement for safe operation is that the safety functions of the application in-
verter are properly integrated into an application-specific higher-level safety function.
A system/machine-specific risk assessment must be carried out by the system/ma-
chine manufacturer and taken into account for the use of the drive system with the ap-
plication inverter.
The system/machine manufacturer and the operator are responsible for compliance of
the system/machine with applicable safety regulations.
The following requirements are mandatory when installing and operating the applica-
tion inverter in safety-related applications:
• Approved units.
• Installation requirements.
• Requirements on external safety controllers and safety relays.
• Startup requirements.
• Operation requirements.
12.3.1 Approved devices

The following unit variants of MOVIDRIVE® modular are permitted for safety-related
applications:
Application inverter Module Nominal output cur-

rent
MOVIDRIVE® modular Single-axis module 2 – 180 A
Double-axis module 2–8A
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Functional safety
Safety Conditions 12
12.3.2 Requirements on the installation
• The components must be protected against conductive dirt, e.g. by installing them
in a control cabinet with degree of protection IP54 according to IEC 60529.
If conductive dirt can be excluded at the installation site, a control cabinet with
lower degree of protection is permitted under observance of the applicable stand-
ards, e.g. EN 60204‑1.
The same applies to temporary condensation, e.g. due to rapid changes of the am-
bient temperature.
• The wiring technology used must comply with the standard EN 60204-1.
• The STO control lines must be routed according to EMC guidelines and as follows:
– Inside an electrical installation space: Individual conductors can be routed.
– Adhere to the relevant regulations in force for the application.
– The sinking and sourcing cables from the external safety device to the axis
must be routed right next to each other with a cable length of ≤ 30 m. 12
– The sinking and sourcing cables from the external safety device to the axis
must have the same cable length. A difference in length ≤ 3% of the two cables
is not permitted.
– The STO control cable must be routed separately to the power lines of the
drive.
• The STO function does not detect short circuits or interference voltage in the sup-
ply line. This is why you must make sure that:
– No parasitic voltages can occur in the STO control lines
or
– The external safety controller can detect a crossfault from an external potential
to the STO control lines.
• Observe the values specified for safety components when designing the safety cir-
cuits.
• The STO signal (STO_P1, STO_P2, and STO_M) may not be used for feedback.
• For safety controller/safety relays, you must only use grounded voltage sources
with protective electrical separation (PELV) according to EN 61131-2 and
EN 60204-1.
• If several voltage sources are used, each voltage source must be connected to a
PE system.
• When planning the installation, observe the technical data of the application in-
verter.
• Do not use the 24-V-STO_Out of the application inverter for safety-related applica-
tions. Voltage is only permitted to supply the connection for safe disconnection X6
with plugged jumper plug.
• For safety-related applications with the application inverter, the jumper plug at the
STO input X6 must be removed.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Safety Conditions
12.3.3 Requirements on the external safety controller

A safety relay can be used as an alternative to a safety controller. The following re-
quirements apply analogously.
• The safety controller and all other safety-related subsystems must be approved for
at least that safety class which is required in the overall system for the respective,
application-related safety function.
The following table shows an example of the required safety class of the safety
controller:
Application Safety controller requirements

Performance level d according to Performance level d according to
EN ISO 13849-1, SIL 2 according to EN ISO 13849‑1, SIL 2 according to
EN 62062 EN 61508
Performance level e according to Performance level e according to
EN ISO 13849-1, SIL 3 according to EN ISO 13849-1, SIL 3 according to
EN 62061 EN 61508
• The wiring of the safety controller must be suitable for the required safety class,
(see manufacturer documentation). The STO input of the application inverter can
be switched with 2 poles (sourcing output, sourcing/sinking, or serial sourcing) or
with 1 pole (sourcing).
• The values specified for the safety controller must be strictly adhered to when
designing the circuit.
• Electro-sensitive protective equipment (such as light grid or scanner) according to
EN 61496‑1 and emergency stop buttons must not be directly connected to the
STO input. The connection must be realized using safety relays, safety controllers
etc.
• To ensure protection against unintended restart in accordance with EN 1037, the
safe control system must be designed and connected in such a way that resetting
the control device alone does not lead to a restart. A restart may only be carried
out after a manual reset of the safety circuit.
• If no fault exclusion is used for the STO wiring according to EN ISO 13849‑2 or
DIN EN 61800‑5‑2, the external safety device must detect the following faults in
the STO wiring within 20 s depending on the connection type:
– 2-pole sourcing:
Short circuit of 24 V at STO_P1 or STO_P2 (Stuck-at 1)
Crossfault between STO_P1 and STO_P2
– 2-pole sourcing/sinking:
Short circuit of 24 V at STO_P1 (Stuck-at 1)
Short circuit of 0 V at STO_M (Stuck-at 0)
– 2-pole serial sourcing:
Fault exclusion is mandatory
23085711/EN – 03/2017
– 1-pole sourcing:
Short circuit of 24 V at STO_P (Stuck-at 1)
2-pole sourcing:
• In disconnected state, no switch-on test pulses must occur in the sourcing cables.
• In connected state:

Functional safety
Safety Conditions 12
– The switch-off test pulses on both sourcing channels must be switched with a
time delay. However, additional switch-off test pulses may occur simultan-
eously.
– The switch-off test pulses in both sourcing channels must not exceed 1 ms.
– The next switch-off test pulse in one sourcing channel must only occur after a
2 ms time period.
– The signal levels must be played back by the safety controller and compared to
the expected value.
2-pole sourcing/sinking:
• In disconnected state, no switch-on test pulses must occur in the sourcing cable.
– The switch-off test pulses in the sourcing and sinking channel must not exceed
1 ms.
– The next switch-off test pulse in the sourcing or sinking channel must only oc- 12
cur after a 2 ms time period.
the expected value.
2-pole serial sourcing:
• Fault exclusion in the connection lead is mandatory if no external test pulses are
possible.
1-pole sourcing:
• In disconnected state, no switch-on test pulses must occur in the sourcing cable.
– The switch-off test pulse in the sourcing channel must not exceed 1 ms.
– The next switch-off test pulse must only occur after a 2 ms time period.
the expected value.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Safety Conditions
12.3.4 Requirements on startup

• To validate the implemented safety functions, they must be documented and
checked after successful startup (validation).
• Observe the restrictions for safety functions in chapter "Restrictions" for the valida-
tion of the safety functions. Non-safety-related parts and components that affect
the result of the verification test (e.g. motor brake) must be deactivated, if neces-
sary.
• For using the application inverter in safety-relevant applications, it is essential that
you perform and record startup checks for the disconnecting device and correct
wiring.
12.3.5 Requirements on operation

• Operation is only allowed within the limits specified in the data sheets. This prin-
ciple applies to the external safety controller as well as the application inverter and
approved options.
• The built-in diagnostic function is limited in case of a permanently enabled or per-
manently disabled STO input. Only with a level change of the STO signal, exten-
ded diagnostic functions are performed. This is why the safety function via STO in-
put must be triggered with connected line voltage at least once every 12 months
for PL d according to EN 13849‑1 and at least once every 3 months SIL
2 EN 61800‑5‑2 and for PL e according to EN 13849‑1 and SIL 3 EN 61800‑5‑2 to
achieve a complete test coverage. Adhere to the following test sequences.
[1] > 700 ms > 700 ms

[3]
[2] [2] [2]
[4]
t
15205932683
[1] Maximum 12 months with PL d/SIL 2

Maximum 3 months with PL e/SIL 3
[2] Internal diagnostics
[3] High: No STO
[4] Low: STO active
• To achieve complete test coverage after a device reset (e.g. after connecting the
line voltage), the test transition (STO active → not active) can only be started >
700 ms later. The device signals "ready for operation" or "STO – Safe Torque Off"
if it is not in fault state.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
• A detected hardware fault in the internal switch-off channels for STO will lead to a
locking fault state of the application inverter. If the fault is reset (e.g. by switching
the line voltage on/off or by a low level at the STO input for at least 30 ms), a com-
plete test with internal diagnostics according to the above mentions test procedure
must be performed. If the fault occurs again, replace the device or contact the

Functional safety
12.4 Connection variants
12.4.1 General information

Generally, all the connection variants listed in this documentation are permitted for
safety-relevant applications as long as the basic safety concept is met. This means
you have to make sure that the DC 24 V safety inputs are operated by an external
safety relay or a safety controller, thus preventing an automatic restart.
All safety conditions mentioned in chapter "Integrated Safety Technology" (→ 2 335),
"Safety Conditions" (→ 2 340) and "Connection variants" must be met for the basic
selection, installation, and application of the safety components, such as safety relay,
emergency stop switch, etc., and the approved connection variants.
The wiring diagrams are block diagrams whose only purpose is to show the safety
function(s) with the relevant components. For reasons of clarity, circuit-related meas-
ures that usually always have to be implemented are not shown in the diagram. These
measures are e.g.: 12
• Ensuring touch guards.
• Handling overvoltages and undervoltages.
• Avoiding installation errors.
• Detecting ground faults or short circuits in externally installed lines.
• Guaranteeing the required interference immunity against electromagnetic interfer-
ence.
Connection X6 at the application inverter

The following figure shows the X6 terminal at the top of the axis modules.
Single-axis module Double-axis module
1 1 1
2 2 2
[1] 3
4 [1] 3
4
3
4
5 5 5
X6
X6_1 X6_2
X30 OUT
X30 IN X30 OUT

X30 IN
[1] X6: Connection for safe disconnection (STO)

23085711/EN – 03/2017

Connection variants
12.4.2 Requirements
Use of safety relays

The requirements of the manufacturers of safety relays (such as protecting the output
contacts against welding) or other safety components must be strictly observed. For
cable routing, the basic requirements apply as described in this documentation.
For connecting the application inverter with the safety relays, observe the installation
requirements in chapter "Requirements on the installation" (→ 2 341).
All instructions by the manufacturer on the use of safety relays for specific applications
must also be observed.
Use of safety controllers

The switch-off test pulse of the used safe digital outputs (F-DO) must be ≤ 1 ms and
another switch-off test pulse must only occur 2 ms later.
[1]
<1 ms >2 ms
[2]
15214338827
[1] High
[2] Low
INFORMATION
If the safety-related control voltage at X6 is switched off (STO activated), the specific-
ations in chapter "Requirements on the external safety controller" (→ 2 342) must be
adhered to in regard to the test pulses.
INFORMATION
If all safety inputs (X6) are connected, STO is deactivated.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Functional safety
Wiring diagrams
Delivery state
In delivery state, the terminals at the connection for safe disconnection X6 are
jumpered.
[1]
X6
F_STO_P1 1
F_STO_M 2
F_STO_P2 3
GND 4
24 V STO_OUT 5 12
9007214807030283
[1] Axis module
2-pole sourcing
[1]
[2]
X6
F_STO_P1 1 F-DO_P1
F_STO_M 2 GND
F_STO_P2 3 F-DO_P2
GND 4
24 V STO_OUT 5
9007214803886091
[1] Axis module

[2] External safety device
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Connection variants
2-pole sourcing/sinking
[1]
[2]
X6
F_STO_P1 1 F-DO_P
F_STO_M 2 F-DO_M
F_STO_P2 3
GND 4
24 V STO_OUT 5
9007214805120139
[1] Axis module

2-pole serial sourcing
[1]
[2]
24 V
F-DOR_11
F-DOR_12
X6 F-DOR_21
F_STO_P1 1 F-DOR_22
F_STO_M 2 GND
F_STO_P2 3
GND 4
24 V STO_OUT 5
15991307275
[1] Axis module

23085711/EN – 03/2017

Functional safety
1-pole sourcing
[1]
[2]
X6
F_STO_P1 1 F-DO_P
F_STO_M 2 GND
F_STO_P2 3
GND 4
24 V STO_OUT 5
9007214805125643 12
[1] Axis module

23085711/EN – 03/2017

Connection variants
12.4.3 STO signal for group disconnection

For group drives, the STO signal for several application inverters can be provided by a
single safety relay. The following requirements must be met:
• The cable length is limited to 30 m. Other instructions published by the manufac-
turer on the use of the safety device (for the respective application) must also be
observed.
• The maximum output current and the maximally permitted contact load of the
safety device must be observed.
• You must comply with the permitted signal levels at the STO input and all other
technical data of the application inverter. The routing of the STO control cables
and the voltage drop must be considered.
• Other requirements of the safety manufacturer (such as protecting the output con-
tacts against welding) must be strictly observed. The basic cable routing require-
ments apply.
• A calculation based on the technical data of the application inverter must be per-
formed separately for each case of group drive disconnection.
• A maximum of 20 axes of the application inverter must be used in a group discon-
nection.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

Functional safety
Safety characteristics 12
12.5 Safety characteristics
Characteristic values according to

EN 61800-5-2 EN ISO 13849-1
Tested safety class/underlying stand- Safety integrity level 3 Performance level e
ards
Probability of dangerous failure per 2.5 × 10-9 1/h
hour (PFH value)
Service life 20 years, after which the component must be replaced with a new
one.
Proof test interval > 20 years -
Safe state Safe torque off (STO)
Safety function STO, SS11) according to EN 61800-5-2 12
1) With suitable external control
INFORMATION
With 1-pole wiring, the realizable performance level according to EN ISO 13849 is re-
duced to PL d. For the wiring between safety relay and STO input, an fault exclusion
is necessary.
23085711/EN – 03/2017

13 Appendix
Abbreviation key
13 Appendix
13.1 Abbreviation key
The following table lists the abbreviations that are used in this document together with
their unit and meaning.
Abbreviation Information on Unit Meaning

the nameplate
ASM Asynchronous motor
C C μF Additional capacitance
fmax f Hz Maximum output frequency
fline f Hz Line frequency
fPWM kHz Frequency of the pulse width modulation
h m Installation altitude
IF A Tripping current (braking resistor)
Imax Imax A Max. DC link current (specification on the nameplate)
Imax A Maximum output current (encoder cards)
Ipeak A Output peak current (encoder cards)
IA max A Max. output current
IAppl A Total current of the application
IN A Nominal output current/nominal current (filter, choke)
Iline I A Nominal line current
INDCL I A Nominal DC link current
LN mH Inductance
LSPM Line start permanent magnet
Peff kW Effective power (braking resistor)
Pmax kW Maximum power (braking resistor)
PMot P(ASM) kW Motor power of the asynchronous motor
PN kW Nominal motor power (rated power)
PV W Power loss
PWM Pulse width modulation
RBW Ω Value of the braking resistor
RBWmin Ω Minimum value of the braking resistor
SN S kVA Apparent output power
SM Synchronous motor
23085711/EN – 03/2017
VO U V Output voltage motor

VBR V Brake supply voltage
VN V Nominal line voltage (filter, choke)
Vline U V Connection voltage
VNDCL U V Nominal DC link voltage

Appendix
Abbreviation key 13
Abbreviation Information on Unit Meaning
the nameplate
VOUT V DC 24 V to supply STO_P1 and STO_P2
VS V Supply voltage of encoder
VS12VG V DC 12 V supply voltage of encoder
VS24VG V DC 24 V supply voltage of encoder
VI24 V Voltage supply for electronics and brake
ϑA T °C Ambient temperature
13
23085711/EN – 03/2017

13 Appendix
Declarations of conformity
13.2 Declarations of conformity
Declaration of Conformity
Translation of the original text 900990016/EN
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co. KG

Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42, D-76646 Bruchsal
declares under sole responsibility that the following products
MOVIDRIVE® modular MDA single-axis module

MDA90A-0020-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0040-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0080-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0120-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0160-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0240-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0320-503-X-S00
MDA90A-0480-503-X-S00
MDD double-axis module

MDD90A-0020-503-X-S00/X
MDD90A-0040-503-X-S00/X
MDD90A-0020-503-X-S00
MDD90A-0040-503-X-S00
MDD90A-0080-503-X-S00
are in conformity with
Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC

(L 157, 09.06.2006, 24-86)
This includes the fulfillment of the protection targets for "electrical power supply" in accordance with annex I No. 1.5.1
according to the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC -- Note: 2006/95/EC (until 19 Apr 2016) and 2014/35/EU (as of 20 Apr
2016) are currently valid.
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC (valid until April 19, 2016) 4)

2014/30/EU (valid as of April 20, 2016) 4)
(L 96, 29.03.2014, 79-106)
Applied harmonized standards: EN ISO 13849-1:2008 + AC:2009
EN 60204-1:2006+A1:2009+AC:2010
EN 61800-5-1:2007
EN 61800-5-2:2007
EN 61800-3:2004 + A1:2012
4) According to the EMC Directive, the listed products are not independently operable products. EMC assessment is only possible
after these products have been integrated in an overall system. For the assessment, the product was installed in a typical plant
configuration.
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Bruchsal 25.01.2016
Place Date Johann Soder
Managing Director Technology a) b)
a) Authorized representative for issuing this declaration on behalf of the manufacturer
b) Authorized representative for compiling the technical documents

Appendix
Declarations of conformity 13
Declaration of Conformity
Translation of the original text 900980016/EN
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co. KG

Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42, D-76646 Bruchsal
declares under sole responsibility that the following products
MOVIDRIVE® modular MDP power supply module

MDP90A-0100-503-4-000
MDP90A-0100-503-4-C00
MDP90A-0250-503-4-000
are in conformity with
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC (valid until April 19, 2016)

2014/35/EU (valid as of April 20, 2016)
(L 96, 29.03.2014, 357-374)
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC (valid until April 19, 2016) 4)
2014/30/EU (valid as of April 20, 2016) 4)
(L 96, 29.03.2014, 79-106)
13
Applied harmonized standards: EN 61800-5-1:2007
EN 61800-3:2004 + A1:2012
4) According to the EMC Directive, the listed products are not independently operable products. EMC assessment is only possible
after these products have been integrated in an overall system. For the assessment, the product was installed in a typical plant
configuration.
Bruchsal 25.01.2016
Place Date Johann Soder
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Managing Director Technology a) b)

a) Authorized representative for issuing this declaration on behalf of the manufacturer
b) Authorized representative for compiling the technical documents

Index
Index
Numerical Encoder extension cable with M23 and D-sub ....
155
24 V supply voltage ........................................... 213 Encoder extension cable with two M23 ........ 155
24 V supply voltage selection ............................ 125 Cabling of the axis system ................................ 219
7-segment display ............................................. 286 CES11A multi-encoder card .............................. 229
A Encoder connection/cable lengths ....... 221, 229
Supported encoder types ............................. 229
Abbreviation key ................................................ 352
Terminal assignment CANopen encoder ..... 232
Accessories ....................................................... 188
Terminal assignment EnDat encoder ........... 231
Arrangement of modules in the axis system ..... 131
Terminal assignment HIPERFACE® and SEW
Arrangement of the axis modules within the axis encoder (RS485) .......................................... 230
system .................................................. 131, 200
Terminal assignment of TTL, HTL, SIN/COS en-
Arrangement of the modules within the axis system coder ............................................................ 230
131
Terminal assignment SSI + SIN/COS combi en-
Assembling an axis system ............................... 200 coders........................................................... 232
Assembly Terminal assignment SSI encoder ............... 231
Safety notes ................................................. 167 CFC control mode ............................................... 25
Axis module fault ............................................... 293 CIO21A, CID21A input/output card ................... 226
Axis module selection........................................ 104 Closing covers and touch guards ...................... 216
B Connecting cables ............................................. 280
Connecting power ............................................. 280
Bending spaces - note....................................... 194
Connection
Bimetallic relay .................................................. 241
Safety notes ................................................. 168
Brake chopper ................................................... 217
Connection diagram of digital inputs/outputs .... 275
Brake control ..................................................... 267
Connection of an axis system ................... 185, 215
Brake output ...................................................... 217
Connection to the engineering software ............ 284
Braking resistor selection .................................. 113
Control mode ....................................................... 23
Braking resistors.......................................... 59, 233
CFC ................................................................ 25
External bimetallic relay ............................... 241
Characteristics................................................ 27
External thermal circuit breaker TCB ........... 236
ELSM® ............................................................ 25
Internal temperature switch -T...................... 237
V/f ................................................................... 23
Permitted installation ............................ 115, 234
VFCPLUS....................................................... 24
Protection against thermal overload of the brak-
ing resistor.................................................... 236 Copyright notice ................................................ 162
Covers ............................................................... 195
C
D
Cable ................................................................. 132
Encoder cable with conductor end sleeves and Declarations of conformity ................................. 354
D-sub............................................................ 153 Derating ..................................................... 106, 167
Encoder cable with connection cover and D-sub Description of the FCBs ...................................... 18
23085711/EN – 03/17
152 Designated use ................................................. 165

Encoder cable with M23 and D-sub ............. 153 Device structure ................................................ 170
Encoder extension cable with conductor end MDA and MDD axis modules ....................... 179
sleeves and M23 .......................................... 154
MDA single-axis modules............................. 180
Encoder extension cable with connection cover
MDD double-axis modules ........................... 183
and M23 ....................................................... 154
Use of option cards ...................................... 186

Index
Dimension sheets of the modules ....................... 43 Encoder connection

Drive selection ..................................................... 70 Installation notes .......................................... 220
E Prefabricated cables..................................... 220
Encoder requirements ......................................... 74
EAC ..................................................................... 34 Energy saving functions ...................................... 30
Electrical accessories ........................................ 189 Partial magnetization...................................... 30
Electrical connection ......................................... 168 Standby mode ................................................ 30
Electrical installation .......................................... 209 Exclusion of liability ........................................... 162
24 V supply voltage ...................................... 213 Explosion-proof AC motors ................................. 72
Brake chopper .............................................. 217 Extended storage .............................................. 333
Brake output ................................................. 217
F
Cabling of the axis system ........................... 219
Connection of an axis system ...................... 215 Fault display ...................................................... 286
Encoder ........................................................ 220 Fault display at the double-axis module ....... 286
Encoder connection...................................... 220 Fault responses ................................................. 330
Fuse types, line fuses................................... 211 Default fault response .................................. 330
General information...................................... 210 Parameterizable faults.................................. 330
Inputs/outputs............................................... 218 Faults at the power supply module.................... 289
Installation notes encoder connection .......... 220 FCB concept........................................................ 17
Installing touch guards and closing covers... 216 Description of the FCBs ................................. 18
Line connection ............................................ 212 FCB description ................................................... 18
Line fuses, fuse types................................... 211 Front cover ........................................................ 199
Minimum requirements for encoder cables .. 222 Function control block ......................................... 17
Motor output ................................................. 217 Functional safety ............................................... 335
Permitted voltage systems ........................... 210 Approved units ............................................. 340
Self-assembled encoder cables ................... 222 Characteristic safety values ......................... 351
System bus EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS ............. 219 Connection variants...................................... 345
Temperature evaluation of the motor ........... 217 External safety controller requirements........ 342
Use in IT systems......................................... 210 Installation .................................................... 341
Electronics connection of the double-axis modules . Installation requirements .............................. 341
274 Integrated safety technology ........................ 335
Electronics connection of the power supply module Operational requirements............................. 344
272
Representation of the safety concept........... 336
Electronics connection of the single-axis modules ...
Restrictions................................................... 339
273
Safe state ..................................................... 335
Electronics Service ............................................ 333
Safe torque off (STO) ................................... 337
ELSM® control mode ........................................... 25
Safety concept.............................................. 335
Embedded safety notes..................................... 161
Safety controller, external............................. 342
EMC-compliant installation ................................ 246
Safety controllers, requirements................... 346
Encoder ............................................................. 220
Safety relays, requirements.......................... 346
Encoder cable ................................................... 222
23085711/EN – 03/17
Safety-relevant conditions ............................ 340

Encoder cable requirements ............................. 222
Standards ..................................................... 335
Encoder cables for CFM.. motors...................... 148
Startup.......................................................... 344
Encoder cables for CMP. motors ...................... 139
Startup, requirements................................... 344
Encoder cables for DR.. motors ........................ 151
STO (safe torque off).................................... 337
STO signal for group disconnection ............. 350

Index
Structure variable requirements ................... 346 Terminal assignment .................................... 251

Wiring diagrams ........................................... 347 Touch guards ............................................... 197
Functional safety technology Wiring diagrams ........................................... 262
Safety note ................................................... 166 Installation accessories ..................................... 188
Fuse types, line fuses........................................ 211 Installing a module ............................................ 201
G Installing an option card .................................... 223
Installing front covers and covers ...................... 208
General technical data ........................................ 35 Installing options and accessories
Group drive and multi-motor drive ....................... 72 CES11A multi-encoder card......................... 229
H CID21A terminal assignment........................ 228
CIO21A terminal assignment ....................... 227
Hazard symbols
CIO21A, CID21A input/output card .............. 226
Meaning........................................................ 161
Installing an option card ............................... 223
Hole pattern ....................................................... 192
Installing the bottom shield plate ....................... 202
I Installing the busbar .......................................... 206
Inputs/outputs .................................................... 218 Installing the top shield plate ............................. 203
Installation ......................................................... 188 Installing touch guards ...................................... 207
Arrangement of the axis modules within the axis Installing touch guards and closing covers........ 216
system .................................................. 131, 200 Integrated safety technology ............................. 335
Braking resistors........................................... 233 IT systems ......................................................... 210
Connection diagram for input/output cards .. 275 L
Covers .......................................................... 195
Digital inputs and outputs ............................. 275 Lifting applications ..................................... 165, 280
Electrical installation..................................... 209 Line choke ................................................... 67, 124
EMC-compliant installation........................... 246 Line connection ................................................. 212
Front cover ................................................... 199 Line contactor .................................................... 122
Hole pattern.................................................. 192 Line filter ...................................................... 66, 123
Installation accessories ................................ 188 Line fuses, fuse types........................................ 211
Installing a module ....................................... 201 Line power components .................................... 121
Installing front covers and covers................. 208 M
Installing the bottom shield plate .................. 202
Maintenance neglected ..................................... 334
Installing the busbar ..................................... 206
MDA and MDD axis modules
Installing the top shield plate ........................ 203
Dimension drawings ....................................... 48
Installing touch guards ................................. 207
Safety functions - electronics data ................. 42
Line choke .................................................... 245
Signal terminals - electronics data ................. 40
Line filter....................................................... 245
MDA single-axis modules
Mechanical installation ................................. 192
Performance data........................................... 38
Minimum clearance and mounting position .. 194
MDD double-axis modules
Permitted installation of braking resistors.... 115,
234
23085711/EN – 03/17
MDP supply modules

Permitted tightening torques ........................ 191
Dimension drawings ....................................... 43
Protecting the braking resistor...................... 236
Removing an axis module ............................ 208
Signal terminals - electronics data ................. 37
Removing the covers.................................... 204
Mechanical accessories .................................... 188
Removing the touch guards ......................... 205
Mechanical installation ...................................... 192
Structure of an axis system .......................... 200

Index
Minimum clearance and mounting position ....... 194 Option cards, possible combinations................. 186
Minimum requirements for encoder cables ....... 222 Overload capacity...................................... 105, 109
Module bus and system bus cable .................... 156 P
Motor and power supply cable .......................... 118
Motor output ...................................................... 217 Partial magnetization ........................................... 30
Motor-inverter assignments ................................. 80 Permitted tightening torques ............................. 191
Motors that can be connected ............................. 70 Permitted voltage systems ................................ 210
Mounting position and minimum clearance ....... 194 Power cables for CFM.. motors ......................... 143
MOVIDRIVE® modular at a glance ........................ 9 Power cables for CMP.. motors......................... 133
MOVISUITE® ....................................................... 31 Power components on the line side .................. 121
MOVISUITE® engineering software..................... 31 Power supply module selection ......................... 108
Multi-motor drive and group drive........................ 72 Prefabricated cables.......................................... 132
Encoder cables for CFM.. motors................. 148
N
Encoder cables for CMP. motors ................. 139
Nameplates ....................................................... 172 Encoder cables for DR.. motors ................... 151
Double-axis module...................................... 174 Power cables for CFM.. motors.................... 143
Performance data......................................... 172 Power cables for CMP.. motors.................... 133
Power supply module ................................... 172 Single-cable technology for CMP.. motors ... 142
Single-axis module ....................................... 173 System bus and module bus cable .............. 156
System nameplate........................................ 172 Product description................................................ 6
Notes Control mode.................................................. 23
Designation in the documentation ................ 160 Energy saving functions ................................. 30
Meaning of the hazard symbols ................... 161 FCB concept................................................... 17
O MOVIDRIVE® modular at a glance ................... 9
MOVISUITE® .................................................. 31
One-sided supply .............................................. 126 Product overview............................................ 13
Operating displays............................................. 286 Product overview accessories........................ 16
Operating displays at the axis module .............. 287 Product names .................................................. 162
Operating displays at the power supply module 286 Product overview ................................................. 13
Operation........................................................... 285 Double-axis modules...................................... 15
7-segment display ........................................ 286 Power supply modules ................................... 13
Axis module fault .......................................... 293 Single-axis modules ....................................... 14
Fault display ................................................. 286 Product overview accessories ............................. 16
Fault responses............................................ 330 CES11A multi-encoder card........................... 16
Faults at the power supply module............... 289 CID21A input/output card ............................... 16
Fieldbus timeout ........................................... 329 CIO21A input/output card............................... 16
Operating displays........................................ 286 Project planning................................................... 68
Operating displays at the axis module ......... 287 24 V supply voltage selection....................... 125
Operating displays at the power supply module.. Arrangement of the modules within the axis sys-
286 tem ............................................................... 131
23085711/EN – 03/17
Responses to error acknowledgement......... 328 Axis module selection................................... 104

Safety notes ................................................. 169 Braking resistor selection ............................. 113
Software reset .............................................. 328 Derating........................................................ 106
Software restart ............................................ 328 Drive selection................................................ 70
Warm start.................................................... 329 Encoder cables............................................. 121
Option card, installation ..................................... 223 Explosion-proof AC motors ............................ 72

Index
Group drive and multi-motor drive.................. 72 Structure of embedded................................. 161

Line contactor............................................... 122 Structure of the section-related .................... 161
Motor-inverter assignments............................ 80 Section-related safety notes .............................. 161
Motors that can be connected ........................ 70 Self-assembled encoder cable .......................... 222
ND line choke ............................................... 124 Self-assembled encoder cables ........................ 222
NF line filter .................................................. 123 Separation, protective ....................................... 168
Overload capacity................................. 105, 109 Service .............................................................. 333
Power components on the line side ............. 121 Extended storage ......................................... 333
Power supply module selection.................... 108 Maintenance neglected ................................ 334
Requirements for encoders ............................ 74 Shutdown ..................................................... 334
Requirements for the brake control ................ 74 Setting the EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS ID ............... 281
Schematic workflow for project planning ........ 69 SEW Workbench ................................................. 68
SEW Workbench ............................................ 68 Shutdown .......................................................... 334
Signal lines ................................................... 121 Signal words in safety notes.............................. 160
Supply system cable and motor cable.......... 118 Single-cable technology for CMP. motors ......... 142
Protective separation......................................... 168 Standard accessories ........................................ 188
R Electrical accessories................................... 189
Mechanical accessories ............................... 188
RCD................................................................... 124 Standby mode ..................................................... 30
Removing an axis module ................................. 208 Startup ............................................................... 280
Removing the axis module ................................ 208 Checklist....................................................... 283
Removing the covers......................................... 204 Connecting cables........................................ 280
Removing the touch guards .............................. 205 Connecting power ........................................ 280
Repair ................................................................ 333 Connection to the engineering software....... 284
Requirements for encoders ................................. 74 Lifting applications........................................ 280
Requirements for the brake control ..................... 74 Safety notes ................................................. 169
Residual current device ..................................... 124 Setting the EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS ID .......... 281
Responses to error acknowledgement .............. 328 Startup procedure......................................... 282
At the axis module........................................ 328 Structure of an axis system ....................... 170, 200
At the power supply module ......................... 328 Supply system cable and motor cable............... 118
Fieldbus timeout ........................................... 329 System bus and module bus cable ................... 156
Software reset .............................................. 328 System bus EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS .................. 219
Software restart ............................................ 328
T
Warm start.................................................... 329
Restrictions to application ................................. 167 Target group ...................................................... 164
Rights to claim under limited warranty .............. 162 TCB thermal circuit breaker............................... 236
S Technical data ..................................................... 34
Braking resistors............................................. 59
Safety functions ................................................. 166 CES11A multi-encoder card........................... 57
Safety notes Chokes ........................................................... 59
23085711/EN – 03/17
Assembly...................................................... 167 CIO21A and CID21A input/output cards ........ 55

Designation in the documentation ................ 160 Dimension sheets of the modules .................. 43
Installation .................................................... 167 DRL.. servomotors, 4-pole, 50 Hz, 400 V....... 85
Meaning of the hazard symbols ................... 161 Electronics data of axis modules.................... 40
Preliminary information................................. 164 Electronics data of MDP power supply modules .
Regenerative operation ................................ 168 37

Index
Electronics data of safety functions................ 42 Type code.......................................................... 175

Filters.............................................................. 59 U
General technical data ................................... 35
Line choke ...................................................... 67 Unit structure
Line filter......................................................... 66 Connection of an axis system ...................... 185
Markings......................................................... 34 MDP supply modules ................................... 176
MDA and MDD axis modules ......................... 38 Use in IT systems .............................................. 210
MDP supply modules ..................................... 36 Use of option cards ........................................... 186
Performance data MDA single-axis modules . 38 Double-axis modules.................................... 187
Performance data MDD double-axis modules 39 Single-axis modules ..................................... 186
Performance data MDP power supply modules .. V
36
TCB thermal circuit breaker............................ 64 V/f control mode .................................................. 23
Technical data of encoder interfaces ............. 58 Validity ............................................................... 335
Technical data of the option cards ................. 55 VFCPLUS control mode ...................................... 24
Technical data of CMP and CMPZ servomotors W
CMP motors ................................................... 97
Waste disposal .................................................. 334
Technical data of encoder interfaces .................. 58
Wiring diagrams
Temperature evaluation of the motor ................ 217
Axis module - Wiring the control electronics 273,
Temperature switch -T ...................................... 237 274
Terminal assignment ......................................... 251 Brake control ................................................ 267
CID21A......................................................... 228 Connection diagram of digital inputs ............ 275
CIO21A......................................................... 227 Electronics connection of the double-axis mod-
MDA axis module ......................................... 254 ules............................................................... 274
MDA single-axis modules............................. 254 Electronics connection of the power supply
MDD double-axis module ............................. 258 module.......................................................... 272
MDP supply modules ................................... 252 Electronics connection of the single-axis mod-
ules............................................................... 273
Tightening torques............................................. 191
General information...................................... 262
Touch guards .................................................... 197
Power connection......................................... 262
Trademarks ....................................................... 162
Power supply module - Wiring the control elec-
Transport ........................................................... 166
tronics........................................................... 272
Two-sided supply .............................................. 127
Workbench .......................................................... 68
23085711/EN – 03/17

14 Address list
14 Address list
Algeria
Sales Algiers REDUCOM Sarl Tel. +213 21 8214-91
16, rue des Frères Zaghnoune Fax +213 21 8222-84
Bellevue http://www.reducom-dz.com
16200 El Harrach Alger [email protected]
Argentina
Assembly Buenos Aires SEW EURODRIVE ARGENTINA S.A. Tel. +54 3327 4572-84
Sales Ruta Panamericana Km 37.5, Lote 35 Fax +54 3327 4572-21
(B1619IEA) Centro Industrial Garín http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.ar
Prov. de Buenos Aires [email protected]
Australia
Assembly Melbourne SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. Tel. +61 3 9933-1000
Sales 27 Beverage Drive Fax +61 3 9933-1003
Service Tullamarine, Victoria 3043 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.au
[email protected]
Sydney SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. Tel. +61 2 9725-9900
9, Sleigh Place, Wetherill Park Fax +61 2 9725-9905
New South Wales, 2164 [email protected]
Austria
Assembly Vienna SEW-EURODRIVE Ges.m.b.H. Tel. +43 1 617 55 00-0
Sales Richard-Strauss-Straße 24 Fax +43 1 617 55 00-30
Service 1230 Wien http://www.sew-eurodrive.at
[email protected]
Bangladesh
Sales Bangladesh SEW-EURODRIVE INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED Tel. +88 01729 097309
345 DIT Road [email protected]
East Rampura
Dhaka-1219, Bangladesh
Belarus
Sales Minsk Foreign unitary production enterprise SEW- Tel. +375 17 298 47 56 / 298 47 58
EURODRIVE Fax +375 17 298 47 54
RybalkoStr. 26 http://www.sew.by
220033 Minsk [email protected]
Belgium
Assembly Brussels SEW-EURODRIVE n.v./s.a. Tel. +32 16 386-311
Sales Researchpark Haasrode 1060 Fax +32 16 386-336
Service Evenementenlaan 7 http://www.sew-eurodrive.be
3001 Leuven [email protected]
Service Competence Industrial SEW-EURODRIVE n.v./s.a. Tel. +32 84 219-878
Center Gears Rue de Parc Industriel, 31 Fax +32 84 219-879
6900 Marche-en-Famenne http://www.sew-eurodrive.be
[email protected]
Brazil
Production São Paulo SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda. Tel. +55 19 3835-8000
Sales Estrada Municipal José Rubim, 205 – Rodovia [email protected]
Service Santos Dumont Km 49
Indaiatuba – 13347-510 – SP
Assembly Rio Claro SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda. Tel. +55 19 3522-3100
Sales Rodovia Washington Luiz, Km 172 Fax +55 19 3524-6653
Service Condomínio Industrial Conpark [email protected]
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Caixa Postal: 327

13501-600 – Rio Claro / SP
Joinville SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda. Tel. +55 47 3027-6886
Rua Dona Francisca, 12.346 – Pirabeiraba Fax +55 47 3027-6888
89239-270 – Joinville / SC [email protected]
Bulgaria
Sales Sofia BEVER-DRIVE GmbH Tel. +359 2 9151160
Bogdanovetz Str.1 Fax +359 2 9151166
1606 Sofia [email protected]

Address list
14
Cameroon
Sales Douala SEW-EURODRIVE S.A.R.L. Tel. +237 233 39 02 10
Ancienne Route Bonabéri Fax +237 233 39 02 10
P.O. Box info@sew-eurodrive-cm
B.P 8674
Douala-Cameroun
Canada
Assembly Toronto SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 905 791-1553
Sales 210 Walker Drive Fax +1 905 791-2999
Service Bramalea, ON L6T 3W1 http://www.sew-eurodrive.ca
[email protected]
Vancouver SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 604 946-5535
Tilbury Industrial Park Fax +1 604 946-2513
7188 Honeyman Street [email protected]
Delta, BC V4G 1G1
Montreal SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 514 367-1124
2555 Rue Leger Fax +1 514 367-3677
Lasalle, PQ H8N 2V9 [email protected]
Chile
Assembly Santiago de SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE LTDA Tel. +56 2 2757 7000
Sales Chile Las Encinas 1295 Fax +56 2 2757 7001
Service Parque Industrial Valle Grande http://www.sew-eurodrive.cl 14
LAMPA [email protected]
Santiago de Chile
P.O. Box
Casilla 23 Correo Quilicura - Santiago - Chile
China
Production Tianjin SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 22 25322612
Assembly No. 78, 13th Avenue, TEDA Fax +86 22 25323273
Sales Tianjin 300457 http://www.sew-eurodrive.cn
Service [email protected]
Assembly Suzhou SEW-EURODRIVE (Suzhou) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 512 62581781
Sales 333, Suhong Middle Road Fax +86 512 62581783
Service Suzhou Industrial Park [email protected]
Jiangsu Province, 215021
Guangzhou SEW-EURODRIVE (Guangzhou) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 20 82267890
No. 9, JunDa Road Fax +86 20 82267922
East Section of GETDD [email protected]
Guangzhou 510530
Shenyang SEW-EURODRIVE (Shenyang) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 24 25382538
10A-2, 6th Road Fax +86 24 25382580
Shenyang Economic Technological Develop- [email protected]
ment Area
Shenyang, 110141
Taiyuan SEW-EURODRIVE (Taiyuan) Co,. Ltd. Tel. +86-351-7117520
No.3, HuaZhang Street, Fax +86-351-7117522
TaiYuan Economic & Technical Development [email protected]
Zone
ShanXi, 030032
Wuhan SEW-EURODRIVE (Wuhan) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 27 84478388
10A-2, 6th Road Fax +86 27 84478389
No. 59, the 4th Quanli Road, WEDA [email protected]
430056 Wuhan
Xi'An SEW-EURODRIVE (Xi'An) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 29 68686262
No. 12 Jinye 2nd Road Fax +86 29 68686311
Xi'An High-Technology Industrial Development [email protected]
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Zone
Xi'An 710065
Sales Hong Kong SEW-EURODRIVE LTD. Tel. +852 36902200
Service Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor Fax +852 36902211
Hong Leong Industrial Complex [email protected]
No. 4, Wang Kwong Road
Kowloon, Hong Kong

14 Address list
Colombia
Assembly Bogota SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA. Tel. +57 1 54750-50
Sales Calle 17 No. 132-18 Fax +57 1 54750-44
Service Interior 2 Bodega 6, Manzana B http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.co
Santafé de Bogotá [email protected]
Croatia
Sales Zagreb KOMPEKS d. o. o. Tel. +385 1 4613-158
Service Zeleni dol 10 Fax +385 1 4613-158
10 000 Zagreb [email protected]
Czech Republic
Assembly Hostivice SEW-EURODRIVE CZ s.r.o. Tel. +420 255 709 601
Sales Floriánova 2459 Fax +420 235 350 613
Service 253 01 Hostivice http://www.sew-eurodrive.cz
[email protected]
Drive Service +420 800 739 739 (800 SEW SEW) Service
Hotline / 24 Tel. +420 255 709 632
Hour Service Fax +420 235 358 218
[email protected]
Denmark
Assembly Copenhagen SEW-EURODRIVEA/S Tel. +45 43 95 8500
Sales Geminivej 28-30 Fax +45 43 9585-09
Service 2670 Greve http://www.sew-eurodrive.dk
[email protected]
Egypt
Sales Cairo Copam Egypt Tel. +202 44812673 / 79 (7 lines)
Service for Engineering & Agencies Fax +202 44812685
Building 10, Block 13005, First Industrial Zone, http://www.copam-egypt.com
Obour City Cairo [email protected]
Estonia
Sales Tallin ALAS-KUUL AS Tel. +372 6593230
Reti tee 4 Fax +372 6593231
75301 Peetri küla, Rae vald, Harjumaa http://www.alas-kuul.ee
[email protected]
Finland
Assembly Hollola SEW-EURODRIVE OY Tel. +358 201 589-300
Sales Vesimäentie 4 Fax +358 3 780-6211
Service 15860 Hollola http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
[email protected]
Service Hollola SEW-EURODRIVE OY Tel. +358 201 589-300
Keskikankaantie 21 Fax +358 3 780-6211
15860 Hollola http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
[email protected]
Production Karkkila SEW Industrial Gears Oy Tel. +358 201 589-300
Assembly Santasalonkatu 6, PL 8 Fax +358 201 589-310
03620 Karkkila, 03601 Karkkila http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
[email protected]
France
Production Hagenau SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 3 88 73 67 00
Sales 48-54 route de Soufflenheim Fax +33 3 88 73 66 00
Service B. P. 20185 http://www.usocome.com
67506 Haguenau Cedex [email protected]
Production Forbach SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 3 87 29 38 00
Zone industrielle
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Technopôle Forbach Sud

B. P. 30269
57604 Forbach Cedex
Brumath SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 3 88 37 48 00
1 Rue de Bruxelles
67670 Mommenheim Cedex
Assembly Bordeaux SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 5 57 26 39 00
Sales Parc d'activités de Magellan Fax +33 5 57 26 39 09
Service 62 avenue de Magellan – B. P. 182
33607 Pessac Cedex

Address list
14
France
Lyon SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 4 74 99 60 00
75 rue Antoine Condorcet Fax +33 4 74 99 60 15
38090 Vaulx-Milieu
Nantes SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 2 40 78 42 00
Parc d’activités de la forêt Fax +33 2 40 78 42 20
4 rue des Fontenelles
44140 Le Bignon
Paris SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 1 64 42 40 80
Zone industrielle Fax +33 1 64 42 40 88
2 rue Denis Papin
77390 Verneuil I'Étang
Gabon
Sales Libreville SEW-EURODRIVE SARL Tel. +241 03 28 81 55
183, Rue 5.033.C, Lalala à droite +241 06 54 81 33
P.O. Box 15682 http://www.sew-eurodrive.cm
Libreville [email protected]
Germany
Headquarters Bruchsal SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Production Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42 Fax +49 7251 75-1970
Sales 76646 Bruchsal http://www.sew-eurodrive.de
P.O. Box [email protected] 14
Postfach 3023 – D-76642 Bruchsal
Production / Industrial Bruchsal SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Gears Christian-Pähr-Str. 10 Fax +49 7251 75-2970
76646 Bruchsal
Production Graben SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Ernst-Blickle-Straße 1 Fax +49 7251-2970
76676 Graben-Neudorf
P.O. Box
Postfach 1220 – D-76671 Graben-Neudorf
Östringen SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG, Werk Tel. +49 7253 9254-0
Östringen Fax +49 7253 9254-90
Franz-Gurk-Straße 2 [email protected]
76684 Östringen
Service Competence Mechanics / SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-1710
Center Mechatronics Ernst-Blickle-Straße 1 Fax +49 7251 75-1711
76676 Graben-Neudorf [email protected]
Electronics SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-1780
Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42 Fax +49 7251 75-1769
76646 Bruchsal [email protected]
Drive Technology North SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 5137 8798-30
Center Alte Ricklinger Straße 40-42 Fax +49 5137 8798-55
30823 Garbsen (Hannover) [email protected]
East SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 3764 7606-0
Dänkritzer Weg 1 Fax +49 3764 7606-30
08393 Meerane (Zwickau) [email protected]
South SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 89 909552-10
Domagkstraße 5 Fax +49 89 909552-50
85551 Kirchheim (München) [email protected]
West SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 2173 8507-30
Siemensstraße 1 Fax +49 2173 8507-55
40764 Langenfeld (Düsseldorf) [email protected]
Drive Center Berlin SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 306331131-30
Alexander-Meißner-Straße 44 Fax +49 306331131-36
12526 Berlin [email protected]
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Ludwigshafen SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75 3759

c/o BASF SE Fax +49 7251 75 503759
Gebäude W130 Raum 101 [email protected]
67056 Ludwigshafen
Saarland SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 6831 48946 10
Gottlieb-Daimler-Straße 4 Fax +49 6831 48946 13
66773 Schwalbach Saar – Hülzweiler [email protected]
Ulm SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7348 9885-0
Dieselstraße 18 Fax +49 7348 9885-90
89160 Dornstadt [email protected]

14 Address list
Germany
Würzburg SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 931 27886-60
Nürnbergerstraße 118 Fax +49 931 27886-66
97076 Würzburg-Lengfeld [email protected]
Drive Service Hotline / 24 Hour Service 0 800 SEWHELP
0 800 7394357
Great Britain
Assembly Normanton SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd. Tel. +44 1924 893-855
Sales DeVilliers Way Fax +44 1924 893-702
Service Trident Park http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.uk
Normanton [email protected]
West Yorkshire
WF6 1GX
Drive Service Hotline / 24 Hour Service Tel. 01924 896911
Greece
Sales Athens Christ. Boznos & Son S.A. Tel. +30 2 1042 251-34
12, K. Mavromichali Street Fax +30 2 1042 251-59
P.O. Box 80136 http://www.boznos.gr
18545 Piraeus [email protected]
Hungary
Sales Budapest SEW-EURODRIVE Kft. Tel. +36 1 437 06-58
Service Csillaghegyí út 13. Fax +36 1 437 06-50
1037 Budapest http://www.sew-eurodrive.hu
[email protected]
Iceland
Sales Reykjavik Varma & Vélaverk ehf. Tel. +354 585 1070
Knarrarvogi 4 Fax +354 585)1071
104 Reykjavík http://www.varmaverk.is
[email protected]
India
Registered Office Vadodara SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. +91 265 3045200
Assembly Plot No. 4, GIDC Fax +91 265 3045300
Sales POR Ramangamdi • Vadodara - 391 243 http://www.seweurodriveindia.com
Service Gujarat [email protected]
Assembly Chennai SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. +91 44 37188888
Sales Plot No. K3/1, Sipcot Industrial Park Phase II Fax +91 44 37188811
Service Mambakkam Village [email protected]
Sriperumbudur - 602105
Kancheepuram Dist, Tamil Nadu
Pune SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. +91 21 35 628700
Plant: Plot No. D236/1, Fax +91 21 35 628715
Chakan Industrial Area Phase- II, [email protected]
Warale, Tal- Khed,
Pune-410501, Maharashtra
Indonesia
Sales Medan PT. Serumpun Indah Lestari Tel. +62 61 687 1221
Jl.Pulau Solor no. 8, Kawasan Industri Medan Fax +62 61 6871429 / +62 61 6871458 / +62
II 61 30008041
Medan 20252 [email protected]
[email protected]
http://www.serumpunindah.com
Jakarta PT. Cahaya Sukses Abadi Tel. +62 21 65310599
Komplek Rukan Puri Mutiara Blok A no 99, Fax +62 21 65310600
Sunter [email protected]
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Jakarta 14350
Jakarta PT. Agrindo Putra Lestari Tel. +62 21 2921-8899
JL.Pantai Indah Selatan, Komplek Sentra In- Fax +62 21 2921-8988
dustri Terpadu, Pantai indah Kapuk Tahap III, [email protected]
Blok E No. 27 http://www.aplindo.com
Jakarta 14470

Address list
14
Indonesia
Surabaya PT. TRIAGRI JAYA ABADI Tel. +62 31 5990128
Jl. Sukosemolo No. 63, Galaxi Bumi Permai Fax +62 31 5962666
G6 No. 11 [email protected]
Surabaya 60111 http://www.triagri.co.id
Surabaya CV. Multi Mas Tel. +62 31 5458589
Jl. Raden Saleh 43A Kav. 18 Fax +62 31 5317220
Surabaya 60174 [email protected]
http://www.cvmultimas.com
Ireland
Sales Dublin Alperton Engineering Ltd. Tel. +353 1 830-6277
Service 48 Moyle Road Fax +353 1 830-6458
Dublin Industrial Estate http://www.alperton.ie
Glasnevin, Dublin 11 [email protected]
Israel
Sales Tel Aviv Liraz Handasa Ltd. Tel. +972 3 5599511
Ahofer Str 34B / 228 Fax +972 3 5599512
58858 Holon http://www.liraz-handasa.co.il
[email protected]
Italy
Assembly Milan SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s. Tel. +39 02 96 980229 14
Sales Via Bernini,14 Fax +39 02 96 980 999
Service 20020 Solaro (Milano) http://www.sew-eurodrive.it
[email protected]
Ivory Coast
Sales Abidjan SEW-EURODRIVE SARL Tel. +225 21 21 81 05
Ivory Coast Fax +225 21 25 30 47
Rue des Pêcheurs, Zone 3 [email protected]
26 BP 916 Abidjan 26 http://www.sew-eurodrive.ci
Japan
Assembly Iwata SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD Tel. +81 538 373811
Sales 250-1, Shimoman-no, Fax +81 538 373814
Service Iwata http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.jp
Shizuoka 438-0818 [email protected]
[email protected]
Kazakhstan
Sales Almaty SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +7 (727) 350 5156
291-291A, Tole bi street Fax +7 (727) 350 5156
050031, Almaty http://www.sew-eurodrive.kz
[email protected]
Tashkent SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +998 71 2359411

Representative office in Uzbekistan Fax +998 71 2359412
96A, Sharaf Rashidov street, http://www.sew-eurodrive.uz
Tashkent, 100084 [email protected]
Ulaanbaatar IM Trading LLC Tel. +976-77109997
Narny zam street 62 Fax +976-77109997
Sukhbaatar district, [email protected]
Ulaanbaatar 14230
Kenya
Sales Nairobi SEW-EURODRIVE Pty Ltd Tel. +254 791 398840
Transnational Plaza, 5th Floor http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.tz
Mama Ngina Street [email protected]
P.O. Box 8998-00100
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Nairobi
Latvia
Sales Riga SIA Alas-Kuul Tel. +371 6 7139253
Katlakalna 11C Fax +371 6 7139386
1073 Riga http://www.alas-kuul.lv
[email protected]

14 Address list
Lebanon
Sales (Lebanon) Beirut Gabriel Acar & Fils sarl Tel. +961 1 510 532
B. P. 80484 Fax +961 1 494 971
Bourj Hammoud, Beirut [email protected]
Sales (Jordan, Kuwait , Beirut Middle East Drives S.A.L. (offshore) Tel. +961 1 494 786
Saudi Arabia, Syria) Sin El Fil. Fax +961 1 494 971
B. P. 55-378 http://www.medrives.com
Beirut [email protected]
Lithuania
Sales Alytus UAB Irseva Tel. +370 315 79204
Statybininku 106C Fax +370 315 56175
63431 Alytus http://www.irseva.lt
[email protected]
Luxembourg
representation: Belgium
Macedonia
Sales Skopje Boznos DOOEL Tel. +389 23256553
Dime Anicin 2A/7A Fax +389 23256554
1000 Skopje http://www.boznos.mk
Malaysia
Assembly Johor SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHD Tel. +60 7 3549409
Sales No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya Fax +60 7 3541404
Service 81000 Johor Bahru, Johor [email protected]
West Malaysia
Mexiko
Assembly Quéretaro SEW-EURODRIVE MEXICO S.A. de C.V. Tel. +52 442 1030-300
Sales SEM-981118-M93 Fax +52 442 1030-301
Service Tequisquiapan No. 102 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.mx
Parque Industrial Quéretaro [email protected]
C.P. 76220
Querétaro, México
Sales Puebla SEW-EURODRIVE MEXICO S.A. de C.V. Tel. +52 (222) 221 248
Service Calzada Zavaleta No. 3922 Piso 2 Local 6 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.mx
Col. Santa Cruz Buenavista [email protected]
C.P. 72154
Puebla, México
Mongolia
Technical Office Ulaanbaatar IM Trading LLC Tel. +976-77109997
Narny zam street 62 Tel. +976-99070395
Union building, Suite A-403-1 Fax +976-77109997
Sukhbaatar district, http://imt.mn/
Ulaanbaatar 14230 [email protected]
Morocco
Sales Bouskoura SEW-EURODRIVE Morocco Tel. +212 522 88 85 00
Service Parc Industriel CFCIM, Lot 55 and 59 Fax +212 522 88 84 50
Bouskoura http://www.sew-eurodrive.ma
[email protected]
Namibia
Sales Swakopmund DB Mining & Industrial Services Tel. +264 64 462 738
Einstein Street Fax +264 64 462 734
Strauss Industrial Park [email protected]
Unit1
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Swakopmund
Netherlands
Assembly Rotterdam SEW-EURODRIVE B.V. Tel. +31 10 4463-700
Sales Industrieweg 175 Fax +31 10 4155-552
Service 3044 AS Rotterdam Service: 0800-SEWHELP
Postbus 10085 http://www.sew-eurodrive.nl
3004 AB Rotterdam [email protected]

Address list
14
New Zealand
Assembly Auckland SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. Tel. +64 9 2745627
Sales P.O. Box 58-428 Fax +64 9 2740165
Service 82 Greenmount drive http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.nz
East Tamaki Auckland [email protected]
Christchurch SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. Tel. +64 3 384-6251
30 Lodestar Avenue, Wigram Fax +64 3 384-6455
Christchurch [email protected]
Nigeria
Sales Lagos Greenpeg Nig. Ltd Tel. +234-701-821-9200-1
Plot 296A, Adeyemo Akapo Str. Omole GRA http://www.greenpegltd.com
Ikeja Lagos-Nigeria [email protected]
Norway
Assembly Moss SEW-EURODRIVE A/S Tel. +47 69 24 10 20
Sales Solgaard skog 71 Fax +47 69 24 10 40
Service 1599 Moss http://www.sew-eurodrive.no
[email protected]
Pakistan
Sales Karachi Industrial Power Drives Tel. +92 21 452 9369
Al-Fatah Chamber A/3, 1st Floor Central Com- Fax +92-21-454 7365
mercial Area, [email protected] 14
Sultan Ahmed Shah Road, Block 7/8,
Karachi
Paraguay
Sales Fernando de la SEW-EURODRIVE PARAGUAY S.R.L Tel. +595 991 519695
Mora De la Victoria 112, Esquina nueva Asunción Fax +595 21 3285539
Departamento Central [email protected]
Fernando de la Mora, Barrio Bernardino
Peru
Assembly Lima SEW EURODRIVE DEL PERU S.A.C. Tel. +51 1 3495280
Sales Los Calderos, 120-124 Fax +51 1 3493002
Service Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.pe
[email protected]
Philippines
Sales Makati P.T. Cerna Corporation Tel. +63 2 519 6214
4137 Ponte St., Brgy. Sta. Cruz Fax +63 2 890 2802
Makati City 1205 [email protected]
http://www.ptcerna.com
Poland
Assembly Łódź SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o. Tel. +48 42 293 00 00
Sales ul. Techniczna 5 Fax +48 42 293 00 49
Service 92-518 Łódź http://www.sew-eurodrive.pl
[email protected]
Service Tel. +48 42 293 0030 24 Hour Service
Fax +48 42 293 0043 Tel. +48 602 739 739 (+48 602 SEW SEW)
[email protected]
Portugal
Assembly Coimbra SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA. Tel. +351 231 20 9670
Sales Av. da Fonte Nova, n.º 86 Fax +351 231 20 3685
Service 3050-379 Mealhada http://www.sew-eurodrive.pt
[email protected]
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Romania
Sales Bucharest Sialco Trading SRL Tel. +40 21 230-1328
Service str. Brazilia nr. 36 Fax +40 21 230-7170
011783 Bucuresti [email protected]
Russia
Assembly St. Petersburg ЗАО «СЕВ-ЕВРОДРАЙФ» Tel. +7 812 3332522 / +7 812 5357142
Sales а. я. 36 Fax +7 812 3332523
Service 195220 Санкт-Петербург http://www.sew-eurodrive.ru
[email protected]

14 Address list
Sambia
representation: South Africa
Senegal
Sales Dakar SENEMECA Tel. +221 338 494 770
Mécanique Générale Fax +221 338 494 771
Km 8, Route de Rufisque http://www.senemeca.com
B.P. 3251, Dakar [email protected]
Serbia
Sales Belgrade DIPAR d.o.o. Tel. +381 11 347 3244 / +381 11 288 0393
Ustanicka 128a Fax +381 11 347 1337
PC Košum, IV floor [email protected]
11000 Beograd
Singapore
Assembly Singapore SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD. Tel. +65 68621701
Sales No 9, Tuas Drive 2 Fax +65 68612827
Service Jurong Industrial Estate http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.sg
Singapore 638644 [email protected]
Slovakia
Sales Bratislava SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Tel.+421 2 33595 202, 217, 201
Rybničná 40 Fax +421 2 33595 200
831 06 Bratislava http://www.sew-eurodrive.sk
[email protected]
Košice SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Tel. +421 55 671 2245
Slovenská ulica 26 Fax +421 55 671 2254
040 01 Košice Mobile +421 907 671 976
[email protected]
Slovenia
Sales Celje Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o. Tel. +386 3 490 83-20
Service UI. XIV. divizije 14 Fax +386 3 490 83-21
3000 Celje [email protected]
South Africa
Assembly Johannesburg SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 11 248-7000
Sales Eurodrive House Fax +27 11 248-7289
Service Cnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome Roads http://www.sew.co.za
Aeroton Ext. 2 [email protected]
Johannesburg 2013
P.O.Box 90004
Bertsham 2013
Cape Town SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 21 552-9820
Rainbow Park Fax +27 21 552-9830
Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road Telex 576 062
Montague Gardens [email protected]
Cape Town
P.O.Box 36556
Chempet 7442
Durban SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 31 902 3815
48 Prospecton Road Fax +27 31 902 3826
Isipingo [email protected]
Durban
P.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605
Nelspruit SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 13 752-8007
7 Christie Crescent Fax +27 13 752-8008
Vintonia [email protected]
P.O.Box 1942
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Nelspruit 1200
South Korea
Assembly Ansan SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD. Tel. +82 31 492-8051
Sales 7, Dangjaengi-ro, Fax +82 31 492-8056
Service Danwon-gu, http://www.sew-eurodrive.kr
Ansan-si, Gyeonggi-do, Zip 425-839 [email protected]

Address list
14
South Korea
Busan SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD. Tel. +82 51 832-0204
28, Noksansandan 262-ro 50beon-gil, Fax +82 51 832-0230
Gangseo-gu,
Busan, Zip 618-820
Spain
Assembly Bilbao SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAÑA, S.L. Tel. +34 94 43184-70
Sales Parque Tecnológico, Edificio, 302 Fax +34 94 43184-71
Service 48170 Zamudio (Vizcaya) http://www.sew-eurodrive.es
[email protected]
Sri Lanka
Sales Colombo SM International (Pte) Ltd Tel. +94 1 2584887
254, Galle Raod Fax +94 1 2582981
Colombo 4, Sri Lanka
Swaziland
Sales Manzini C G Trading Co. (Pty) Ltd Tel. +268 2 518 6343
PO Box 2960 Fax +268 2 518 5033
Manzini M200 [email protected]
Sweden
Assembly Jönköping SEW-EURODRIVE AB Tel. +46 36 34 42 00 14
Sales Gnejsvägen 6-8 Fax +46 36 34 42 80
Service 553 03 Jönköping http://www.sew-eurodrive.se
Box 3100 S-550 03 Jönköping [email protected]
Switzerland
Assembly Basel Alfred lmhof A.G. Tel. +41 61 417 1717
Sales Jurastrasse 10 Fax +41 61 417 1700
Service 4142 Münchenstein bei Basel http://www.imhof-sew.ch
[email protected]
Taiwan
Sales Taipei Ting Shou Trading Co., Ltd. Tel. +886 2 27383535
6F-3, No. 267, Sec. 2 Fax +886 2 27368268
Tung Huw S. Road Telex 27 245
Taipei [email protected]
http://www.tingshou.com.tw
Nan Tou Ting Shou Trading Co., Ltd. Tel. +886 49 255353
No. 55 Kung Yeh N. Road Fax +886 49 257878
Industrial District [email protected]
Nan Tou 540 http://www.tingshou.com.tw
Tanzania
Sales Daressalam SEW-EURODRIVE PTY LIMITED TANZANIA Tel. +255 0 22 277 5780
Plot 52, Regent Estate Fax +255 0 22 277 5788
PO Box 106274 http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.tz
Dar Es Salaam [email protected]
Thailand
Assembly Chonburi SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd. Tel. +66 38 454281
Sales 700/456, Moo.7, Donhuaroh Fax +66 38 454288
Service Muang [email protected]
Chonburi 20000
Tunisia
Sales Tunis T. M.S. Technic Marketing Service Tel. +216 79 40 88 77
Zone Industrielle Mghira 2 Fax +216 79 40 88 66
23085711/EN – 03/2017
Lot No. 39 http://www.tms.com.tn

2082 Fouchana [email protected]
Turkey
Assembly Kocaeli-Gebze SEW-EURODRİVE Hareket Tel. +90 262 9991000 04
Sales Sistemleri San. Ve TIC. Ltd. Sti Fax +90 262 9991009
Service Gebze Organize Sanayi Böl. 400 Sok No. 401 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.tr
41480 Gebze Kocaeli [email protected]

14 Address list
Ukraine
Assembly Dnipropetrovsk ООО «СЕВ-Евродрайв» Tel. +380 56 370 3211
Sales ул. Рабочая, 23-B, офис 409 Fax +380 56 372 2078
Service 49008 Днепропетровск http://www.sew-eurodrive.ua
[email protected]
Uruguay
Assembly Montevideo SEW-EURODRIVE Uruguay, S. A. Tel. +598 2 21181-89
Sales Jose Serrato 3569 Esqina Corumbe Fax +598 2 21181-90
CP 12000 Montevideo [email protected]
USA
Production Southeast SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 864 439-7537
Assembly Region 1295 Old Spartanburg Highway Fax Sales +1 864 439-7830
Sales P.O. Box 518 Fax Production +1 864 439-9948
Service Lyman, S.C. 29365 Fax Assembly +1 864 439-0566
Fax Confidential/HR +1 864 949-5557
http://www.seweurodrive.com
[email protected]
Assembly Northeast SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 856 467-2277
Sales Region Pureland Ind. Complex Fax +1 856 845-3179
Service 2107 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481 [email protected]
Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014
Midwest SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 937 335-0036
Region 2001 West Main Street Fax +1 937 332-0038
Troy, Ohio 45373 [email protected]
Southwest SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 214 330-4824
Region 3950 Platinum Way Fax +1 214 330-4724
Dallas, Texas 75237 [email protected]
Western SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 510 487-3560
Region 30599 San Antonio St. Fax +1 510 487-6433
Hayward, CA 94544 [email protected]
Wellford SEW-EURODRIVE INC. [email protected]
148/150 Finch Rd.
Wellford, S.C. 29385
Additional addresses for service provided on request!
Uzbekistan
Technical Office Tashkent SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +998 71 2359411
Representative office in Uzbekistan Fax +998 71 2359412
96A, Sharaf Rashidov street, http://www.sew-eurodrive.uz
Tashkent, 100084 [email protected]
Vietnam
Sales Ho Chi Minh Nam Trung Co., Ltd Tel. +84 8 8301026
City Huế - South Vietnam / Construction Materials Fax +84 8 8392223
250 Binh Duong Avenue, Thu Dau Mot Town, [email protected]
Binh Duong Province http://www.namtrung.com.vn
HCM office: 91 Tran Minh Quyen Street
District 10, Ho Chi Minh City
Hanoi MICO LTD Tel. +84 4 39386666
Quảng Trị - North Vietnam / All sectors except Fax +84 4 3938 6888
Construction Materials [email protected]
8th Floor, Ocean Park Building, 01 Dao Duy http://www.micogroup.com.vn
Anh St, Ha Noi, Viet Nam
23085711/EN – 03/2017

SEW-EURODRIVE—Driving the world
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG

P.O. Box 3023
76642 BRUCHSAL
GERMANY
Phone +49 7251 75-0
Fax +49 7251 75-1970
[email protected]
www.sew-eurodrive.com

Manuel Movi-C Version Modulaire

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manuel Movi-C Version Modulaire

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services *23085711_0317*

Edition 03/2017 23085711/EN

4 Prefabricated cables ............................................................................................................ 132

4.5 Power cables for CFM.. motors .................................................................................. 143

5 General information.............................................................................................................. 160

Product Manual – MOVIDRIVE® modular 3

5.2 Structure of the safety notes ....................................................................................... 160

6 Safety notes .......................................................................................................................... 164

7 Unit structure, axis system structure ................................................................................. 170

8.11 EMC-compliant installation ......................................................................................... 246

9 Startup ................................................................................................................................... 280

4 Product Manual – MOVIDRIVE® modular

9.2 Setting the EtherCAT®/SBusPLUS ID ............................................................................ 281

11 Service ................................................................................................................................... 333

12 Functional safety .................................................................................................................. 335

13 Appendix ............................................................................................................................... 352

Index ...................................................................................................................................... 356

14 Address list ........................................................................................................................... 362

Product Manual – MOVIDRIVE® modular 5

CONTROLLER, the controller from SEW‑EURODRIVE.

6 Product Manual – MOVIDRIVE® modular

• Scope and diagnostics.

Product Manual – MOVIDRIVE® modular 7

1.1 Device availability

8 Product Manual – MOVIDRIVE® modular

Power supply module

• Performance classes: 10/25/50/75/110 kW

• Axis sizes: 2 – 180 A

Product Manual – MOVIDRIVE® modular 9

• You can operate 2 motors with one module

10 Product Manual – MOVIDRIVE® modular

The multi-encoder card enables evaluating additional encoders.

For further information on the control, refer to the manual "MOVI-C®

Product Manual – MOVIDRIVE® modular 11

For further information on the control, refer to the manual "MOVI-C®

12 Product Manual – MOVIDRIVE® modular

1.3.1 MDP90A.. power supply modules

Nominal line voltage 3 × AC 380 – 500 V

Type designation Nominal Nominal DC Maximum Nominal Size Technical

Product Manual – MOVIDRIVE® modular 13

1.3.2 MDA90A..single-axis modules

Nominal DC link voltage DC 560 V

Type designation Nominal Nominal Nominal Maximum Size Technical

MDA90A-1800-503-X-S00 180 125 - 360 6

14 Product Manual – MOVIDRIVE® modular

Nominal DC link voltage DC 560 V

Type designation Nominal out- Nominal out- Maximum Size Technical

...-S00/X Without option card slot

Product Manual – MOVIDRIVE® modular 15

1.4 Product overview accessories

1.4.1 CID21A input/output card

1.4.2 CIO21A input/output card

1.4.3 CES11A multi-encoder card

HTL 12/24 V (differential)

16 Product Manual – MOVIDRIVE® modular

Product Manual – MOVIDRIVE® modular 17

1.5.1 Description of the FCBs

FCB 01 Output stage inhibit

FCB 02 Default stop

FCB 04 Manual mode

FCB 05 Speed control

FCB 06 Interpolated speed control

FCB 07 Torque control

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services 23085711_0317